USN58 Manual PDF

GE Inspection Technologies
Ultrasonics
USN 58 Series
Technical Reference and
Operating Manual
Ident-Nr. 021-002-260
GE Inspection Technologies
Ultrasonics
USN 58 Series
Technical Reference and
Operating Manual
Ident-Nr. 021-002-260
Contents
1 Understanding the Keypad,

Menu System, and Displays ............. 1-1
1.1
Battery installation ................................. 1-2
1.2
Powering On and Off the Instrument .... 1-5
1.3
Keypad and Knob Features ................... 1-5
1.4
USN 58 Menus and Functions ............... 1-8

1.4.1 Home Menu System ..................... 1-9
1.4.2 Test Menus and Functions ...........1-16
1.5
Display Screen Features .......................1-16

Definition of Display Icons ...................... 1-19
1.6
Features of the USN 58 ......................... 1-19
1.7
Whats in this Manual ...........................1-21
1.8
Overview of Optional Features ............. 1-23

1.8.1 Determing Which Optional Features
are Installed in Your USN 58 ........1-23
1.8.2 How Options are Dealt with in
This Manual ................................. 1-24
Krautkramer USN 58 Series
2 Setup and Calibration of the USN 58 . 2-1

2.1
2.2
Initial Instrument Setup .........................

Specifying the Installed Battery Type .......
2.1.1 Regional Settings-Language, Units
of Measurement, Date, and Time ..
Setting the Operating Language ...............
Setting the Date .......................................
Setting the Time .......................................
Setting the Units of Measurement ............
2.1.2 Display Appearance ......................
Setting the Display Brightness .................
Selecting a Display Grid ..........................
Selecting Reverse Video Mode58R ........
Setting the Display Color58L ..................
Setting the A-Scan Color58L ..................
Setting the A-Scan Style .........................
2-2
2-2
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
Installing a Probe .................................. 2-8

2.2.1 Connecting a Probe ...................... 2-8
2.2.2 Configuring the Instrument to
Match the Probe Type ................... 2-9
Issue 04, 05/04
0-1
Contents
1 Understanding the Keypad,

Menu System, and Displays ............. 1-1
1.1
Battery installation ................................. 1-2
1.2
Powering On and Off the Instrument .... 1-5
1.3
Keypad and Knob Features ................... 1-5
1.4
USN 58 Menus and Functions ............... 1-8

1.4.1 Home Menu System ..................... 1-9
1.4.2 Test Menus and Functions ...........1-16
1.5
Display Screen Features .......................1-16

Definition of Display Icons ...................... 1-19
1.6
Features of the USN 58 ......................... 1-19
1.7
Whats in this Manual ...........................1-21
1.8
Overview of Optional Features ............. 1-23

are Installed in Your USN 58 ........1-23
1.8.2 How Options are Dealt with in
This Manual ................................. 1-24
2 Setup and Calibration of the USN 58 . 2-1

2.1
2.2
Issue 04, 05/04
Initial Instrument Setup .........................

Specifying the Installed Battery Type .......
of Measurement, Date, and Time ..
Setting the Operating Language ...............
Setting the Date .......................................
Setting the Time .......................................
Setting the Units of Measurement ............
2.1.2 Display Appearance ......................
Setting the Display Brightness .................
Selecting a Display Grid ..........................
Selecting Reverse Video Mode58R ........
Setting the Display Color58L ..................
Setting the A-Scan Color58L ..................
Setting the A-Scan Style .........................
2-2
2-2
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
Installing a Probe .................................. 2-8

2.2.1 Connecting a Probe ...................... 2-8
Match the Probe Type ................... 2-9
0-1
Contents
Selecting Probe Type ............................... 2-9
Specifying the Probe Frequency .............. 2-9
Modifying the Signal Ratio to Noise by
Changing the Damping Level .................. 2-11
2.3
Adjusting the A-Scan ............................ 2-11

2.3.1 Setting the A-Scan Range ........... 2-11
Setting The A-Scan Range ...................... 2-14
2.3.2 Setting the Display Delay ............ 2-14
2.3.3 Defining the Display Starting
Point ............................................2-14
2.3.4 Adjusting the Pulser Repetition
Frequency (PRF) ..........................2-15
2.3.5 Selecting a Rectification Mode .... 2-16
2.3.6 Selecting the Pulser Type ............ 2-17
2.3.7 Setting the Pulser VOLTAGE or
ENERGY Level ............................ 2-18
2.3.8 Selecting the Pulser Width
(SQUARE Pulser Types only) ....... 2-18
2.3.9 Setting the A-Scan REJECT
Level ............................................2-19
0-2
2.4
Calibrating the Instrument .................... 2-19

2.4.1 Pre-calibration Check List ............2-19
2.4.2 Using AUTOCAL to Calibrate
USN 58 Series Instruments .........2-20
Checking Calibration Results .................. 2-22
3 Configuring Your Instrument

for Measurement ............................... 3-1
3.1
Issue 04, 05/04
Configuring the A and B-Gates .............

3.1.1 Positioning Gates .........................
Setting a Gates Starting Point .................
Adjusting a Gates Width ..........................
Setting a Gates Threshold
(Vertical Position) .....................................
3.1.2 Selecting the Gate Detection
Method .........................................
Setting the A-Scan Signal-Detection
Method ....................................................
3.1.3 Selecting the Gate to be
Magnified ......................................
3.1.4 Setting Gate Alarms and
TTL Outputs .................................
3-2
3-4
3-4
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-8
3-8
Contents
Selecting Probe Type ............................... 2-9
Specifying the Probe Frequency .............. 2-9
Changing the Damping Level .................. 2-11
2.3
0-2
Adjusting the A-Scan ............................ 2-11

2.3.1 Setting the A-Scan Range ........... 2-11
Setting The A-Scan Range ...................... 2-14
2.3.2 Setting the Display Delay ............ 2-14
Point ............................................2-14
Frequency (PRF) ..........................2-15
2.3.5 Selecting a Rectification Mode .... 2-16
2.3.6 Selecting the Pulser Type ............ 2-17
ENERGY Level ............................ 2-18
(SQUARE Pulser Types only) ....... 2-18
2.3.9 Setting the A-Scan REJECT
Level ............................................2-19
2.4
Calibrating the Instrument .................... 2-19

2.4.1 Pre-calibration Check List ............2-19
USN 58 Series Instruments .........2-20
Checking Calibration Results .................. 2-22
3 Configuring Your Instrument

for Measurement ............................... 3-1
3.1
Issue 04, 05/04
Configuring the A and B-Gates .............

3.1.1 Positioning Gates .........................
Setting a Gates Starting Point .................
Adjusting a Gates Width ..........................
Setting a Gates Threshold
(Vertical Position) .....................................
3.1.2 Selecting the Gate Detection
Method .........................................
Method ....................................................
3.1.3 Selecting the Gate to be
Magnified ......................................
TTL Outputs .................................
3-2
3-4
3-4
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-6
3-8
3-8
Contents
Defining Gate-Alarm Logic ....................... 3-9
Turning the Audible Alarm On or Off ......... 3-9
Assigning TTL Outputs / Alarm Indication
Lights to Gates and/or Limits ................... 3-9
3.1.5 Clearing TTL Outputs and/or
Warning Lights .............................3-10
3.1.6 Setting the Units of Amplitude
Measurement ............................... 3-11
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
Setting the Minimum and Maximum

Material-Thickness Limits ....................3-11
Thickness Limits ....................................3-12
Assigning Measured Readings to the

Displayed Reading Boxes ....................... 3-18
3.6
Saving the Instrument Configuration in a

Data Set ................................................. 3-20
3.7
Using the Master Lock (all models)

Function or the Lock Key (58L) to
Prevent Adjustment ..............................3-21
Locking the Gain and Function Rotary
Knobs .................................................... 3-21
4 Using the Test Menu .......................... 4-1

4.1
Accessing the TEST Menu ..................... 4-2
Setting the Freeze-Mode Action ...........3-12

Selecting the Freeze-Mode Action .......... 3-12
4.2
Using Angle Beam Probes and the TRIG

Menu ......................................................3-14
3.4.1 Setting Angle Beam Probe
Characteristics .............................3-15
3.4.2 Indicating Leg with Color (58L) .....3-16
Setting the Gain ..................................... 4-4

4.2.1 Changing the Gain-Adjustment
Increment (dB STEP) ................... 4-4
4.2.2 Setting the User-Defined Gain
Step .............................................. 4-6
4.3
Using the dB Reference Feature ............ 4-6
Displaying Measured Readings ............3-16
4.4
Changing the Displayed VIEW .............. 4-8
Issue 04, 05/04
0-3
Contents
Defining Gate-Alarm Logic ....................... 3-9
Turning the Audible Alarm On or Off ......... 3-9
Lights to Gates and/or Limits ................... 3-9
Warning Lights .............................3-10
Measurement ............................... 3-11
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

Material-Thickness Limits ....................3-11
Thickness Limits ....................................3-12

Displayed Reading Boxes ....................... 3-18
3.6
Saving the Instrument Configuration in a

Data Set ................................................. 3-20
3.7
Using the Master Lock (all models)

Function or the Lock Key (58L) to
Prevent Adjustment ..............................3-21
Knobs .................................................... 3-21
4 Using the Test Menu .......................... 4-1

4.1
Accessing the TEST Menu ..................... 4-2
Setting the Freeze-Mode Action ...........3-12

Selecting the Freeze-Mode Action .......... 3-12
4.2
Using Angle Beam Probes and the TRIG

Menu ......................................................3-14
Characteristics .............................3-15
3.4.2 Indicating Leg with Color (58L) .....3-16
Setting the Gain ..................................... 4-4

Increment (dB STEP) ................... 4-4
4.2.2 Setting the User-Defined Gain
Step .............................................. 4-6
4.3
Using the dB Reference Feature ............ 4-6
Displaying Measured Readings ............3-16
4.4
Changing the Displayed VIEW .............. 4-8
Issue 04, 05/04
0-3
Contents
4.5
Navigating Through a Data

Logger File and Attaching Notes ......... 4-10
5.3
Recalling Existing Data Files ...............5-10

5.3.1 Previewing Existing Data Files .... 5-11
4.6
Magnifying the Contents of a Gate ....... 4-10

Selecting the Gate to Be Magnified ......... 4-13
5.4
Deleting (CLEARING) Existing Data

Files ....................................................... 5-11
4.7
Resetting Latched Alarms ....................4-13
5.5
4.8
Large Display Box-Specifying the

Contents (LRG DISP) ............................ 4-13
Creating a Memo ................................... 5-12

5.5.1 Including a Files Memo as Part of
a Report ...................................... 5-12
4.9
Freezing the A-Scan Display ................ 4-15

4.9.1 Working in the Behind the Freeze
Mode ........................................... 4-15
5.6
Creating a Report Header .....................5-12

5.6.1 Including a Report Header In a
Printed Report .............................5-14
5.7
Entering and Editing Notes for

Attachment to Thickness
Measurements .......................................5-14
5.7.1 Including a Notes In a Printed
Report .........................................5-16
5.8
Printing a Report ................................... 5-16
5.9
Outputting to a Printer .......................... 5-18

5.9.1 Specifying the Printer Type and
Baud Rate ...................................5-18
5.9.2 Setting the COPY Key Function ...5-19
4.10 Accessing the HELP SCREENS ........... 4-17
5 Storing and Outputting Data ............ 5-1

5.1 Data Set and Data Logger Files ...............
5.1.1 Creating Data Set Files .................
5.1.2 Creating Data Logger Files ............
5.1.3 Editing Active Files .......................
5.2
5-4
5-6
5-6
5-8
Storing Thickness Measurements in

Data Logger Files .................................. 5-10
0-4
Issue 04, 05/04
Contents
4.5
Navigating Through a Data

Logger File and Attaching Notes ......... 4-10
5.3
Recalling Existing Data Files ...............5-10

5.3.1 Previewing Existing Data Files .... 5-11
4.6
Magnifying the Contents of a Gate ....... 4-10

Selecting the Gate to Be Magnified ......... 4-13
5.4
Deleting (CLEARING) Existing Data

Files ....................................................... 5-11
4.7
Resetting Latched Alarms ....................4-13
5.5
4.8
Large Display Box-Specifying the

Contents (LRG DISP) ............................ 4-13
Creating a Memo ................................... 5-12

a Report ...................................... 5-12
4.9
Freezing the A-Scan Display ................ 4-15

Mode ........................................... 4-15
5.6
Creating a Report Header .....................5-12

Printed Report .............................5-14
5.7
Entering and Editing Notes for

Measurements .......................................5-14
Report .........................................5-16
5.8
Printing a Report ................................... 5-16
5.9
Outputting to a Printer .......................... 5-18

Baud Rate ...................................5-18
5.9.2 Setting the COPY Key Function ...5-19
4.10 Accessing the HELP SCREENS ........... 4-17
5 Storing and Outputting Data ............ 5-1

5.1 Data Set and Data Logger Files ...............
5.1.1 Creating Data Set Files .................
5.1.2 Creating Data Logger Files ............
5.1.3 Editing Active Files .......................
5.2
0-4
5-4
5-6
5-6
5-8
Storing Thickness Measurements in

Data Logger Files .................................. 5-10
Issue 04, 05/04
Contents
5.10 Outputting to a Computer via the
RS-232 Serial Port ................................. 5-20
5.10.1 Specifying the Baud Rate ............5-20
5.10.2 Loss of Signal ..............................5-20
6 Advanced Base-Model
Features ............................................. 6-1
6.1
Noise Immunization .............................. 6-2
6.2
Using SMART VIEW ............................... 6-3
6.3
Using A-Scan Enhancement Analog

Display Emulation ................................. 6-4
6.3.1 SPARKLE Intensity Variation
(58L only) ...................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Baseline Break ............................. 6-4
6.4
AWS D1.1 Weld Rating Feature .............. 6-7
6.5
Resetting the Instrument ....................... 6-9
7.2
Analog Output ........................................ 7-3
7.3
Remote Control of the USN 58 .............. 7-6
7.4
Remote Codes for the USN 58 ............... 7-7
8 DAC/TCG Option ................................ 8-1

8.1
8.2
8.3
7 I/O Ports Technical Data .................... 7-1

7.1
Using TCG ..............................................

8.1.1 Recording the TCG Reference
Points ...........................................
8.1.2 Working with TCG .........................
Using TCG ATTENUATION .......................
8-2
Using DAC ...............................................

8.2.1 Recording the DAC Curve .............
8.2.2 Working with DAC .........................
Creating DAC Offset Curves ....................
Adjusting the Applied Gain Using
TRANSFER CORRECTION .....................
8-6
8-6
8-7
8-9
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-9
Editing DAC Curve and TCG

Reference Points ...................................8-10
Sending Readings to Other Devices ..... 7-2
Issue 04, 05/04
0-5
Contents
5.10 Outputting to a Computer via the
RS-232 Serial Port ................................. 5-20
5.10.1 Specifying the Baud Rate ............5-20
5.10.2 Loss of Signal ..............................5-20
6 Advanced Base-Model
Features ............................................. 6-1
6.1
Noise Immunization .............................. 6-2
6.2
Using SMART VIEW ............................... 6-3
6.3
Using A-Scan Enhancement Analog

Display Emulation ................................. 6-4
(58L only) ...................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Baseline Break ............................. 6-4
6.4
AWS D1.1 Weld Rating Feature .............. 6-7
6.5
Resetting the Instrument ....................... 6-9
7.2
Analog Output ........................................ 7-3
7.3
Remote Control of the USN 58 .............. 7-6
7.4
Remote Codes for the USN 58 ............... 7-7
8 DAC/TCG Option ................................ 8-1

8.1
8.2
8.3
7 I/O Ports Technical Data .................... 7-1

7.1
Using TCG ..............................................

Points ...........................................
8.1.2 Working with TCG .........................
Using TCG ATTENUATION .......................
8-2
Using DAC ...............................................

8.2.1 Recording the DAC Curve .............
8.2.2 Working with DAC .........................
Creating DAC Offset Curves ....................
TRANSFER CORRECTION .....................
8-6
8-6
8-7
8-9
8-3
8-4
8-4
8-9
Editing DAC Curve and TCG

Sending Readings to Other Devices ..... 7-2
Issue 04, 05/04
0-5
Contents
8.4
Deleting a DAC Curve or TCG

10.1.2 Record the Reference Echo that

Defines the DGS Curve ...............10-4
10.1.3 Display and Adjust the DGS
Curve ........................................... 10-6
9 Interface (IF) Gate Option .................. 9-1

9.1
9.2
IF Gate Setup .........................................

9.1.1 Immersion Testing Method ............
9.1.2 IF Gate Crossing as the Display
Starting Point ................................
9.1.3 Configuring the IF Gate .................
9.1.4 Setting Gates A and B Relative to
IF Gate Using START MODE ........
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-4
10.2 Evaluating Test Samples in DGS Mode 10-8
11 BEA (Backwall Echo Attenuator)

Option ............................................... 11-1
11-1 Using Backwall Echo Attenuator Mode 11-2
9-5
11-2 Notes on Operating in BEA Mode ........11-3
Measurements Based on IF Gate

Crossings ............................................... 9-5
9.2.1 IF-Gate Measurements ................. 9-7
9.2.2 Using IF OFFSET ......................... 9-7
12 VGA Connector Option ................... 12-1
10 DGS Option ...................................... 10-1

10.1 Using DGS ............................................. 10-2
10.1.1 Specifying a Probe and Preparing to
Record the Reference Echo ......... 10-2
0-6
13 Appendix .......................................... 13-1

13.1 Charging the Standard Lithium
Battery Pack ..........................................13-2
13.2 Charging the Optional D-Cell
Batteries ................................................13-3
14 Index ................................................. 14-1
Issue 04, 05/04
Contents
8.4
Deleting a DAC Curve or TCG


Defines the DGS Curve ...............10-4
10.1.3 Display and Adjust the DGS
Curve ........................................... 10-6
9 Interface (IF) Gate Option .................. 9-1

9.1
9.2
IF Gate Setup .........................................

9.1.1 Immersion Testing Method ............
Starting Point ................................
9.1.3 Configuring the IF Gate .................
9.1.4 Setting Gates A and B Relative to
IF Gate Using START MODE ........
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-4
11 BEA (Backwall Echo Attenuator)

Option ............................................... 11-1
11-1 Using Backwall Echo Attenuator Mode 11-2
9-5
11-2 Notes on Operating in BEA Mode ........11-3
Measurements Based on IF Gate

Crossings ............................................... 9-5
9.2.1 IF-Gate Measurements ................. 9-7
9.2.2 Using IF OFFSET ......................... 9-7
12 VGA Connector Option ................... 12-1
10 DGS Option ...................................... 10-1

10.1 Using DGS ............................................. 10-2
Record the Reference Echo ......... 10-2
0-6
10.2 Evaluating Test Samples in DGS Mode 10-8
13 Appendix .......................................... 13-1

13.1 Charging the Standard Lithium
Battery Pack ..........................................13-2
Batteries ................................................13-3
14 Index ................................................. 14-1
Issue 04, 05/04
Important Notice
Important Notice
these factors are beyond the scope of the operating

manual.
Please read the following information prior to use of any

Krautkramer instrument.
Training
General Warning
The correct and effective use of ultrasonic test
equipment requires the interaction of three essential
factors:
The test equipment itself
The specific test applications
The operator
The customer must provide for adequate training of the

operators to assure competence in the operation of the
equipment and in the associated factors. The operator
must be trained both in general ultrasonic testing
procedure and in the set-up and performance of a
particular test or application. The requirements for
formalized training, qualification, and certification of
operators are included, for example, in SNT-TC-1A, and
are referenced in many other industry specifications.
Ultrasonic Theory
The principal purpose of this operating manual will be to

give instructions in the basic set-up and functional
operation of the test equipment. Such information is
covered in detail within the manual.
Knowledge of soundwave propagation theory, including

the effects of velocity of sound, attenuation, reflection,
and the limitation of the sound beam must be
understood by the operator.
Other variable factors, some of which are noted below,

and the actions necessary to control them, are the
responsibility of the customer/user. Details regarding
Issue 04, 05/04
0-7
Important Notice
Important Notice
these factors are beyond the scope of the operating

manual.
Please read the following information prior to use of any

Krautkramer instrument.
Training
General Warning
The correct and effective use of ultrasonic test
equipment requires the interaction of three essential
factors:
The test equipment itself
The specific test applications
The operator
The customer must provide for adequate training of the

operators to assure competence in the operation of the
equipment and in the associated factors. The operator
must be trained both in general ultrasonic testing
procedure and in the set-up and performance of a
particular test or application. The requirements for
formalized training, qualification, and certification of
operators are included, for example, in SNT-TC-1A, and
are referenced in many other industry specifications.
Ultrasonic Theory
The principal purpose of this operating manual will be to

give instructions in the basic set-up and functional
operation of the test equipment. Such information is
covered in detail within the manual.
Knowledge of soundwave propagation theory, including

the effects of velocity of sound, attenuation, reflection,
and the limitation of the sound beam must be
understood by the operator.
Other variable factors, some of which are noted below,

and the actions necessary to control them, are the
responsibility of the customer/user. Details regarding
Issue 04, 05/04
0-7
Important Notice
Test Application Requirements
These include a definition of the test problem, selection
of suitable techniques, adequate probes, proper
couplant, evaluation of discovered conditions in the test
material, and the selection of acceptance or rejection
limits. Knowledge of the probability of occurrence of
defective conditions is often based on experience as
well as engineering knowledge of the system and its
stresses.
In testing extended areas beyond the expected sound

beam path, extrapolations or other assumptions are
sometimes based on statistical and other modifications
of actual data obtained. Such results and their use and
interpretation are the sole responsibility of the user.
Flaw Size Evaluation
Customer engineers should supply specific test

application requirements to the operator.
Coverage and Location of Test

In ultrasonic testing, the information obtained
instantaneously represents only the data from within
the limits of the sound beam. Selection of test
locations as well as the degree of scanning or coverage
of the part, is based on customer knowledge of
expected defective areas, material being tested,
environment and similar factors. Geometry of the part,
or presence of flaws or other interfaces, may shadow
certain areas located deeper in the test material, even
0-8
though within the limits of the sound beam, thus

preventing detection of possible conditions in the
shadowed area.
In present test practice there are basically two methods

of assessing flaws. If the diameter of the sound beam
is smaller than the extent of the flaw, then the beam
can be used to explore the boundaries of the flaw to
determine its area.
If, however, the diameter of the sound beam is greater
than the size of the flaw, the maximum echo response
from the flaw must be compared with the maximum
echo response from an artificial flaw provided for
comparison purposes.
Flaw Boundary Method: The smaller the diameter of

the sound beam, the more accurately the boundaries
Issue 04, 05/04
Important Notice
Test Application Requirements
These include a definition of the test problem, selection
of suitable techniques, adequate probes, proper
couplant, evaluation of discovered conditions in the test
material, and the selection of acceptance or rejection
limits. Knowledge of the probability of occurrence of
defective conditions is often based on experience as
well as engineering knowledge of the system and its
stresses.
In testing extended areas beyond the expected sound

beam path, extrapolations or other assumptions are
sometimes based on statistical and other modifications
of actual data obtained. Such results and their use and
interpretation are the sole responsibility of the user.
Flaw Size Evaluation
Customer engineers should supply specific test

application requirements to the operator.
Coverage and Location of Test

In ultrasonic testing, the information obtained
instantaneously represents only the data from within
the limits of the sound beam. Selection of test
locations as well as the degree of scanning or coverage
of the part, is based on customer knowledge of
expected defective areas, material being tested,
environment and similar factors. Geometry of the part,
or presence of flaws or other interfaces, may shadow
certain areas located deeper in the test material, even
0-8
though within the limits of the sound beam, thus

preventing detection of possible conditions in the
shadowed area.
In present test practice there are basically two methods

of assessing flaws. If the diameter of the sound beam
is smaller than the extent of the flaw, then the beam
can be used to explore the boundaries of the flaw to
determine its area.
If, however, the diameter of the sound beam is greater
than the size of the flaw, the maximum echo response
from the flaw must be compared with the maximum
echo response from an artificial flaw provided for
comparison purposes.
Flaw Boundary Method: The smaller the diameter of

the sound beam, the more accurately the boundaries
Issue 04, 05/04
Important Notice
can be determined. If, however, the sound beam is
relatively broad, the flaw area determination can differ
from the actual. Care should be taken to select a probe
with sufficiently narrow beam at the position of the flaw.
Echo Comparison Method: The echo from a small

natural flaw is usually smaller than the echo from an
artificial comparison flaw of the same size. This is
often due to irregularity or oblique orientation of the flaw
surface. This fact should be considered when
evaluating flaw size to avoid underestimating size.
In cases of very jagged or fissured flaws, e.g. shrink
holes in castings, an echo may not be detected. In
such cases a different method may be required, such
as measuring loss of transmission through the piece.
When testing large parts, distance of the flaw from the
probe is significant. It is important to choose an
artificial comparison flaw that is as near as possible the
same distance as the flaw being assessed.
Ultrasound is subject to attenuation as it passes
through any material. Some materials attenuate less
than others. However, if the sound travels a long
distance through the medium, then even at low

attenuation, a large effect can result.
The danger here is that natural flaws may be underassessed. Therefore, an estimate should be made of
the effect of attenuation on test results and appropriate
corrections applied.
If the test part has a rough surface, part of the
incident sound energy will be scattered at the surface
and lost to the test instrument. The larger this
scattering, the smaller the echoes, and greater the
underestimation of detected flaws. It is important to
make allowance for surface roughness and apply a
correction to observed echo heights.
Specifications and Procedures

The customer must understand and provide for
interpretation and compliance with the specifications
covering its work, generated by such groups as inhouse Quality Assurance, Technical Societies, Industry
Groups, or Government Agencies.
Issue 04, 05/04
0-9
Important Notice
can be determined. If, however, the sound beam is
relatively broad, the flaw area determination can differ
from the actual. Care should be taken to select a probe
with sufficiently narrow beam at the position of the flaw.
Echo Comparison Method: The echo from a small

natural flaw is usually smaller than the echo from an
artificial comparison flaw of the same size. This is
often due to irregularity or oblique orientation of the flaw
surface. This fact should be considered when
evaluating flaw size to avoid underestimating size.
In cases of very jagged or fissured flaws, e.g. shrink
holes in castings, an echo may not be detected. In
such cases a different method may be required, such
as measuring loss of transmission through the piece.
When testing large parts, distance of the flaw from the
probe is significant. It is important to choose an
artificial comparison flaw that is as near as possible the
same distance as the flaw being assessed.
Ultrasound is subject to attenuation as it passes
through any material. Some materials attenuate less
than others. However, if the sound travels a long
distance through the medium, then even at low

attenuation, a large effect can result.
The danger here is that natural flaws may be underassessed. Therefore, an estimate should be made of
the effect of attenuation on test results and appropriate
corrections applied.
If the test part has a rough surface, part of the
incident sound energy will be scattered at the surface
and lost to the test instrument. The larger this
scattering, the smaller the echoes, and greater the
underestimation of detected flaws. It is important to
make allowance for surface roughness and apply a
correction to observed echo heights.
Specifications and Procedures

The customer must understand and provide for
interpretation and compliance with the specifications
covering its work, generated by such groups as inhouse Quality Assurance, Technical Societies, Industry
Groups, or Government Agencies.
Issue 04, 05/04
0-9
Important Notice
Ultrasonic Thickness Measurements
Ultrasonic thickness measurements are the result of
the mathematical product of the velocity of sound in a
material and the transit time of the soundwaves through
the material. The transit time is the data obtained by
the ultrasonic equipment.
Velocity of Sound
The accuracy of ultrasonic thickness measurements
and of flaw location depends to a major degree on the
velocity of sound through the material. This velocity
value is dependent on characteristics of the material
being tested, and is generally independent of the
operation of the test instrument.
This manual describes means for calibrating the
instrument and its internal calculations for the velocity
of sound value of the test material when it is known, or
for finding the velocity of sound empirically using test
blocks of the test material which are accessible for
concurrent mechanical thickness measurement. No
claim, explicit or implied, is included as to the
uniformity of the velocity of sound throughout any given
0-10
part or batch of parts. Any non-uniformity of velocity of

sound in the test material may result in erroneous
thickness measurements.
Temperature Dependence
Velocity of sound is affected to varying degrees by the
temperature of the material through which the sound
travels. When temperature variables are expected,
frequent checks must be made to maintain instrument
calibration for the changing test conditions. Velocity
changes due to temperature variation may affect the
material being inspected, transducer delay lines and
other equipment components.
Doubling of Thickness Readings

When measuring relatively thin walls, with thicknesses
below the minimum thickness specified for a particular
instrument/probe combination, down to about half
the specified minimum thickness, the first echo may
occur while the instrument is electronically blocked to
prevent false triggering. When this occurs, under
certain combinations of thin wall dimensions, surface
Issue 04, 05/04
Important Notice
Ultrasonic Thickness Measurements
Ultrasonic thickness measurements are the result of
the mathematical product of the velocity of sound in a
material and the transit time of the soundwaves through
the material. The transit time is the data obtained by
the ultrasonic equipment.
Velocity of Sound
The accuracy of ultrasonic thickness measurements
and of flaw location depends to a major degree on the
velocity of sound through the material. This velocity
value is dependent on characteristics of the material
being tested, and is generally independent of the
operation of the test instrument.
This manual describes means for calibrating the
instrument and its internal calculations for the velocity
of sound value of the test material when it is known, or
for finding the velocity of sound empirically using test
blocks of the test material which are accessible for
concurrent mechanical thickness measurement. No
claim, explicit or implied, is included as to the
uniformity of the velocity of sound throughout any given
0-10
part or batch of parts. Any non-uniformity of velocity of

sound in the test material may result in erroneous
thickness measurements.
Temperature Dependence
Velocity of sound is affected to varying degrees by the
temperature of the material through which the sound
travels. When temperature variables are expected,
frequent checks must be made to maintain instrument
calibration for the changing test conditions. Velocity
changes due to temperature variation may affect the
material being inspected, transducer delay lines and
other equipment components.
Doubling of Thickness Readings

When measuring relatively thin walls, with thicknesses
below the minimum thickness specified for a particular
instrument/probe combination, down to about half
the specified minimum thickness, the first echo may
occur while the instrument is electronically blocked to
prevent false triggering. When this occurs, under
certain combinations of thin wall dimensions, surface
Issue 04, 05/04
Important Notice
conditions, instrument, probe parameters, etc., the
second echo or other echo signal combinations may
produce a readable signal. The instrument reading and
apparent thickness are up to about twice the actual
value, resulting in a condition that is sometimes called
doubling.
Krautkramer instruments have conservative
specifications in this regard, which in most cases will
prevent misreadings. When using a A-scan readout,
the condition is usually apparent to the trained operator.
Readings using instruments with only analog or digital
meter indicators, in this thinner range, should be further
evaluated when the reading value is between the
specification minimum and about twice that value.
Confirmation of the real thickness can usually be
obtained using an ultrasonic flaw detector with CRT
presentation, suitably calibrated, whereby individual
echo signals can more readily be identified and
evaluated.
Issue 04, 05/04
0-11
Important Notice
conditions, instrument, probe parameters, etc., the
second echo or other echo signal combinations may
produce a readable signal. The instrument reading and
apparent thickness are up to about twice the actual
value, resulting in a condition that is sometimes called
doubling.
Krautkramer instruments have conservative
specifications in this regard, which in most cases will
prevent misreadings. When using a A-scan readout,
the condition is usually apparent to the trained operator.
Readings using instruments with only analog or digital
meter indicators, in this thinner range, should be further
evaluated when the reading value is between the
specification minimum and about twice that value.
Confirmation of the real thickness can usually be
obtained using an ultrasonic flaw detector with CRT
presentation, suitably calibrated, whereby individual
echo signals can more readily be identified and
evaluated.
Issue 04, 05/04
0-11
Important Notice
The following example shows graphically the
relationship of several thicknesses.
MINIMUM
THICKNESS
MINIMUM
THICKNESS
TIMES 2
0
MINIMUM SPECIFIEDTHICKNESS FOR INSTRUMENT/PROBE COMBINATION
ELECTRONIC BLOCKING RANGE
PROBABLE MINIMUM THICKNESS TO PRODUCE ANY USEABLE ECHO
RANGE IN WHICH FIRST ECHO SIGNAL WILL NOT PRODUCE TRUE READING
RANGE OF READING FOR WHICH ALTERNATE
CONFIRMATION MAY BE DESIRABLE
RELATIVE THICKNESS (TYPICAL)
0-12
Issue 04, 05/04
Important Notice
The following example shows graphically the
relationship of several thicknesses.
MINIMUM
THICKNESS
MINIMUM
THICKNESS
TIMES 2
MINIMUM SPECIFIEDTHICKNESS FOR INSTRUMENT/PROBE COMBINATION
ELECTRONIC BLOCKING RANGE
PROBABLE MINIMUM THICKNESS TO PRODUCE ANY USEABLE ECHO
RANGE IN WHICH FIRST ECHO SIGNAL WILL NOT PRODUCE TRUE READING
RANGE OF READING FOR WHICH ALTERNATE
CONFIRMATION MAY BE DESIRABLE
RELATIVE THICKNESS (TYPICAL)
0-12
Issue 04, 05/04
Important Notice
Warranty
When used in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions and under normal operating conditions,
Krautkramer USN 58 Series test instruments are conditionally guaranteed to be free from defects in material
and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date
of shipment. Free second year warranty requires the
instrument to be recertified by a designated
Krautkramer Service Center or by an authorized representative or distributor, within 13 months of the date of
purchase. A normal recalibration and recertification fee
will apply.
All repair work will be made FOB Lewistown, Pennsylvania, or at a Factory Trained Service Center as
advised by GE Inspection Technologies, LP provided
the defective unit is returned properly packed with all
transportation charges prepaid. Any and all equipment
replacement will be at the sole discretion of GE
Inspection Technologies, LP.
This warranty shall not apply to equipment subjected to
misuse or abuse, improper installation, alteration, neglect, or accident. Excluded from this warranty are
expendable items such as transducers, interconnecting
cables, and batteries. Accessory items such as

recorders, etc. will be covered under the original manufacturers warranty as given to GE Inspection
Technologies, LP.
This warranty is limited to the original purchaser and is
not transferable. No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made.
Service
Every effort has been made to provide you with a
reliable Krautkramer product. However, should service
become necessary, GE Inspection Technologies, LP,
has established a number of Factory Trained Service
Centers. For the location of the nearest facility contact:
Manager of Customer Service
GE Inspection Technologies, LP
50 Industrial Park Road
Lewistown, PA 17044
Telephone:
(717) 242-0327
(717) 242-0331
Telefax:
Website:
(717) 248-7211
www.GEInspectionTechnologies.com
Issue 04, 05/04
0-13
Important Notice
Warranty
When used in accordance with the manufacturers written instructions and under normal operating conditions,
Krautkramer USN 58 Series test instruments are conditionally guaranteed to be free from defects in material
and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date
of shipment. Free second year warranty requires the
instrument to be recertified by a designated
Krautkramer Service Center or by an authorized representative or distributor, within 13 months of the date of
purchase. A normal recalibration and recertification fee
will apply.
All repair work will be made FOB Lewistown, Pennsylvania, or at a Factory Trained Service Center as
advised by GE Inspection Technologies, LP, provided
the defective unit is returned properly packed with all
transportation charges prepaid. Any and all equipment
replacement will be at the sole discretion of GE
Inspection Technologies, LP.
This warranty shall not apply to equipment subjected to
misuse or abuse, improper installation, alteration, neglect, or accident. Excluded from this warranty are
expendable items such as transducers, interconnecting
cables, and batteries. Accessory items such as

recorders, etc. will be covered under the original manufacturers warranty as given to GE Inspection
Technologies, LP.
This warranty is limited to the original purchaser and is
not transferable. No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made.
Service
Every effort has been made to provide you with a
reliable Krautkramer product. However, should service
become necessary, GE Inspection Technologies, LP,
has established a number of Factory Trained Service
Centers. For the location of the nearest facility contact:
Manager of Customer Service
GE Inspection Technologies, LP
50 Industrial Park Road
Lewistown, PA 17044
Telephone:
(717) 242-0327
(717) 242-0331
Telefax:
Website:
(717) 248-7211
www.GEInspectionTechnologies.com
Issue 04, 05/04
0-13
Important Notice
THIS PAGE WAS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
0-14
Issue 04, 05/04
Important Notice
0-14
Issue 04, 05/04
Understanding the Keypad,

Menu System, and Displays 1
Issue 04, 05/04
1-1
Understanding the Keypad,

Menu System, and Displays 1
Issue 04, 05/04
1-1
Understanding the Keypad, Menu System, and Displays

The USN 58 series are ultrasonic flaw detection and
thickness measurement instruments. They are capable
of storing A-Scans, operating parameters, and a
variety of thickness-measurement data in their data
loggers. This chapter of your manual will help you
become more familiar with the menus and functions of
the USN 58. Closely reviewing the material in this
chapter will help you make better use of the more
detailed information found throughout the rest of this
operating manual.
After reviewing this chapter, youll be able to
Locate various material covered in this manual

(section 1.7)
Determine which optional features are installed in
your instrument (section 1.8)
H Note:
This manual covers all instruments in the USN 58
series. Where no model (such as 58R or 58L) is
specifically mentioned, the manual reference applies to
all models.
1.1 Battery installation
Install Batteries in the instrument (section 1.1)

Power up the instrument (section 1.2)
Understand the function of each key on the keypad
(section 1.3)
Access each USN 58 function using the built-in
menu system (section 1.4)
Interpret the symbols that most often appear on the
display (section 1.5)
List the features of the USN 58 (section 1.6)
1-2
Battery Installation
The USN 58 instrument operates on a Lithium battery

pack (standard) or six D-size batteries (optional),
located in the rear of its housing, or by using the
power adapter (Figure 1-1). To remove the battery
compartment cover, first remove the four thumbscrews. Its recommended that you install the standard
Lithium battery pack for maximum operating life
between charging. The instrument also accepts 9.0 Ahr
rechargeable NiMH (Nickel Metal Hydride) batteries as
well as alkaline and rechargeable Nicad batteries
Issue 04, 05/04

The USN 58 series are ultrasonic flaw detection and
thickness measurement instruments. They are capable
of storing A-Scans, operating parameters, and a
variety of thickness-measurement data in their data
loggers. This chapter of your manual will help you
become more familiar with the menus and functions of
the USN 58. Closely reviewing the material in this
chapter will help you make better use of the more
detailed information found throughout the rest of this
operating manual.
After reviewing this chapter, youll be able to
Power up the instrument (section 1.2)

Understand the function of each key on the keypad
(section 1.3)
Access each USN 58 function using the built-in
menu system (section 1.4)
Interpret the symbols that most often appear on the
display (section 1.5)
1-2
Locate various material covered in this manual

(section 1.7)
Determine which optional features are installed in
your instrument (section 1.8)
H Note:
This manual covers all instruments in the USN 58
series. Where no model (such as 58R or 58L) is
specifically mentioned, the manual reference applies to
all models.
1.1 Battery installation
Install Batteries in the instrument (section 1.1)
List the features of the USN 58 (section 1.6)
The USN 58 instrument operates on a Lithium battery

pack (standard) or six D-size batteries (optional),
located in the rear of its housing, or by using the
power adapter (Figure 1-1). To remove the battery
compartment cover, first remove the four thumbscrews. Its recommended that you install the standard
Lithium battery pack for maximum operating life
between charging. The instrument also accepts 9.0 Ahr
rechargeable NiMH (Nickel Metal Hydride) batteries as
well as alkaline and rechargeable Nicad batteries
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 1-1Installation of standard Lithium battery pack. Note the location of

the Power Adapter Port and Lithium battery pack on-board charging port.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-3
FIGURE 1-1Installation of standard Lithium battery pack. Note the location of

the Power Adapter Port and Lithium battery pack on-board charging port.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-3

(optional battery tray is required). If D-cell batteries are
used, be sure to follow the procedure explained in
section 2.1 (Chapter 2, section 1) of this manual to
ensure your instrument is properly configured. When
installing optional D-cell batteries, be sure to properly
align the batteries poles as marked in the optional
battery tray (required to install D-cells).
H Note:
Only the dedicated Krautkramer Lithium battery pack
can be charged while installed in the instrument.
Rechargeable D-cell batteries must be removed from
the instrument for recharging.
The approximate level of remaining battery life is
visually displayed by the icon. The location of this
icon is shown in Figure 1-2. When a fully charged
battery pack is installed, the icon will appear as full.
As the battery life is consumed, the icon will begin to
empty. Note that this indicator will only function
correctly if the correct battery type is selected as
explained in section 2.1 of this manual.
1-4
H Note:
When the battery indicator is in the last quarter as
indicated by the symbol , charge the battery pack as
soon as possible. The USN 58 automatically shuts off
when batteries are too weak for reliable operation.
Settings are saved and restored when the USN 58 is
turned on again. When testing in remote locations,
always carry spare batteries and/or battery pack.
H Note:
Your instrument was supplied with the standard Lithium
battery pack. The Lithium Battery pack can be charged
on-board and also power the instrument during
charging. If you selected the optional D-cells and
received a charger it should only be used for 9.0 Ahr
NiMH batteries.
H Note:
By connecting the optional Power Adapter, the USN 58
can be operated using an AC power source. This
adapter is connected to the instrument though the
Power Adapter Port shown in Figure 1-1.
Issue 04, 05/04

(optional battery tray is required). If D-cell batteries are
used, be sure to follow the procedure explained in
section 2.1 (Chapter 2, section 1) of this manual to
ensure your instrument is properly configured. When
installing optional D-cell batteries, be sure to properly
align the batteries poles as marked in the optional
battery tray (required to install D-cells).
H Note:
Only the dedicated Krautkramer Lithium battery pack
can be charged while installed in the instrument.
Rechargeable D-cell batteries must be removed from
the instrument for recharging.
The approximate level of remaining battery life is
visually displayed by the icon. The location of this
icon is shown in Figure 1-2. When a fully charged
battery pack is installed, the icon will appear as full.
As the battery life is consumed, the icon will begin to
empty. Note that this indicator will only function
correctly if the correct battery type is selected as
explained in section 2.1 of this manual.
1-4
H Note:
When the battery indicator is in the last quarter as
indicated by the symbol , charge the battery pack as
soon as possible. The USN 58 automatically shuts off
when batteries are too weak for reliable operation.
Settings are saved and restored when the USN 58 is
turned on again. When testing in remote locations,
always carry spare batteries and/or battery pack.
H Note:
Your instrument was supplied with the standard Lithium
battery pack. The Lithium Battery pack can be charged
on-board and also power the instrument during
charging. If you selected the optional D-cells and
received a charger it should only be used for 9.0 Ahr
NiMH batteries.
H Note:
By connecting the optional Power Adapter, the USN 58
can be operated using an AC power source. This
adapter is connected to the instrument though the
Power Adapter Port shown in Figure 1-1.
Issue 04, 05/04
Powering On and Off the Instrument
To charge the optional D-cell NiMH batteries you need

only remove the optional tray from the instrument,
mate the tray to the charger, and plug the charger into
a 100-240 VAC power source. D-cell batteries cannot
be charged while the battery tray is connected to the
instrument. Refer to Appendix A for a complete
explanation of how to charge the batteries.
1.2 Powering On and Off the

Instrument
1.3 Keypad and Knob Features

The USN 58 is designed to give the user quick access
to all of the instruments functions. Its easy-to-use
menu system allows any function to be accessed with
no more than three key presses (Figure 1-2). To access
any function:
Powering On and Off the Instrument
Press a menu key (u) again to select the submenu

containing the desired function.
Up to four functions will be displayed in the function
bar on the right side of the display. Select the
desired function, by pressing one of the four function
keys (v).
Change the value listed in the function box with the
function knob. Some values can also be adjusted
with repeated presses of the function key.
Press and hold K for three seconds to power the

instrument on. Press K again to turn off.
Press one of the six menu keys (u) to select a

menu. The menus across the bottom of the display
will immediately be replaced with the submenus
contained in the selected menu.
Youll also find these keys and knobs on the

instrument (The 58R is shown in Figure 1-2A, the 58L
is shown in Figure 1-2B):
XTest Menu Key switches from the Home Menu to
the Test Menu. A second press displays the grid
markers in the menu bar, a third press activates a bar
identifying display delay and range, and a fourth press
returns to the original menu position.
hHome Keys immediately return the instrument
to the Home Menu.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-5
To charge the optional D-cell NiMH batteries you need

only remove the optional tray from the instrument,
mate the tray to the charger, and plug the charger into
a 100-240 VAC power source. D-cell batteries cannot
be charged while the battery tray is connected to the
instrument. Refer to Appendix A for a complete
explanation of how to charge the batteries.
Press one of the six menu keys (u) to select a

menu. The menus across the bottom of the display
will immediately be replaced with the submenus
contained in the selected menu.
Press a menu key (u) again to select the submenu
containing the desired function.
1.2 Powering On and Off the

Instrument
Up to four functions will be displayed in the function

bar on the right side of the display. Select the
desired function, by pressing one of the four function
keys (v).
Press and hold K for three seconds to power the

instrument on. Press K again to turn off.
Change the value listed in the function box with the

function knob. Some values can also be adjusted
with repeated presses of the function key.
1.3 Keypad and Knob Features
Youll also find these keys and knobs on the

instrument (The 58R is shown in Figure 1-2A, the 58L
is shown in Figure 1-2B):
The USN 58 is designed to give the user quick access

to all of the instruments functions. Its easy-to-use
menu system allows any function to be accessed with
no more than three key presses (Figure 1-2). To access
any function:
XTest Menu Key switches from the Home Menu to

the Test Menu. A second press displays the grid
markers in the menu bar, a third press activates a bar
identifying display delay and range, and a fourth press
returns to the original menu position.
hHome Keys immediately return the instrument
to the Home Menu.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-5
Keypad and Knob Features
FIGURE 1-2ASome of the USN 58R keypad and knob functions are shown here.
1-6
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 1-2ASome of the USN 58R keypad and knob functions are shown here.
1-6
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 1-2BSome of the USN 58L keypad and knob functions are shown here.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-7
FIGURE 1-2BSome of the USN 58L keypad and knob functions are shown here.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-7
USN 58 Menus and Functions
?Help Key displays help screen text describing

those functions displayed in the Function Bar.
Gain Rotary Knob - Rotate to change the

instruments gain.
WFreeze Key freezes the A-Scan display in one of

four user-defined modes.
1.4 USN 58 Menus and Functions
CCopy Key performs a data-storage or data-output

function depending on the user-defined mode. For
instance, sends a thickness measurement to the next
available position in an active data logger file.
The USN 58 menu system allows the operator to

select and adjust various features and instrument
settings. It includes:
KPower Key turns the instrument on and off.

LZoom Key displays A-Scan on the entire screen.
HMagnify Key enlarges A-Scan display to set the
width of the magnified gate to full-screen width.
DdB Step Key changes the adjustment increment of
the gain knob.
Backlite Key turns display back lighting on and off

(58L only).
Lock Key disables the Function and Gain rotary
knobs (58L only).
Function Rotary Knob - Rotate to change the

value of the selected function.
1-8
Home MenuSeveral menus used to configure and

calibrate the instrument prior to test. Also used to
select pulser and receiver characteristics, position
gates, set alarms, specify operating mode and screen
appearance, adjust the A-Scan display, and control
other significant measurement features
Test MenuAllows the operator to make those
adjustments that are most often required during the
testing process
H Note:
Figures 1-3 and 1-4 show the instruments Home and
Test Menu structures. The information provided in the
following two manual sections explains what each
function does and shows how to access the function
Issue 04, 05/04
?Help Key displays help screen text describing

those functions displayed in the Function Bar.
Gain Rotary Knob - Rotate to change the

instruments gain.
WFreeze Key freezes the A-Scan display in one of

four user-defined modes.
1.4 USN 58 Menus and Functions
CCopy Key performs a data-storage or data-output

function depending on the user-defined mode. For
instance, sends a thickness measurement to the next
available position in an active data logger file.
The USN 58 menu system allows the operator to

select and adjust various features and instrument
settings. It includes:
KPower Key turns the instrument on and off.

LZoom Key displays A-Scan on the entire screen.
HMagnify Key enlarges A-Scan display to set the
width of the magnified gate to full-screen width.
DdB Step Key changes the adjustment increment of
the gain knob.
Backlite Key turns display back lighting on and

off.
Lock Key disables the Function and Gain rotary
knobs.
Function Rotary Knob - Rotate to change the

value of the selected function.
1-8
Home MenuSeveral menus used to configure and

calibrate the instrument prior to test. Also used to
select pulser and receiver characteristics, position
gates, set alarms, specify operating mode and screen
appearance, adjust the A-Scan display, and control
other significant measurement features
Test MenuAllows the operator to make those
adjustments that are most often required during the
testing process
H Note:
Figures 1-3 and 1-4 show the instruments Home and
Test Menu structures. The information provided in the
following two manual sections explains what each
function does and shows how to access the function
Issue 04, 05/04

through the menu system. Youll also find operationmanual section references that tell you where to turn in
this manual for more specific information on each
function.
1.4.1 Home Menu System

The USN 58s Home Menu System consists of several
menus, submenus, and functions.
Available menus are accessed via the Home Menu
(The 58R home menu is shown in Figure 1-3A. The
58L home menu is shown in Figure 1-3B). Note that
the menus visible on your particular instrument
depend on which options are installed. Functions not
shown in Figure 1-3 are accessed by pressing u
below the option NEXT.
Functions are then selected by pressing the

adjacent Function Key (v).
Turning the Function Knob, and in some cases
continuing to press v, will change the value shown
in the selected functions box.
Note that some functions, like RANGE, have both
coarse and fine adjustment modes. Coarse and fine
modes are selected by pressing v more than once.
When the function name, such as RANGE, appears in
all capital letters, turning the function knob will produce
large changes in the selected functions value. When
the function name appears in all lower-case letters,
turning the function knob will change the value by
smaller amounts. Functions with coarse-and-fine
adjustment capabilities are noted with an * in
Figure 1-3.
Each menu contains several submenus.

Menus and submenus are selected by pressing
below the desired item.
When a submenu is selected, the functions
contained in that submenu are listed in the Function
Bar down the right-hand side of the display screen.
Issue 04, 05/04

through the menu system. Youll also find operationmanual section references that tell you where to turn in
this manual for more specific information on each
function.
1.4.1 Home Menu System

The USN 58s Home Menu System consists of several
menus, submenus, and functions.
Available menus are accessed via the Home Menu
(The 58R home menu is shown in Figure 1-3A. The
58L home menu is shown in Figure 1-3B). Note that
the menus visible on your particular instrument
depend on which options are installed. Functions not
shown in Figure 1-3 are accessed by pressing u
below the option NEXT.
1-9
Functions are then selected by pressing the

adjacent Function Key (v).
Turning the Function Knob, and in some cases
continuing to press v, will change the value shown
in the selected functions box.
Note that some functions, like RANGE, have both
coarse and fine adjustment modes. Coarse and fine
modes are selected by pressing v more than once.
When the function name, such as RANGE, appears in
all capital letters, turning the function knob will produce
large changes in the selected functions value. When
the function name appears in all lower-case letters,
turning the function knob will change the value by
smaller amounts. Functions with coarse-and-fine
adjustment capabilities are noted with an * in
Figure 1-3.
Each menu contains several submenus.

Menus and submenus are selected by pressing
below the desired item.
When a submenu is selected, the functions
contained in that submenu are listed in the Function
Bar down the right-hand side of the display screen.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-9
FIGURE 1-3AThese USN 58R menus, submenus, and functions are accessed through the Home Menu.
1-10
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 1-3AThese USN 58R menus, submenus, and functions are accessed through the Home Menu.
1-10
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 1-3BThese USN 58L menus, submenus, and functions are accessed through the Home Menu.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-11
FIGURE 1-3BThese USN 58L menus, submenus, and functions are accessed through the Home Menu.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-11

BASIC Menu
RANGE Submenu
RANGEAdjusts the range of the display screen from .040"
to 480" in steel. (Refer to section 2.3.1)
PROBE DELAYRepresents the time delay caused by
sound-wave travel through a probes wearplate, membrane,
delay line, or wedge. (Refer to section 2.3.3)
VELOCITYDisplays the velocity for the selected material
and allows the user to input a velocity. (Refer to section 2.3.3)
DISPLAY DELAYShifts the A-Scan viewing window to the
left or right. (Refer to section 2.3.2)
CONFIG Submenu
MATERIALSelects the material being tested. Choose
designations with S (shear) for angle beam probes. Sets
velocity to value for material specified. (Refer to section 2.3)
DISPLAY STARTSets the reference point from which all
display features are set. (Refer to section 2.3.3)
A-SCAN MODEChanges the appearance of the A-Scan
(Refer to 2.1.2) and launches SMART VIEW (Refer to 6.2)
A-SCAN ENHANCEEnables the BASELINE BREAK and
SPARKLE (58L) display features (Refer to section 6.3)
DISPLAY Submenu (Refer to section 2.1.2)
COLORChanges the colors of the display (58L)
BRIGHTNESSAdjusts the displays brightness
GRIDSelects the display screens grid markings.
A-Scan ColorAdjusts the color of the A-Scan (58L)
1-12
ReverseVideoSelect normal or reversed video display (58R)

REGIONAL Submenu (Refer to section 2.1.1)
LANGUAGESets the language displayed on the instruments
screen
UNITSSets displayed units to inch, millimeter, or microsecond
DATESets the displayed date
TIMESets the displayed time
OPTIONS Submenu
INSTALLED OPTIONUse to identify installed options (Refer
to 1.9.2)
FREEZE MODEDetermines what is frozen when the Freeze
Key is pressed. (Refer to section 3.3)
BATTERY TYPESpecify the type installed (Refer to 2.1)
MASTER LOCKTurning Lock on disables all functions
except Gain (Refer to section 3.7)
RESULTS Submenu
READING 1 THROUGH READING 4-Selects the
measurement displayed in each of the four Reading Boxes.
(Refer to section 3.5)
PLSRCVR Menu
PULSER Submenu
PULSER TYPESelect square (58L) or spike pulse (2.3.6)

ENERGYSets energy level of spike pulse (Refer to 2.3.7)
VOLTAGESets pulser (square onlyavailable only in 58L)
voltage level (Refer to 2.3.7)
Issue 04, 05/04

BASIC Menu
RANGE Submenu
RANGEAdjusts the range of the display screen from .040"
to 480" in steel. (Refer to section 2.3.1)
PROBE DELAYRepresents the time delay caused by
sound-wave travel through a probes wearplate, membrane,
delay line, or wedge. (Refer to section 2.3.3)
VELOCITYDisplays the velocity for the selected material
and allows the user to input a velocity. (Refer to section 2.3.3)
DISPLAY DELAYShifts the A-Scan viewing window to the
left or right. (Refer to section 2.3.2)
CONFIG Submenu
MATERIALSelects the material being tested. Choose
designations with S (shear) for angle beam probes. Sets
velocity to value for material specified. (Refer to section 2.3)
DISPLAY STARTSets the reference point from which all
display features are set. (Refer to section 2.3.3)
A-SCAN MODEChanges the appearance of the A-Scan
(Refer to 2.1.2) and launches SMART VIEW (Refer to 6.2)
A-SCAN ENHANCEEnables the BASELINE BREAK and
SPARKLE (58L) display features (Refer to section 6.3)
DISPLAY Submenu (Refer to section 2.1.2)
COLORChanges the colors of the display (58L)
BRIGHTNESSAdjusts the displays brightness
GRIDSelects the display screens grid markings.
A-Scan ColorAdjusts the color of the A-Scan (58L)
1-12
ReverseVideoSelect normal or reversed video display (58R)

REGIONAL Submenu (Refer to section 2.1.1)
LANGUAGESets the language displayed on the instruments
screen
UNITSSets displayed units to inch, millimeter, or microsecond
DATESets the displayed date
TIMESets the displayed time
OPTIONS Submenu
INSTALLED OPTIONUse to identify installed options (Refer
to 1.9.2)
FREEZE MODEDetermines what is frozen when the Freeze
Key is pressed. (Refer to section 3.3)
BATTERY TYPESpecify the type installed (Refer to 2.1)
MASTER LOCKTurning Lock on disables all functions
except Gain (Refer to section 3.7)
RESULTS Submenu
READING 1 THROUGH READING 4-Selects the
measurement displayed in each of the four Reading Boxes.
PLSRCVR Menu
PULSER Submenu
PULSER TYPESelect square (58L) or spike pulse (2.3.6)

ENERGYSets energy level of spike pulse (Refer to 2.3.7)
VOLTAGESets pulser (square onlyavailable only in 58L)
voltage level (Refer to 2.3.7)
Issue 04, 05/04
WIDTHSets width of square pulse (58L) (section 2.3.8)

DAMPINGAdjusts the damping level to match the installed
probe. (Refer to section 2.2.2)
RECEIVER Submenu
FREQUENCYSelects the bandwidth of the instrument.
(Refer to section 2.2.2)
RECTIFYSelects the rectification-mode which effects how
the A-Scan appears on the display. (Refer to section 2.3.5)
DUALIdentifies whether one or two single-element probes,
or a dual element probe, is installed (Refer to section 2.2.2)
REJECTDetermines what percentage of the A-Scan height
is displayed at 0% full screen height. (Refer to section 2.3.7)
GAIN Submenu
USER GAIN STEPSpecify a gain value to appear in the Test
Menus dB Step selections. (Refer to section 4.2.2)
dB REFStores reference gain value and echo height. (Refer
to 4.3)
AMPLITUDESets the units of amplitude measurement to
percentage of screen height or dB difference in height from
the gate to the echos peak. (Refer to section 3.1.6)
dB StepDefines increment of gain-value change when knob
is turned. (Refer to section 4.2)
PRF Submenu
MODESelects the mode by which the Pulse Repetition
Frequency is determined. (Refer to section 2.3.4)
Issue 04, 05/04
1-13
WIDTHSets width of square pulse (58L) (section 2.3.8)

DAMPINGAdjusts the damping level to match the installed
probe. (Refer to section 2.2.2)
RECEIVER Submenu
FREQUENCYSelects the bandwidth of the instrument.
RECTIFYSelects the rectification-mode which effects how
the A-Scan appears on the display. (Refer to section 2.3.5)
DUALIdentifies whether one or two single-element probes,
or a dual element probe, is installed (Refer to section 2.2.2)
REJECTDetermines what percentage of the A-Scan height
is displayed at 0% full screen height. (Refer to section 2.3.7)
GAIN Submenu
USER GAIN STEPSpecify a gain value to appear in the Test
Menus dB Step selections. (Refer to section 4.2.2)
dB REFStores reference gain value and echo height. (Refer
to 4.3)
AMPLITUDESets the units of amplitude measurement to
percentage of screen height or dB difference in height from
the gate to the echos peak. (Refer to section 3.1.6)
dB StepDefines increment of gain-value change when knob
is turned. (Refer to section 4.2)
PRF Submenu
MODESelects the mode by which the Pulse Repetition
Frequency is determined. (Refer to section 2.3.4)
VALUEDisplays and/or allows adjustment of the Pulse

Repetition Frequency. (Refer to section 2.3.4)
GATES Menu
POSITION Submenu (Refer to section 3.1.1)
GATE SELECTSelect from two or more gates (depending
on the installed options).
GATE STARTSets the beginning position of the selected
gate on the A-Scan.
GATE WIDTHSets the width of the selected gate on the
A-Scan.
GATE THRESHOLDSets the height of the selected gate.
GATEMODE Submenu
GATE SELECTSelect from two or more gates (depends on
the installed options). (Refer to section 3.1.2)
DETECTIONIndicates whether an A-Scan echos flank, or
peak is evaluated by the gate. (Refer to section 3.1.2)
START MODESet to IP (initial pulse) in base-model USN 58.
MAGNIFY GATEAllows the user to select which gate is
magnified to ful screen width when H is pressed (depends on
ALARMS Submenu (Refer to 3.1.4)
the installed options).
LOGICDetermines whether the gate alarm is triggered
when a signal crosses the gate or does not cross the gate.
VALUEDisplays and/or allows adjustment of the Pulse

Repetition Frequency. (Refer to section 2.3.4)
GATES Menu
POSITION Submenu (Refer to section 3.1.1)

on the installed options).
GATE STARTSets the beginning position of the selected
gate on the A-Scan.
GATE WIDTHSets the width of the selected gate on the
A-Scan.
GATE THRESHOLDSets the height of the selected gate.
GATEMODE Submenu
DETECTIONIndicates whether an A-Scan echos flank, or
peak is evaluated by the gate. (Refer to section 3.1.2)
START MODESet to IP (initial pulse) in base-model USN 58.
MAGNIFY GATEAllows the user to select which gate is
magnified to ful screen width when H is pressed (depends on
ALARMS Submenu (Refer to 3.1.4)
the installed options).
LOGICDetermines whether the gate alarm is triggered
when a signal crosses the gate or does not cross the gate.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-13

OUTPUT DELAYDelays TTL and Analog Outputs.
HORNEnables the audible warning alarm (horn).
TTL OUT Submenu
TTL #1Identifies which event triggers TTL 1 / illuminates
Warning Light 1. (Refer to section 3.1.4)
MODESpecifies how the TTL Alarms are reset. (Refer to
section 3.1.5)
LIMITS Submenu (Refer to section 3.2)
LOW LIMITUse to set the minimum thickness for alarm
purposes.
HIGH LIMITUse to set the maximum thickness for alarm
purposes.
NOISE IMMN Submenu (Refer to section 6.1)
on installed options).
COUNTSpecify the number of alarm-violating counts which
must occur during the WINDOW duration before an alarm is
set.
WINDOWSpecify the number of counts in the examination
period.
1-14
AUTOCAL Menu
SETUP Submenu (Refer to section 2.4)
GATE A STARTShifts the starting point of the A-Gate to the
left and right.
S-REF 1-Userinput thickness value of the thinner calibration
standard.
S-REF 2-Userinput thickness value of the thicker calibration
standard.
RECORDIdentifies and progresses through each stage of
the calibration procedure.
READING Submenu (Refer to section 2.4.3)
VELOCITYDisplays the instruments default velocity for the
specified material type as well as the calculated velocity after
calibration.
PROBE DELAYAdjustment made as a result of the zeroing
procedure. This represents the time delay caused by soundwave travel through a probes wearplate, membrane, delay
line, or wedge (plastic).
FILES Menu
FILENAME Submenu
FILENAMESelects stored files. (Refer to section 5.3)
PREVIEWUse to view the header and memo of stored files
without recalling the file. (Refer to section 5.3)
ACTIONRecalls or deletes the selected file and saves edits
to alphanumeric and parameter settings. (Refer to 5.3 and 5.4)
Issue 04, 05/04

OUTPUT DELAYDelays TTL and Analog Outputs.
HORNEnables the audible warning alarm (horn).
TTL OUT Submenu
MODESpecifies how the TTL Alarms are reset. (Refer to
section 3.1.5)
LIMITS Submenu (Refer to section 3.2)

LOW LIMITUse to set the minimum thickness for alarm
purposes.
HIGH LIMITUse to set the maximum thickness for alarm
purposes.
NOISE IMMN Submenu (Refer to section 6.1)
on installed options).
COUNTSpecify the number of alarm-violating counts which
must occur during the WINDOW duration before an alarm is
set.
WINDOWSpecify the number of counts in the examination
period.
1-14
AUTOCAL Menu
GATE A STARTShifts the starting point of the A-Gate to the
left and right.
S-REF 1-Userinput thickness value of the thinner calibration
standard.
S-REF 2-Userinput thickness value of the thicker calibration
standard.
RECORDIdentifies and progresses through each stage of
the calibration procedure.
READING Submenu (Refer to section 2.4.3)
VELOCITYDisplays the instruments default velocity for the
specified material type as well as the calculated velocity after
calibration.
PROBE DELAYAdjustment made as a result of the zeroing
procedure. This represents the time delay caused by soundwave travel through a probes wearplate, membrane, delay
line, or wedge (plastic).
FILES Menu
FILENAME Submenu
FILENAMESelects stored files. (Refer to section 5.3)
PREVIEWUse to view the header and memo of stored files
without recalling the file. (Refer to section 5.3)
ACTIONRecalls or deletes the selected file and saves edits
to alphanumeric and parameter settings. (Refer to 5.3 and 5.4)
Issue 04, 05/04
CREATE NEWPressing twice launches the file creation

process. (Refer to section 5.1)
REP HEAD Submenu
HEADER NUMBERSelects the Header Line to edit. (Refer
to section 5.6)
EDITAllows editing of the selected Header Line contents.
PRINT ?Determines if the header will be included in the
printed report. (Refer to section 5.6.1)
NOTES Submenu
NOTE NUMBERSelects the Note Line to edit. (Refer to
section 5.7)
EDITAllows editing of the selected Note Line contents.
NOTE PRINT ?Determines if the notes will be included in
the printed report. (Refer to section 5.7.1)
DL PRINTDetermines if the data logger thickness
measurements will be included in the printed report. (Refer to
section 5.8)
MEMO Submenu
EDITAllows editing / creation of the Memo. (Refer to 5.5)
PRINT ?Determines if the memo will be included in the
PRINTER Submenu
PRINTERUse to select the type of printer connected. (Refer
to section 5.9.1)
COPY MODESpecifies the action taken by pressing the

Copy key. (Refer to section 5.9.2)
PARAM PRINT ?Determines if instrument settings will be
listed in the printed report. (Refer to section 5.8)
A-SCAN PRINT ?Determines if the A-Scan will be included
in the printed report. (Refer to section 5.8)
General Submenu
DL DATA FunctionDisplays stored datalogger values and
attached notes.
TRIG Menu
PROBE ANGLEInput the angle of a connected angle beam
probe.
THICKNESSSets the test-piece material thickness for
angle-beam measurements.
X VALUEInput the specified value from the angle beam
probes BIP to front edge.
O-DIAMETERSets the outside diameter of curved test
pieces.
AWS D1.1 Submenu (Refer to section 6.4)
A INDICATIONGain representation of test-piece reflector.

B REFERENCEGain representation of reference reflector.
C ATTENUATIONCalculated Gain representation of depth
variation between reference and test-piece reflector.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-15
CREATE NEWPressing twice launches the file creation

process. (Refer to section 5.1)
REP HEAD Submenu
HEADER NUMBERSelects the Header Line to edit. (Refer
to section 5.6)
EDITAllows editing of the selected Header Line contents.
PRINT ?Determines if the header will be included in the
NOTES Submenu
NOTE NUMBERSelects the Note Line to edit. (Refer to

section 5.7)
EDITAllows editing of the selected Note Line contents.
NOTE PRINT ?Determines if the notes will be included in
the printed report. (Refer to section 5.7.1)
DL PRINTDetermines if the data logger thickness
measurements will be included in the printed report. (Refer to
section 5.8)
MEMO Submenu
EDITAllows editing / creation of the Memo. (Refer to 5.5)
PRINT ?Determines if the memo will be included in the
PRINTER Submenu
PRINTERUse to select the type of printer connected. (Refer
to section 5.9.1)

PROBE ANGLEInput the angle of a connected angle beam
probe.
THICKNESSSets the test-piece material thickness for
angle-beam measurements.
X VALUEInput the specified value from the angle beam
probes BIP to front edge.
O-DIAMETERSets the outside diameter of curved test
pieces.
COPY MODESpecifies the action taken by pressing the

Copy key. (Refer to section 5.9.2)
PARAM PRINT ?Determines if instrument settings will be
listed in the printed report. (Refer to section 5.8)
A-SCAN PRINT ?Determines if the A-Scan will be included
in the printed report. (Refer to section 5.8)
General Submenu
DL DATA FunctionDisplays stored datalogger values and
attached notes.
TRIG Menu
AWS D1.1 Submenu (Refer to section 6.4)
A INDICATIONGain representation of test-piece reflector.

B REFERENCEGain representation of reference reflector.
C ATTENUATIONCalculated Gain representation of depth
variation between reference and test-piece reflector.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-15
D D1.1 RATINGCalculated weld rating for measured test

piece.
A POS Submenu (Refer to section 6.4)
GATE A STARTSets A-Gate starting point.

GATE WIDTHSets width of the A-Gate.
A THRESHOLDSets A-Gates height.
AWS MODETurned on manually or automatically with a

stored reference.
Display Screen Features
control capabilities most commonly used while testing

material. The Test Menu features, and their functions
are shown in Figure 1-4. While a USN 58R is shown,
test menu features and keypad functions are the same
for all USN 58 series instruments. Note that the
function bar displayed when X is pressed continues to
be displayed when the Test Menu is active. Pressing
X three more times returns to the previous menu
configuration.
COLORING Submenu (58L) (Refer to section 3.5)
COLOR LEGIndicates in which leg a reflector is located.

(Used with angle beam probes.)
SERIAL COMM Menu
BAUD RATESet to match the connected printer. (Refer to

section 5.10.1)
LOSS OF SIGNALControls the thickness value and analog
signal outputted when an uncoupled probe condition exists.
1.4.2 Test Menus and Functions

The USN 58 also has a Test Menu thats displayed
whenever X is pressed. This menu contains the
1-16
1.5 Display Screen Features

The USN 58s displays are designed to be easy to
interpret. In Figure 1-5 youll find an example of the a
display configuration. This specific display includes a
data logger file navigation window (which allows you to
navigate through and store thickness measurements in
an existing data logger file), an active A-Scan, the
GATES menu bar, and POSITION submenu. Refer to
this Figure for an explanation of those screen features
youll most often encounter. Youll also find a reference
to the manual section which explains the identified
feature in more depth.
Issue 04, 05/04
D D1.1 RATINGCalculated weld rating for measured test

piece.
A POS Submenu (Refer to section 6.4)
GATE A STARTSets A-Gate starting point.

GATE WIDTHSets width of the A-Gate.
A THRESHOLDSets A-Gates height.
AWS MODETurned on manually or automatically with a
stored reference.
control capabilities most commonly used while testing

material. The Test Menu features, and their functions
are shown in Figure 1-4. While a USN 58R is shown,
test menu features and keypad functions are the same
for all USN 58 series instruments. Note that the
function bar displayed when X is pressed continues to
be displayed when the Test Menu is active. Pressing
X three more times returns to the previous menu
configuration.
COLORING Submenu (58L) (Refer to section 3.5)
COLOR LEGIndicates in which leg a reflector is located.

(Used with angle beam probes.)
SERIAL COMM Menu
BAUD RATESet to match the connected printer. (Refer to

section 5.10.1)
LOSS OF SIGNALControls the thickness value and analog
signal outputted when an uncoupled probe condition exists.
1.4.2 Test Menus and Functions

The USN 58 also has a Test Menu thats displayed
whenever X is pressed. This menu contains the
1-16
1.5 Display Screen Features

The USN 58s displays are designed to be easy to
interpret. In Figure 1-5 youll find an example of the a
display configuration. This specific display includes a
data logger file navigation window (which allows you to
navigate through and store thickness measurements in
an existing data logger file), an active A-Scan, the
GATES menu bar, and POSITION submenu. Refer to
this Figure for an explanation of those screen features
youll most often encounter. Youll also find a reference
to the manual section which explains the identified
feature in more depth.
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 1-4Control capabilities when the Test Menu is active for all USN 58 instruments.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-17
FIGURE 1-4Control capabilities when the Test Menu is active for all USN 58 instruments.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-17
FIGURE 1-5Active A-Scan and data logger file navigation window are shown here.
1-18
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 1-5Active A-Scan and data logger file navigation window are shown here.
1-18
Issue 04, 05/04
Features of USN 58R
1.6 Features of the USN 58
Definition of Display Icons

There are several graphical features (icons) which
appear in the display screens icon bar for various
reasons. Figure 1-6 includes several of these icons
along with an explanation of their significance.
The USN 58 series extends the performance and range

of applications that are capable of being satisfied by a
portable instrument. The quality, portability, durability,
& dependability that you have come to expect from the
popular Krautkramer USN Series of instruments
remains.
The USN 58R has a hi-resolution (320 x 240 pixels)
EL Display with 60 Hz update
The 58L is equipped with a 400 x 240 pixel color
display that also updates at 60 Hz
Simple operation with fast rotary knob adjustments
Weighs only 6.4 lbs. including Lithium battery pack
or optional D-size batteries for convenient use
anywhere
Two independent flaw gates with real-time TTL &
Analog Outputs to handle a wide range of
applications (plus a third optional Interface gate)
FIGURE 1-6These icons appear in the Status Bar at

various times.
Features of USN 58R
250 kHz to 25 MHz capability with eight selectable

frequency ranges to match probe for optimum
performance
Issue 04, 05/04
1-19
1.6 Features of the USN 58
Definition of Display Icons

There are several graphical features (icons) which
appear in the display screens icon bar for various
reasons. Figure 1-6 includes several of these icons
along with an explanation of their significance.
The USN 58 series extends the performance and range

of applications that are capable of being satisfied by a
portable instrument. The quality, portability, durability,
& dependability that you have come to expect from the
popular Krautkramer USN Series of instruments
remains.
The USN 58R has a hi-resolution (320 x 240 pixels)
EL Display with 60 Hz update
The 58L is equipped with a 400 x 240 pixel color
display that also updates at 60 Hz
Simple operation with fast rotary knob adjustments
Weighs only 6.4 lbs. including Lithium battery pack
or optional D-size batteries for convenient use
anywhere
Two independent flaw gates with real-time TTL &
Analog Outputs to handle a wide range of
applications (plus a third optional Interface gate)
FIGURE 1-6These icons appear in the Status Bar at

various times.
250 kHz to 25 MHz capability with eight selectable

frequency ranges to match probe for optimum
performance
Issue 04, 05/04
1-19
Features of USN 58R
15 Hz PRF (pulse repetition frequency) with 480"

range in steel eliminates ghost echoes making it
ideal for lengthy acoustically clean material testing
Trig functions to automatically determine depth,

surface distance, sound path to flaws, and leg of the
inspection using shear-wave (angle beam) probes
Smart View function displays the most important

information (relevant shot) for the test as selected
by the user
RF rectification for phase inversion and thin

measurement applications
Compare frozen reference waveforms to live AScans
.040" minimum range (in steel) for thin measurement

applications
Alphanumeric Datalogger (incl. Grid file format) for

flexible, convenient storage of data sets and
thickness readings
Multiple curve DAC/TCG corrects for distance/
amplitude variations from material loss and beam
spread
Eight hours of use between charges with the
standard Lithium battery pack
Four hours of use (typical) with optional D-size 9.0
Ahr NiMH. (power adapter for bench-top use)
Four selectable damping settings (50, 75, 150, &
500 ohms) for optimum probe performance
1-20
Auto CAL makes calibration simple & easy
Help mode with dedicated key on front panel for

quick access
dB Step function with six gain knob increments
Thickness data logger with alphanumeric naming of
location I.D.s, grid file format, notes and memo
capabilities
Store, preview, and edit data sets with A-Scans for
quick recall and instrument setup
Noise Immunization feature limits the effect of false
TTL outputs due to high noise levels
Issue 04, 05/04
Features of USN 58R
15 Hz PRF (pulse repetition frequency) with 480"

range in steel eliminates ghost echoes making it
ideal for lengthy acoustically clean material testing
Trig functions to automatically determine depth,

surface distance, sound path to flaws, and leg of the
inspection using shear-wave (angle beam) probes
Smart View function displays the most important

information (relevant shot) for the test as selected
by the user
RF rectification for phase inversion and thin

measurement applications
Compare frozen reference waveforms to live AScans
.040" minimum range (in steel) for thin measurement

applications
Alphanumeric Datalogger (incl. Grid file format) for

flexible, convenient storage of data sets and
thickness readings
Multiple curve DAC/TCG corrects for distance/
amplitude variations from material loss and beam
spread
Eight hours of use between charges with the
standard Lithium battery pack
Four hours of use (typical) with optional D-size 9.0
Ahr NiMH. (power adapter for bench-top use)
Four selectable damping settings (50, 75, 150, &
500 ohms) for optimum probe performance
1-20
Auto CAL makes calibration simple & easy
Help mode with dedicated key on front panel for

quick access
dB Step function with six gain knob increments
Thickness data logger with alphanumeric naming of
location I.D.s, grid file format, notes and memo
capabilities
Store, preview, and edit data sets with A-Scans for
quick recall and instrument setup
Noise Immunization feature limits the effect of false
TTL outputs due to high noise levels
Issue 04, 05/04
Whats in this Manual
Special behind the freeze mode allows dynamic

time-base adjustment on frozen A-Scan displays
Versatile, flexible carry bag with neck strap for easy
transport and use in limited access areas
Upgrade CD is provided with each instrument to
easily upgrade the Operating Software via our
website without returning the instrument to add
features and capabilities without downtime
Chapter 1Understanding the Keypad, Menu

System, and Displays
Explanation of display
features
How the instrument detects

flaws and measures thickness
Calibrate the instrument/

probe combination
Install a probe and

configure the instrument
to match the probe type
Chapter 3Configuring Your Instrument for
Measurement
Adjust the A and
B-Gates
Specify gate-detection
mode (peak or flank)
Set and clear alarms

and TTL outputs
Control the A-Scan magnify

and freeze modes
Select the maximum

and minimum material
thickness limits
Specify the quantities

displayed in the data reading boxes
1-21
Special behind the freeze mode allows dynamic

time-base adjustment on frozen A-Scan displays
Versatile, flexible carry bag with neck strap for easy
transport and use in limited access areas
Upgrade CD is provided with each instrument to
easily upgrade the Operating Software via our
website without returning the instrument to add
features and capabilities without downtime
Explanation of display
features
Summary of features
Overview of functions
within menus
Definition of icons
How the instrument detects

flaws and measures thickness
Set up the instrument

display appearance
The USN 58 Series Operating Manual is divided into

several chapters. The material in Chapters 1 through 7
applies to all instrument models. Chapter 8 and higher
apply only to optional features which are available only
when purchased. Following is a summary of Chapters 1
through 7:
Chapter 1Understanding the Keypad, Menu
System, and Displays
Navigating the menus
Chapter 2Setting Up the USN 58
1.7 Whats in this Manual
Definition of icons
Issue 04, 05/04
Operations performed
by each key
Overview of functions
within menus
Set up the instrument

display appearance
The USN 58 Series Operating Manual is divided into

several chapters. The material in Chapters 1 through 7
applies to all instrument models. Chapter 8 and higher
apply only to optional features which are available only
when purchased. Following is a summary of Chapters 1
through 7:
Summary of features
Chapter 2Setting Up the USN 58
1.7 Whats in this Manual
Operations performed
by each key
Navigating the menus
Calibrate the instrument/

probe combination
Install a probe and

configure the instrument
to match the probe type
Chapter 3Configuring Your Instrument for
Measurement
Adjust the A and
B-Gates
Specify gate-detection
mode (peak or flank)
Set and clear alarms

and TTL outputs
Control the A-Scan magnify

and freeze modes
Select the maximum

and minimum material
thickness limits
Specify the quantities

displayed in the data reading boxes
Issue 04, 05/04
1-21

Chapter 4Using the Test Menu
Modify and attach

memos and report
headers to a data file
Modify and attach notes to

a stored data point
Use the dB
REFERENCE
feature to compare the
current echos amplitude
with a reference
Access the file navigation

window using the view
feature
Magnify the contents

of a selected gate
Attach Notes to stored

readings
Chapter 6Advanced Settings for Base-Model

Units
Freeze and unfreeze

the A-Scan display
Access the help screen
Use the Noise

Immunization Feature
Configuring the instrument

to communicate with
external printers.
Select the value to view

in the large display box and
copied to active data logger
file position
Reset the instrument

using key presses
Chapter 5Storing and Outputting Data
Analog Output
Operate in SMART View

Mode
Chapter 7 I/O Ports Technical Details
Differentiate between
data logger and data
set files
List of those parameters

settings stored in data
set or data logger files
Create, store, recall,

and delete data files
Printing Reports
Remote Control
Chapter 8DAC/TCG Option

Chapter 9IF Gate Option
Chapter 10DGS Option
Chapter 11BEA (Backwall Echo Attenuator) Option
Chapter 12VGA Connector Option
1-22
Issue 04, 05/04

Chapter 4Using the Test Menu
Modify and attach

memos and report
headers to a data file
Modify and attach notes to

a stored data point
Use the dB
REFERENCE
feature to compare the
current echos amplitude
with a reference
Access the file navigation

window using the view
feature
Magnify the contents

of a selected gate
Attach Notes to stored

readings
Chapter 6Advanced Settings for Base-Model

Units
Freeze and unfreeze

the A-Scan display
Access the help screen
Use the Noise

Immunization Feature
Configuring the instrument

to communicate with
external printers.
Select the value to view

in the large display box and
copied to active data logger
file position
Reset the instrument

using key presses
Chapter 5Storing and Outputting Data
Analog Output
Chapter 7 I/O Ports Technical Details
Differentiate between
data logger and data
set files
List of those parameters

settings stored in data
set or data logger files
Create, store, recall,

and delete data files
Printing Reports
1-22
Operate in SMART View

Mode
Remote Control
Chapter 8DAC/TCG Option

Chapter 9IF Gate Option
Chapter 10DGS Option
Chapter 11BEA (Backwall Echo Attenuator) Option
Chapter 12VGA Connector Option
Issue 04, 05/04
Overview of Optional Features
1.8 Overview of Optional

Features
Several options are available to be added to basemodel USN 58 instruments. Options purchased with
your instrument will be described in detail later in this
manual. This section explains how to tell which options
are installed in your instrument and includes a brief
overview of the features available with each option.
Any USN 58R instrument can be retrofitted with
available options.

are Installed in Your USN 58
(Basic/Options/Installed Option)
In the BASIC MENU, select the OPTIONS submenu.
Select the INSTALLED OPTION function and turn the
Function Knob to view those options installed in your
instrument. Selections include BASIC, plus those
options listed below which have been installed in your
particular instrument:
Distance Gain SizeThe DGS feature allows the

user to display a curve which represents equivalentreflector-sizes, for a particular gain, as a function of
the distance between the reflector and transducer.
DGS assumes a vertical beam impingement. Flaw
sizing evaluations can be done via dB to the DGS
curve or ERS (Equivalent Reflector Size) methods.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-23
1.8 Overview of Optional

Features
Several options are available to be added to basemodel USN 58 instruments. Options purchased with
your instrument will be described in detail later in this
manual. This section explains how to tell which options
are installed in your instrument and includes a brief
overview of the features available with each option.
Any USN 58R instrument can be retrofitted with
available options.

are Installed in Your USN 58
(Basic/Options/Installed Option)
In the BASIC MENU, select the OPTIONS submenu.
Select the INSTALLED OPTION function and turn the
Function Knob to view those options installed in your
instrument. Selections include BASIC, plus those
options listed below which have been installed in your
particular instrument:
DAC/TCGThe DAC (Distance Amplitude Curve)

feature allows the user to collect up to 16 samesize-reflector echoes, representing various material
depths, and generate a curve that fits the echo
peaks. In this mode all echoes are represented at
their true amplitude with no depth or attenuation
compensation. Three additional curves, drawn at
user-specified dB offsets from the original DAC
curve, can be displayed at one time. The TCG (Time
Corrected Gain) feature allows all equivalent echoes
to be displayed at the same height, regardless of
material depth related signal loss (caused by
attenuation and beam spread). TCG works by
adjusting gain over time to ensure that likereflectors, located at different material depths, are
represented by same-amplitude echoes.
DAC/TCGThe DAC (Distance Amplitude Curve)

feature allows the user to collect up to 16 samesize-reflector echoes, representing various material
depths, and generate a curve that fits the echo
peaks. In this mode all echoes are represented at
their true amplitude with no depth or attenuation
compensation. Three additional curves, drawn at
user-specified dB offsets from the original DAC
curve, can be displayed at one time. The TCG (Time
Corrected Gain) feature allows all equivalent echoes
to be displayed at the same height, regardless of
material depth related signal loss (caused by
attenuation and beam spread). TCG works by
adjusting gain over time to ensure that likereflectors, located at different material depths, are
represented by same-amplitude echoes.
Distance Gain SizeThe DGS feature allows the
user to display a curve which represents equivalentreflector-sizes, for a particular gain, as a function of
the distance between the reflector and transducer.
DGS assumes a vertical beam impingement. Flaw
sizing evaluations can be done via dB to the DGS
curve or ERS (Equivalent Reflector Size) methods.
Issue 04, 05/04
1-23
IF GateMonitors the time window from the initial

pulse to the interface between two materials, where
the top material is ignored and timing begins at the
interface to make measurements in the second
material. Typically used for immersion testing, to
begin measurements at the interface between water
and the top of the material to be inspected.
Backwall Echo AttenuatorThe BEA feature allows
the user to monitor the backwall echo by amplifying
the region under Gate B by the amount specified by
the backwall gain control.
1.8.2 How Options are Dealt with in This

Manual
When an option is installed, several additional
functions and, in some cases submenus, are available.
These additional capabilities can only be accessed
when the option is installed. Whenever these special
features are discussed in this manual, they will be
identified as being available only with one or more of
the optional upgrades. If no reference to an optional
upgrade is made, assume that the feature is available
with the base-model instrument.
1-24
Issue 04, 05/04
IF GateMonitors the time window from the initial

pulse to the interface between two materials, where
the top material is ignored and timing begins at the
interface to make measurements in the second
material. Typically used for immersion testing, to
begin measurements at the interface between water
and the top of the material to be inspected.
Backwall Echo AttenuatorThe BEA feature allows
the user to monitor the backwall echo by amplifying
the region under Gate B by the amount specified by
the backwall gain control.
1.8.2 How Options are Dealt with in This

Manual
When an option is installed, several additional
functions and, in some cases submenus, are available.
These additional capabilities can only be accessed
when the option is installed. Whenever these special
features are discussed in this manual, they will be
identified as being available only with one or more of
the optional upgrades. If no reference to an optional
upgrade is made, assume that the feature is available
with the base-model instrument.
1-24
Issue 04, 05/04
Setup and Calibration

of the USN 58 2
Issue 04, 05/04
2-1
Setup and Calibration

of the USN 58 2
Issue 04, 05/04
2-1
Setup and Calibration of the USN 58
Initial Instrument Setup
This chapter explains how to prepare your instrument

for use. In this chapter, youll learn how to
Set up the instruments display and basic operating
features (section 2.1)
Install a probe and configure the Pulser/Receiver to
match the probe type (section 2.2)
Adjusting the A-Scan display screens appearance
(section 2.3)
Turn on the USN 58 by pressing K. The Home Menu

will be activated. This menus structure was shown in
Figures 1-3A and B. Activate the Basic Menu by
pressing u below it. Some submenus and functions
from the Basic Menu are shown in Figure 2-1.
Specifying the Installed Battery Type

(BASIC-OPTIONS-BATTERY TYPE)
Calibrate the instrument (section 2.4)

Most sections in this chapter describe steps that will
be followed by every user of a new instrument. For this
reason, we suggest that you proceed through each
section in this chapter while configuring your
instrument for the first time.
2.1 Initial Instrument Setup

In this part of the manual, youll learn how to configure
the USN 58s display and operating features. Follow
these procedures to turn on the USN 58 and make
initial adjustments to the instrument control settings.
2-2
Because the USN 58 saves the control settings when

its turned off and restores them when its turned on,
you wont have to repeat these adjustments unless a
change is required.
H Note:
Selection of battery type only affects the accuracy of
the on-screen battery-indicator. This ensures proper
indication of remaining power.
Step 1: Activate the OPTIONS submenu (located in

the Basic Menu) by pressing u below it. Four
functions will appear down the right side of the display
screen.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled BATTERY
TYPE. To change the selected battery type, continue
pressing v or turn the function knob. Youll note that
Issue 04, 05/04
This chapter explains how to prepare your instrument

for use. In this chapter, youll learn how to
Set up the instruments display and basic operating
features (section 2.1)
Install a probe and configure the Pulser/Receiver to
match the probe type (section 2.2)
Adjusting the A-Scan display screens appearance
(section 2.3)
Because the USN 58 saves the control settings when

its turned off and restores them when its turned on,
you wont have to repeat these adjustments unless a
change is required.
Turn on the USN 58 by pressing K. The Home Menu
will be activated. This menus structure was shown in
Figures 1-3A and B. Activate the Basic Menu by
pressing u below it. Some submenus and functions
from the Basic Menu are shown in Figure 2-1.
Specifying the Installed Battery Type

(BASIC-OPTIONS-BATTERY TYPE)
Calibrate the instrument (section 2.4)

Most sections in this chapter describe steps that will
be followed by every user of a new instrument. For this
reason, we suggest that you proceed through each
section in this chapter while configuring your
instrument for the first time.
2.1 Initial Instrument Setup

In this part of the manual, youll learn how to configure
the USN 58s display and operating features. Follow
these procedures to turn on the USN 58 and make
initial adjustments to the instrument control settings.
2-2
H Note:
Selection of battery type only affects the accuracy of
the on-screen battery-indicator. This ensures proper
indication of remaining power.
Step 1: Activate the OPTIONS submenu (located in

screen.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled BATTERY
TYPE. To change the selected battery type, continue
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 2-1The Basic Menu allows the user to adjust most of the instruments display and operating features.
Issue 04, 05/04
2-3
FIGURE 2-1The Basic Menu allows the user to adjust most of the instruments display and operating features.
Issue 04, 05/04
2-3
the options available are Lithium, NiMH (nickel metal

hydride), NiCAD, and Alkaline. The default battery type
is Lithium.
Step 3: Setting the correct battery type ensures

accurate battery indicator levels.
continue pressing v or turn the function knob. Youll

note that the options available are English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Norwegian,
Swedish, Finnish, Danish, Czech, Romanian,
Slovenian, and Russian. The default language is
English.

of Measurement, Date, and Time
Step 3: The display-screen and report language will be

set to the choice last selected.
Use the procedures below to adjust the unit of

measurement, the date, the time, and the language
that appears on the instruments display screens and
data output. The adjustments will require access to the
REGIONAL submenu. This is accessed from the Basic
Menu (shown in Figure 2-1).
Setting the Date

(BASIC-REGIONAL-DATE)
Setting the Operating Language

(BASIC-REGIONAL-LANGUAGE)
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled DATE. The

date is displayed in Day/Month/Year format. Note that
the first time you press v, the day character is
highlighted. The next time you press v, the month
character is highlighted. Finally, pressing v again will
cause the year character to be highlighted.
Step 1: Activate the REGIONAL submenu (located in

screen.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled
LANGUAGE. To change the selected language,
2-4
Step 1: Activate the REGIONAL submenu (located in the

Basic Menu) by pressing u below it. Four functions will
appear down the right side of the display screen.
Step 3: To change the month, days, or year, turn the

function knob while the desired character is
highlighted.
Issue 04, 05/04
the options available are Lithium, NiMH (nickel metal

hydride), NiCAD, and Alkaline. The default battery type
is Lithium.
Step 3: Setting the correct battery type ensures

accurate battery indicator levels.
continue pressing v or turn the function knob. Youll

note that the options available are English, German,
French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Norwegian,
Swedish, Finnish, Danish, Czech, Romanian,
Slovenian, and Russian. The default language is
English.

of Measurement, Date, and Time
Step 3: The display-screen and report language will be

set to the choice last selected.
Use the procedures below to adjust the unit of

measurement, the date, the time, and the language
that appears on the instruments display screens and
data output. The adjustments will require access to the
REGIONAL submenu. This is accessed from the Basic
Menu (shown in Figure 2-1).
Setting the Date

(BASIC-REGIONAL-DATE)
Setting the Operating Language

(BASIC-REGIONAL-LANGUAGE)
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled DATE. The

date is displayed in Day/Month/Year format. Note that
the first time you press v, the day character is
highlighted. The next time you press v, the month
character is highlighted. Finally, pressing v again will
cause the year character to be highlighted.

screen.
LANGUAGE. To change the selected language,
2-4
Step 1: Activate the REGIONAL submenu (located in the

Basic Menu) by pressing u below it. Four functions will
Step 3: To change the month, days, or year, turn the

function knob while the desired character is
highlighted.
Issue 04, 05/04
Step 4: When complete, press v one more time. The

current date will be set to the date displayed.
Setting the Time (BASIC-REGIONAL-TIME)

screen.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled TIME.
Time is displayed in 24-hour format. Note that the first
time you press v, the hours character is highlighted.
The next time you press v, the minutes character is
highlighted. Finally, pressing v again will cause the
seconds character to be highlighted.
Step 3: To change the hours, minutes, or seconds
setting, turn the function knob while the desired
character is highlighted.
H Note:
Once set, the internal clock of the USN 58 will
maintain the current date and time.
Setting the Units of Measurement

(BASIC-REGIONAL-UNITS)
screen.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled UNITS.
Youll note that the following options are available:
INCHdefault setting which displays values in
inches
MMdisplays values in millimeters
uSECdisplays values in micro-seconds

current time will be set to the time displayed.
Step 3: To change the units of measurement, continue

pressing v or turn the function knob.
Step 4: The unit of measurement will be set to the
choice last displayed.
Issue 04, 05/04
2-5

current date will be set to the date displayed.
Setting the Time (BASIC-REGIONAL-TIME)

screen.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled TIME.
Time is displayed in 24-hour format. Note that the first
time you press v, the hours character is highlighted.
The next time you press v, the minutes character is
highlighted. Finally, pressing v again will cause the
seconds character to be highlighted.
Step 3: To change the hours, minutes, or seconds
setting, turn the function knob while the desired
character is highlighted.
H Note:
Once set, the internal clock of the USN 58 will
maintain the current date and time.
Setting the Units of Measurement

(BASIC-REGIONAL-UNITS)
screen.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled UNITS.
Youll note that the following options are available:
INCHdefault setting which displays values in
inches
MMdisplays values in millimeters
uSECdisplays values in micro-seconds

current time will be set to the time displayed.
Step 3: To change the units of measurement, continue

Step 4: The unit of measurement will be set to the
choice last displayed.
Issue 04, 05/04
2-5
A Attention:
Measurement data stored in the on-board data
recorder is automatically converted each time the
unit of measure is changed. Numerous changes
may slightly alter stored readings due to
cumulative conversion errors. If frequent changes
are necessary, important data should be protected
by printing or transferring it to a PC.
Step 3: To change the brightness level, continue

Step 4: The display brightness will remain at the level
last displayed.
Selecting a Display Grid

(BASIC-DISPLAY-GRID)
2.1.2 Display Appearance

Use the procedures (which vary depending on
instrument model) in this section to adjust display
appearance. The adjustments will require access to the
DISPLAY and CONFIG submenus, which are each
accessed from the Basic Menu (shown in Figure 2-1).
Setting the Display Brightness

(BASIC-DISPLAY-BRIGHTNES)
Step 1: Activate the DISPLAY submenu (located in the
Basic Menu) by pressing u below it. Functions will
2-6

BRIGHTNESS. Select high or low (58R) or from levels
1 to 20 (58L).

Basic Menu) by pressing u below it. Three functions
will appear down the right side of the display screen.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled GRID.
Step 3: To change the grid type, continue pressing or
turn the function knob. Each grid style is shown in the
display screens A-Scan window as it is selected. Youll
note that the following styles are available:
GRID 1Five major horizontal and vertical
divisions.
Issue 04, 05/04
A Attention:
Measurement data stored in the on-board data
recorder is automatically converted each time the
unit of measure is changed. Numerous changes
may slightly alter stored readings due to
cumulative conversion errors. If frequent changes
are necessary, important data should be protected
by printing or transferring it to a PC.

BRIGHTNESS. Select high or low (58R) or from levels
1 to 20 (58L).
Step 3: To change the brightness level, continue
Step 4: The display brightness will remain at the level
last displayed.
2.1.2 Display Appearance
Selecting a Display Grid

(BASIC-DISPLAY-GRID)
Use the procedures (which vary depending on

instrument model) in this section to adjust display
appearance. The adjustments will require access to the
DISPLAY and CONFIG submenus, which are each
accessed from the Basic Menu (shown in Figure 2-1).

Basic Menu) by pressing u below it. Three functions
Setting the Display Brightness

(BASIC-DISPLAY-BRIGHTNES)
Basic Menu) by pressing u below it. Functions will
2-6
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled GRID.

Step 3: To change the grid type, continue pressing or
turn the function knob. Each grid style is shown in the
display screens A-Scan window as it is selected. Youll
note that the following styles are available:
GRID 1Five major horizontal and vertical
divisions.
Issue 04, 05/04
GRID 2Ten major horizontal and vertical divisions.

OFFNo on-screen grid. Only display-edge marks
are visible.
Note that the display BRIGHTNESS will automatically

be set to LOW when operating in REVERSE VIDEO
mode (HIGH is not available).
Step 4: The grid style will be set to the last one

displayed.
Setting the Display Color58L

(BASIC-DISPLAY-COLOR)
Selecting Reverse Video Mode58R

(BASIC-DISPLAY-REVERSE VIDEO)

Basic Menu) by pressing
below it. Four functions
The USN 58Rs display screen normally shows the

A-Scan trace in orange against a black background. To
improve visibility in some outdoor lighting conditions,
the REVERSE VIDEO feature changes the display to
show a black A-Scan trace against an orange
background. To select REVERSE VIDEO mode:
Step 1: Activate the DISPLAY submenu.
Step 3: To change the displays color scheme, continue pressing

or turn the function knob.
Step 4: The display color will remain at the scheme
last displayed.
Step 2: Press v next to the REVERSE VIDEO

function.
H Note:
Step 3: Continue pressing v or turn the function knob

to choose viewing mode.
Step 2: Press
next to the selection titled COLOR.
There are four preset color schemes.
All USN 58L color schemes are recommended for

indoor operation while schemes 3 and 4 are best suited
for outdoor operation.
Issue 04, 05/04
2-7
GRID 2Ten major horizontal and vertical divisions.

OFFNo on-screen grid. Only display-edge marks
are visible.
Note that the display BRIGHTNESS will automatically

be set to LOW when operating in REVERSE VIDEO
mode (HIGH is not available).
Step 4: The grid style will be set to the last one

displayed.
Setting the Display Color58L

(BASIC-DISPLAY-COLOR)
Selecting Reverse Video Mode58R

(BASIC-DISPLAY-REVERSE VIDEO)

The USN 58Rs display screen normally shows the

A-Scan trace in orange against a black background. To
improve visibility in some outdoor lighting conditions,
the REVERSE VIDEO feature changes the display to
show a black A-Scan trace against an orange
background. To select REVERSE VIDEO mode:
Step 1: Activate the DISPLAY submenu.
Step 3: To change the displays color scheme, continue pressing

Step 4: The display color will remain at the scheme
last displayed.
Step 2: Press v next to the REVERSE VIDEO

function.
H Note:
Step 3: Continue pressing v or turn the function knob

to choose viewing mode.
Step 2: Press
next to the selection titled COLOR.
There are four preset color schemes.
All USN 58L color schemes are recommended for

indoor operation while schemes 3 and 4 are best suited
for outdoor operation.
Issue 04, 05/04
2-7
Installing a Probe
Setting the A-Scan Color58L

(BASIC-DISPLAY-ASCAN COLOR)
HOLLOWOnly the A-Scans outline appears on

the display screen.

FILLEDA solid A-Scan appears on the display.
Step 2: Press
next to the selection titled ASCAN
COLOR. There are eight A-Scan color options.
SMART FILLEDDisplays intensity variations

along a solid waveform. (Refer to section 6.3)
Step 3: To change the A-Scans color, continue pressor turn the function knob.
ing
Step 3: To change the A-Scans style, continue

Step 4: The A-Scan echo will remain the color last

displayed.
2.2 Installing a Probe
Setting the A-Scan Style

(BASIC-CONFIG-ASCAN MODE)
2.2.1 Connecting a Probe
Step 1: Activate the CONFIG submenu (located in the

Basic Menu) by pressing u below it. Four functions
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled ASCAN
MODE. The following are available:
2-8
SMART HOLLOWDisplays intensity variations

along a hollow waveform. (Refer to section 6.3)
When connecting a probe to the instrument, its not

only important that the probes physical connection be
properly made. Its also important that the instrument
is properly configured to work with the installed probe.
The USN 58 will operate with one or two single-element
probes or with a dual-element probe.
Issue 04, 05/04
Installing a Probe
Setting the A-Scan Color58L

(BASIC-DISPLAY-ASCAN COLOR)
HOLLOWOnly the A-Scans outline appears on

the display screen.

FILLEDA solid A-Scan appears on the display.
Step 2: Press
next to the selection titled ASCAN
COLOR. There are eight A-Scan color options.
SMART FILLEDDisplays intensity variations

along a solid waveform. (Refer to section 6.3)
Step 3: To change the A-Scans color, continue pressing

Step 3: To change the A-Scans style, continue

Step 4: The A-Scan echo will remain the color last

displayed.
2.2 Installing a Probe
Setting the A-Scan Style

(BASIC-CONFIG-ASCAN MODE)
2.2.1 Connecting a Probe
Step 1: Activate the CONFIG submenu (located in the

Basic Menu) by pressing u below it. Four functions
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled ASCAN
MODE. The following are available:
2-8
SMART HOLLOWDisplays intensity variations

along a hollow waveform. (Refer to section 6.3)
When connecting a probe to the instrument, its not

only important that the probes physical connection be
properly made. Its also important that the instrument
is properly configured to work with the installed probe.
The USN 58 will operate with one or two single-element
probes or with a dual-element probe.
Issue 04, 05/04
Installing a Probe
To install a single-element probe, connect the probe

cable to either of the two ports on the front of the
instrument (Figure 2-2). When two probes, or a dualelement probe is connected to the instrument, install
the RECEIVE probe connector in the top port and the
TRANSMIT connector in the bottom port.
Bar (near the upper right corner of the display)

whenever that probe type is indicated. The following
types are available:

Match the Probe Type
THROUGHFor two single-element probes used on

opposing surfaces of the test piece
Three instrument settings depend directly on the type

of probe installed. Adjust these settings any time a
different type of probe is installed.
Step 4: The probe type will be set to the last one

displayed.
OFFFor single-element probes
Specifying the Probe Frequency

(PLSRCVR-RECEIVER-FREQUENCY)
Selecting Probe Type

(PLSRCVR-RECEIVER-DUAL)
Step 1: Activate the RECEIVER submenu (located in
the Plsrcvr Menu) by pressing u below it.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled DUAL.
Step 3: To change the probe type, continue pressing
v or turn the function knob. Each available probe type
is represented by an icon thats displayed in the Icon
ONFor dual-element probes

FREQUENCY.
Step 3: To change the specified frequency, continue
the following frequency settings are available:
Issue 04, 05/04
2-9
Installing a Probe
To install a single-element probe, connect the probe

cable to either of the two ports on the front of the
instrument (Figure 2-2). When two probes, or a dualelement probe is connected to the instrument, install
the RECEIVE probe connector in the top port and the
TRANSMIT connector in the bottom port.
Bar (near the upper right corner of the display)

whenever that probe type is indicated. The following
types are available:

Match the Probe Type
THROUGHFor two single-element probes used on

opposing surfaces of the test piece
Three instrument settings depend directly on the type

of probe installed. Adjust these settings any time a
different type of probe is installed.
Step 4: The probe type will be set to the last one

displayed.
OFFFor single-element probes
Specifying the Probe Frequency

(PLSRCVR-RECEIVER-FREQUENCY)
Selecting Probe Type

(PLSRCVR-RECEIVER-DUAL)
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled DUAL.
Step 3: To change the probe type, continue pressing
v or turn the function knob. Each available probe type
is represented by an icon thats displayed in the Icon
ONFor dual-element probes

FREQUENCY.
Step 3: To change the specified frequency, continue
the following frequency settings are available:
Issue 04, 05/04
2-9
Installing a Probe
FIGURE 2-2Probe Attachment

Locations
2-10
Issue 04, 05/04
Installing a Probe
FIGURE 2-2Probe Attachment

Locations
2-10
Issue 04, 05/04
Adjusting the A-Scan
1, 2, 2.25, 4, 5, 10, 15 MHzSet to match

conventional probe frequencies

the following damping levels are available:
.25-2.25 MHz LPSelect to utilize a built-in lowpass (LP) filter with probes in the specified range
50, 75, 150, 500 (see Figure 2-3)
10-25 MHz HPSelect to utilize a built-in high-pass

(HP) filter with probes in the specified range
2-25 MHz BBSelect to utilize a built-in broad-band
(BB) filter with probes in the specified range
Step 4: The probe frequency level will be set to the

last one displayed.

Changing the Damping Level
(PLSRCVR-PULSER-DAMPING)
Step 1: Activate the PULSER submenu (located in the
Plsrcvr Menu) by pressing u below it.
Step 4: The damping level will be set to the one last

displayed.
2.3 Adjusting the A-Scan

2.3.1 Setting the A-Scan Range
Calibration requires the use of two calibrated
standards, of different thickness, made of the same
material as the test piece. Prior to calibrating the
instrument/probe combination, the A-Scan displayscreen range (the material thickness value represented
by the full horizontal width of the screen) will normally
be set to a value equal to or slightly larger than the
thicker calibrated standard (Figure 2-4).
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled DAMPING.

Step 3: To change the specified damping level and
optimize the A-Scan signal appearance, continue
Issue 04, 05/04
2-11
1, 2, 2.25, 4, 5, 10, 15 MHzSet to match

conventional probe frequencies

the following damping levels are available:
.25-2.25 MHz LPSelect to utilize a built-in lowpass (LP) filter with probes in the specified range
50, 75, 150, 500 (see Figure 2-3)
10-25 MHz HPSelect to utilize a built-in high-pass

(HP) filter with probes in the specified range
2-25 MHz BBSelect to utilize a built-in broad-band
(BB) filter with probes in the specified range
Step 4: The probe frequency level will be set to the

last one displayed.

Changing the Damping Level
(PLSRCVR-PULSER-DAMPING)
Step 1: Activate the PULSER submenu (located in the
Plsrcvr Menu) by pressing u below it.
Step 4: The damping level will be set to the one last

displayed.
2.3 Adjusting the A-Scan

2.3.1 Setting the A-Scan Range
Calibration requires the use of two calibrated
standards, of different thickness, made of the same
material as the test piece. Prior to calibrating the
instrument/probe combination, the A-Scan displayscreen range (the material thickness value represented
by the full horizontal width of the screen) will normally
be set to a value equal to or slightly larger than the
thicker calibrated standard (Figure 2-4).
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled DAMPING.

Step 3: To change the specified damping level and
optimize the A-Scan signal appearance, continue
Issue 04, 05/04
2-11
FIGURE 2-3Typical Effects of

Damping Changes
2-12
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 2-3Typical Effects of

Damping Changes
2-12
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 2-4Effect of A-Scan

Range Adjustment
Issue 04, 05/04
2-13
FIGURE 2-4Effect of A-Scan

Range Adjustment
Issue 04, 05/04
2-13
Setting The A-Scan Range

Step 1: Activate the Home Menu by pressing h.
Four functions will appear down the right side of the
display screen.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled RANGE.
Youll note that RANGE has both coarse and fine
adjustment modes. Coarse and fine modes are selected
by pressing v more than once. When RANGE appears
in all capital letters, turning the function knob will
produce large changes in the range value. When range
appears in all lower-case letters, turning the function
knob will change the value by smaller amounts.
Step 3: To change the range turn the function knob.
Youll note that the range can vary from 0.040 to 480
inches.
Step 4: The displays horizontal range will remain as set.
2.3.2 Setting the Display Delay

The display delay function shifts the displayed A-Scan
to the left or right. This function is used to set the
USN 58s viewing window. To set the display delay
2-14

display screen.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled DISPLAY
DELAY.
Step 3: To change the display delay turn the function
knob. Youll note that the displayed echoes shift to the
left or right.

Point
The display starting point is the reference from which
all display features are set.
Step 1: Activate the BASIC Menu (located in the

HOME Menu) by pressing u below it.
Step 2: Select the CONFIG submenu by pressing u
below it. Four functions will appear down the right side
of the display screen, including DISPLAY START. This
function is set to IP in the Base-Model instrument.
Issue 04, 05/04
Setting The A-Scan Range

display screen.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled RANGE.
Youll note that RANGE has both coarse and fine
adjustment modes. Coarse and fine modes are selected
by pressing v more than once. When RANGE appears
in all capital letters, turning the function knob will
produce large changes in the range value. When range
appears in all lower-case letters, turning the function
knob will change the value by smaller amounts.
Step 3: To change the range turn the function knob.
Youll note that the range can vary from 0.040 to 480
inches.
Step 4: The displays horizontal range will remain as set.
2.3.2 Setting the Display Delay

The display delay function shifts the displayed A-Scan
to the left or right. This function is used to set the
USN 58s viewing window. To set the display delay
2-14

display screen.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled DISPLAY
DELAY.
Step 3: To change the display delay turn the function
knob. Youll note that the displayed echoes shift to the
left or right.

Point
The display starting point is the reference from which
all display features are set.
Step 1: Activate the BASIC Menu (located in the

Step 2: Select the CONFIG submenu by pressing u
of the display screen, including DISPLAY START. This
function is set to IP in the Base-Model instrument.
Issue 04, 05/04

Frequency (PRF)
faulty settings. Unacceptable PRF settings will

cause a display prompt to appear.
The Pulser fires at a frequency which can either be set

automatically or manually. Alternatively, the Pulser can
be fired by an external source. To set the PRF mode
and frequency level
Step 1: Activate the PLSRCVR Menu (located in the

Step 2: Select the PRF submenu by pressing u below
it. Two functions will appear down the right side of the
display screen.
Step 3: Press v next to the function titled PRF
MODE. Youll note that there are four options:
AUTOHIGHThe instrument calculates and sets a
pulser firing rate at 75% of the maximum frequency
possible based on range and material velocity
AUTOLOWThe instrument calculates and sets a
pulser firing rate at 25% of the maximum frequency possible based on range and material
velocity
MANUALAllows the user to set the pulser
frequency from 15 to 2000 Hz, while prohibiting
EXTERNALAllows an external device to signal

the pulser firing (Chapter 7). Note the XT icon will
appear when the instrument is fired externally. Note
that if an unacceptable external firing command is
received, the XT icon will be displayed. (This option
is not available if a SQUARE (58L only) pulser type
is selected.)
Step 4: To manually set the Pulser Repetition

Frequency, or to view the automatically calculated
frequency, press v next to the function titled PRF
VALUE. The automatically calculated value (if PRF
MODE is set to AUTOHIGH or AUTOLOW) will be
displayed in the function box. If PRF MODE is set to
MANUAL, you must now adjust the PRF VALUE by
turning the function knob.
H Note:
The PRF VALUE setting (58L only) may be automatically limited based on the user-selected pulser
voltage and width settings (sections 2.3.7 and 2.3.8).
This feature acts to limit signal dissipation.
Issue 04, 05/04

Frequency (PRF)
faulty settings. Unacceptable PRF settings will

cause a display prompt to appear.
The Pulser fires at a frequency which can either be set

automatically or manually. Alternatively, the Pulser can
be fired by an external source. To set the PRF mode
and frequency level

Step 2: Select the PRF submenu by pressing u below
it. Two functions will appear down the right side of the
display screen.
Step 3: Press v next to the function titled PRF
MODE. Youll note that there are four options:
AUTOHIGHThe instrument calculates and sets a
pulser firing rate at 75% of the maximum frequency
possible based on range and material velocity
AUTOLOWThe instrument calculates and sets a
pulser firing rate at 25% of the maximum frequency possible based on range and material
velocity
MANUALAllows the user to set the pulser
frequency from 15 to 2000 Hz, while prohibiting
2-15
EXTERNALAllows an external device to signal

the pulser firing (Chapter 7). Note the XT icon will
appear when the instrument is fired externally. Note
that if an unacceptable external firing command is
received, the XT icon will be displayed. (This option
is not available if a SQUARE (58L only) pulser type
is selected.)
Step 4: To manually set the Pulser Repetition

Frequency, or to view the automatically calculated
frequency, press v next to the function titled PRF
VALUE. The automatically calculated value (if PRF
MODE is set to AUTOHIGH or AUTOLOW) will be
displayed in the function box. If PRF MODE is set to
MANUAL, you must now adjust the PRF VALUE by
turning the function knob.
H Note:
The PRF VALUE setting (58L only) may be automatically limited based on the user-selected pulser
voltage and width settings (sections 2.3.7 and 2.3.8).
This feature acts to limit signal dissipation.
Issue 04, 05/04
2-15
2.3.5 Selecting a Rectification Mode

Rectification effects the orientation of the A-scan on
the display screen. The A-scan represents the sound
pulse (echo) thats returned from the material being
tested to the instrument. The series of echoes looks
like the Radio Frequency (RF) signal thats shown in
Figure 2-5. Note that the RF signal has a negative
component below the axis, and a positive component
above the axis. In RF mode, the A-gate and B-gate can
be positioned either above or below the axis, to be
triggered by a positive-heading echo or a negativeheading echo.
Positive Half Rectification means that only the upper

(positive) half of the RF signal is displayed.
Negative Half Rectification means that only the bottom
(negative) half of the RF signal is displayed. In Figure
2-5, note that even though its the negative half of the
RF signal, its displayed in the same orientation as a
positive component. This is only to simplify viewing.
FIGURE 2-5Rectification controls how much of the returned sound pulse appears on the display screen. Note that
when RF rectification is selected, the A-Gate and B-Gate can be positioned above or below the axis.
2-16
Issue 04, 05/04
2.3.5 Selecting a Rectification Mode
triggered by a positive-heading echo or a negativeheading echo.
Rectification effects the orientation of the A-scan on

the display screen. The A-scan represents the sound
pulse (echo) thats returned from the material being
tested to the instrument. The series of echoes looks
like the Radio Frequency (RF) signal thats shown in
Figure 2-5. Note that the RF signal has a negative
component below the axis, and a positive component
above the axis. In RF mode, the A-gate and B-gate can
be positioned either above or below the axis, to be
Positive Half Rectification means that only the upper

(positive) half of the RF signal is displayed.
Negative Half Rectification means that only the bottom
(negative) half of the RF signal is displayed. In Figure
2-5, note that even though its the negative half of the
RF signal, its displayed in the same orientation as a
positive component. This is only to simplify viewing.
FIGURE 2-5Rectification controls how much of the returned sound pulse appears on the display screen. Note that
when RF rectification is selected, the A-Gate and B-Gate can be positioned above or below the axis.
2-16
Issue 04, 05/04
The signal displayed in the view identified as Negative

Reactance is the negative component of the RF signal.
Full-Wave Rectification combines the positive and

negative rectified signals together, and displays both of
them in a positive orientation (Figure 2-5).
Use the following procedure to select a rectification mode

RFShows the echo with no rectification
Step 4: Select the rectification method.
2.3.6 Selecting the Pulser Type

Pulser shape is generally selected based on
penetration requirements and/or test standard
specifications. Available types include square
(58L only) and spike.
Step 2: Select the RECEIVER submenu by pressing u

of the display screen.
To select a pulser type:
Step 3: Press v next to the function titled RECTIFY

(Figure 2-5). Youll note that there are four options:
Step 2: Select the PULSER submenu.
NEG HALFWAVEShows the negative component

of the RF signal but displays it in a positive
orientation
POS HALFWAVEShows the positive component of
the RF signal
FULLWAVEShows the positive and negative
halves of the RF wave, but both are oriented in the
positive direction
Step 1: Activate The PLSRCVR Menu.
Step 3: Press v next to the function titled PULSER

TYPE. Select SQUARE (58L only) or SPIKE.
H Note:
When a SPIKE type pulse is selected, the pulser
VOLTAGE and WIDTH functions (sections 2.3.7 and
2.3.8) are disabled. When SQUARE type pulse is
selected (58L only), the EXTERNAL PRF MODE
setting is disabled (Section 2.3.4).
Issue 04, 05/04
2-17
The signal displayed in the view identified as Negative

Reactance is the negative component of the RF signal.
Full-Wave Rectification combines the positive and

negative rectified signals together, and displays both of
them in a positive orientation (Figure 2-5).
Use the following procedure to select a rectification mode

RFShows the echo with no rectification
Step 4: Select the rectification method.
2.3.6 Selecting the Pulser Type

Pulser shape is generally selected based on
penetration requirements and/or test standard
specifications. Available types include square
(58L only) and spike.
Step 2: Select the RECEIVER submenu by pressing

u below it. Four functions will appear down the right
side of the display screen.
To select a pulser type:
Step 3: Press v next to the function titled RECTIFY

(Figure 2-5). Youll note that there are four options:
NEG HALFWAVEShows the negative component

of the RF signal but displays it in a positive
orientation
POS HALFWAVEShows the positive component
of the RF signal
FULLWAVEShows the positive and negative
halves of the RF wave, but both are oriented in the
positive direction
Step 3: Press v next to the function titled PULSER

TYPE. Select SQUARE (58L only) or SPIKE.
H Note:
2.3.8) are disabled. When SQUARE type pulse is
selected (58L only), the EXTERNAL PRF MODE
setting is disabled (Section 2.3.4).
Issue 04, 05/04
2-17

ENERGY Level
The relative energy with which the pulser fires is
adjusted by changing the ENERGY setting (for SPIKE
pulser types) or pulser voltage and width settings (for
SQUARE pulser types, which is only available in the
58L). To set the pulser voltage or energy level:

Step 2: Select the PULSER submenu by pressing u
below it.
Step 3: If a SPIKE pulser type is selected, set the
ENERGY level to HIGH or LOW. If a SQUARE type is
selected (58L only), press v next to the function titled
VOLTAGE. Set a voltage level between 50 and 450
volts by turning the function knob.

(SQUARE Pulser Types only)
(USN 58L)
The pulser width (for square pulse types, which are
only available in the 58L) generally varies from 50 to
1000 nanoseconds. A recommended starting point
from which the width setting can be adjusted is found
by the following equation:
Nominal width in nanoseconds = 109 (2 x probe
frequency in Hz)
For example, if a 2.25 MHz probe is used, the equation
becomes:
Nominal width in nanoseconds = 109 (2 x 2.25 x 106)
= 222 nanoseconds
To set a pulser width:
H Note:

2.3.8) are disabled.
2-18
Step 3: Press
next to he function titled WIDTH.
Change the value by turning the function knob.
Issue 04, 05/04

ENERGY Level
The relative energy with which the pulser fires is
adjusted by changing the ENERGY setting (for SPIKE
pulser types) or pulser voltage and width settings (for
SQUARE pulser types, which is only available in the
58L). To set the pulser voltage or energy level:

Step 2: Select the PULSER submenu by pressing u
below it.
Step 3: If a SPIKE pulser type is selected, set the
ENERGY level to HIGH or LOW. If a SQUARE type is
selected (58L only), press v next to the function titled
VOLTAGE. Set a voltage level between 50 and 450
volts by turning the function knob.

(SQUARE Pulser Types only)
(USN 58L)
The pulser width (for square pulse types, which are
only available in the 58L) generally varies from 50 to
1000 nanoseconds. A recommended starting point
from which the width setting can be adjusted is found
by the following equation:
Nominal width in nanoseconds = 109 (2 x probe
frequency in Hz)
For example, if a 2.25 MHz probe is used, the equation
becomes:
Nominal width in nanoseconds = 109 (2 x 2.25 x 106)
= 222 nanoseconds
To set a pulser width:
H Note:

2.3.8) are disabled.
2-18
Step 3: Press
next to he function titled WIDTH.
Change the value by turning the function knob.
Issue 04, 05/04
Calibrating the Instrument
H Note:
The pulser voltage and width settings may be automatically limited based on the user-selected PRF
VALUE setting (section 2.3.4). This feature acts to
limit signal dissipation.
2.3.9 Setting the A-Scan REJECT Level

A portion of the A-Scan can be omitted from the
display screen. To omit a portion of the A-Scan, you
must define the percentage of full-screen height you
wish to omit. To set a reject percentage
Step 1: Activate the PLSRCVR menu (located in the

u below it.
Step 3: Press v next to the function titled REJECT.
Step 4: To change the amount of A-Scan you wish to
omit from the display screen (as a percentage of
screen height) turn the function knob. You may omit
A-Scans up to 80% of the screen height. Whenever
REJECT is set to a value greater then 0%, the

will appear in the status bar.
2.4 Calibrating the Instrument

2.4.1 Pre-calibration Check List
To improve the accuracy and quality of your
calibration, be sure that the following conditions are
met before launching the calibration function:
Probe installed
Dual (Receiver) setting must match probe
Set the material type
Recommended that PROBE DELAY and DISPLAY
DELAY be set to 0
PRF set to AUTOHIGH or AUTOLOW.
TCGTurned OFF
Issue 04, 05/04
H Note:
The pulser voltage and width settings may be automatically limited based on the user-selected PRF
VALUE setting (section 2.3.4). This feature acts to
limit signal dissipation.
2.3.9 Setting the A-Scan REJECT Level

A portion of the A-Scan can be omitted from the
display screen. To omit a portion of the A-Scan, you
must define the percentage of full-screen height you
wish to omit. To set a reject percentage
Step 1: Activate the PLSRCVR menu (located in the

u below it.
Step 3: Press v next to the function titled REJECT.
Step 4: To change the amount of A-Scan you wish to
omit from the display screen (as a percentage of
screen height) turn the function knob. You may omit
A-Scans up to 80% of the screen height. Whenever
2-19
REJECT is set to a value greater then 0%, the

will appear in the status bar.
2.4 Calibrating the Instrument

2.4.1 Pre-calibration Check List
To improve the accuracy and quality of your
calibration, be sure that the following conditions are
met before launching the calibration function:
Probe installed
Dual (Receiver) setting must match probe
Set the material type
Recommended that PROBE DELAY and DISPLAY
DELAY be set to 0
PRF set to AUTOHIGH or AUTOLOW.
TCGTurned OFF
Issue 04, 05/04
2-19
Master LockTurned OFF
selection titled A START. Turn the function knob (this

will shift the starting point of the A-Gate) until the AGate lies over the echo corresponding to the thinner
standards thickness (Figure 2-6).
Recommended that REJECT be set to 0.

USN 58 Series Instruments
(Read the following while reviewing Figure 2-6)
Step 1: From the Home Menu, activate the Autocal
Menu by pressing u below it. The SETUP submenu
will be highlighted and four functions will appear down
the right side of the display screen.
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled S-REF1
and turn the function knob until the value of S-REF1
matches the thickness of the thinner calibration
standard.
matches the thickness of the thicker calibration
standard.
Step 5: Press v next to the selection titled RECORD.

The value in the function box will change from OFF to
S-REF1?. While maintaining the signal in the A-Gate,
press v next to RECORD again. The value in the
function box will now read S-REF2 ?.
Step 6: Apply couplant and couple the probe to the
thicker calibration standard. Press v next to the
will shift the starting point of the A-Gate) until the AGate lies over the echo corresponding to the thicker
The value in the function box will change from
S-REF2 ? to OFF. The USN 60 will automatically
calculate the materials velocity and the probe delay.

thinner calibration standard. Press v next to the
2-20
Issue 04, 05/04
Master LockTurned OFF

will shift the starting point of the A-Gate) until the AGate lies over the echo corresponding to the thinner
Recommended that REJECT be set to 0.

USN 58 Series Instruments
(Read the following while reviewing Figure 2-6)
Step 1: From the Home Menu, activate the Autocal
Menu by pressing u below it. The SETUP submenu
will be highlighted and four functions will appear down
the right side of the display screen.
matches the thickness of the thinner calibration
standard.
matches the thickness of the thicker calibration
standard.

The value in the function box will change from OFF to
S-REF1?. While maintaining the signal in the A-Gate,
press v next to RECORD again. The value in the
function box will now read S-REF2 ?.
thicker calibration standard. Press v next to the
will shift the starting point of the A-Gate) until the AGate lies over the echo corresponding to the thicker
The value in the function box will change from
S-REF2 ? to OFF. The USN 60 will automatically
calculate the materials velocity and the probe delay.

thinner calibration standard. Press v next to the
2-20
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 2-6Auto Calibration Procedures

Issue 04, 05/04
2-21
FIGURE 2-6Auto Calibration Procedures

Issue 04, 05/04
2-21
Checking Calibration Results

Following the calibration procedure, the calculated
acoustical velocity and probe delay are displayed. To
view these calculated values:
Step 1: Access the Autocal Menu (located in the

Home Menu) or Range submenu (located in the Basic
Menu).
Step 2: Youll find these selections:
VELOCITYDisplays the calculated velocity after
calibration.
PROBE DELAYAdjustment made as a result of
the AUTOCAL (zeroing) procedure. This represents
the time delay caused by sound-wave travel through
a probes membrane, wear plate, or delay line.
2-22
Issue 04, 05/04
Checking Calibration Results

Following the calibration procedure, the calculated
acoustical velocity and probe delay are displayed. To
view these calculated values:
Step 1: Access the Autocal Menu (located in the

Home Menu) or Range submenu (located in the Basic
Menu).
Step 2: Youll find these selections:
VELOCITYDisplays the calculated velocity after
calibration.
PROBE DELAYAdjustment made as a result of
the AUTOCAL (zeroing) procedure. This represents
the time delay caused by sound-wave travel through
a probes membrane, wear plate, or delay line.
2-22
Issue 04, 05/04
Configuring Your Instrument

for Measurement 3
Issue 04, 05/04
3-1
Configuring Your Instrument

for Measurement 3
Issue 04, 05/04
3-1
Configuring Your Instrument for Measurement
Identify which measured data to display in the four

RESULTS boxes (section 3.5)
This chapter explains how to configure your instruments flaw detection and thickness measurement
capabilities. In this chapter, youll learn how to
Adjust the A and B-Gates, alarms, and TTL outputs
(section 3.1)
Choose a GATE-DETECTION MODE (peak or flank)
(section 3.1.2)
Specify the action taken by the MAGNIFY MODE
(section 3.1.3)
Setting and clearing TTL Outputs and Alarms
(sections 3.1.4 and 3.1.5)
Setting the amplitude measurement units for each
gate (section 3.1.6)
Select the maximum and minimum materialthickness limits (section 3.2)
Specify the action taken by the FREEZE MODE
(section 3.3)
Configure the instrument for use of ANGLE BEAM
probes (section 3.4)
3-2
Configuring the A and B-Gates
Saving the instruments settings as a data set

(section 3.6)
Lock the instrument to prevent further adjustment of
settings (section 3.7)
3.1 Configuring the A and

B-Gates
Setting the position and characteristics of the A and
B-Gates is the first step to configuring the USN 58 for
flaw detecting or material-thickness measurement. The
GATES menu controls not only the location of the A
and B-Gates, but also the alarms and other features
activated when an A-Scan signal crosses a specific
gate.
From the Home Menu, activate the Gates Menu by
pressing u below it. The submenus and functions
available in the Gates Menu are shown in Figure 3-1.
Those submenus shown as gray boxes in the figure
are discussed in this manual section.
Issue 04, 05/04

This chapter explains how to configure your instruments flaw detection and thickness measurement
capabilities. In this chapter, youll learn how to
Identify which measured data to display in the four

RESULTS boxes (section 3.5)
Adjust the A and B-Gates, alarms, and TTL outputs

(section 3.1)
Choose a GATE-DETECTION MODE (peak or flank)
(section 3.1.2)
Specify the action taken by the MAGNIFY MODE
(section 3.1.3)
Setting and clearing TTL Outputs and Alarms
(sections 3.1.4 and 3.1.5)
Setting the amplitude measurement units for each
gate (section 3.1.6)
Select the maximum and minimum materialthickness limits (section 3.2)
Specify the action taken by the FREEZE MODE
(section 3.3)
Configure the instrument for use of ANGLE BEAM
probes (section 3.4)
3-2
Saving the instruments settings as a data set

(section 3.6)
Lock the instrument to prevent further adjustment of
settings (section 3.7)
3.1 Configuring the A and

B-Gates
Setting the position and characteristics of the A and
B-Gates is the first step to configuring the USN 58 for
flaw detecting or material-thickness measurement. The
GATES menu controls not only the location of the A
and B-Gates, but also the alarms and other features
activated when an A-Scan signal crosses a specific
gate.
From the Home Menu, activate the Gates Menu by
pressing u below it. The submenus and functions
available in the Gates Menu are shown in Figure 3-1.
Those submenus shown as gray boxes in the figure
are discussed in this manual section.
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 3-1The Gates Menu allows the user to position and otherwise configure the instruments gates.
Issue 04, 05/04
3-3
FIGURE 3-1The Gates Menu allows the user to position and otherwise configure the instruments gates.
Issue 04, 05/04
3-3
3.1.1 Positioning Gates

Use the following procedures to set the vertical and
horizontal position of the A and B-Gates. The effect of
each gate-positioning function is shown in Figure 3-2.
Note that the A-Gate is always displayed as a heavier
line than the B-Gate or optional IF Gate. Remember
that gate position has the following effects on
instrument performance:
A-Scan echos on the right side of the display screen
represent features that occur at a greater depth from
the test-material surface than those on the left of
the display screen. Therefore, moving a gate to the
right means that the gate is evaluating a deeper
portion of the test material
A wider gate will simply span the equivalent of more
test-material depth
Increasing the vertical height (called threshold) of a
gate means that only reflected signals of sufficiently
large amplitude will cross the gate
3-4
Setting a Gates Starting Point

(GATES-POSITION-GATE START)
Step 1: Activate the POSITION submenu (located in
the GATES Menu).
Step 2: Select the gate to be positioned (A and BGates in the base model USN 58) using the GATE
SELECT function. The color of function-block values
matches the color of the corresponding gate.
Step 3: Select the GATE START function and adjust
the starting point by turning the Function Knob.
Increasing and decreasing the value of the starting
point moves the gate to the right and left, respectively.
Step 4: The gate starting point will remain as set, even
when width adjustments are made.
H Note:
The position of Gate B can be linked to Gate As
starting point (using the START MODE function
located in the GATEMODE submenu). In this case,
Gate Bs GATE START position is measured from
Gate As starting point. This facilitates multi-echo
Issue 04, 05/04
3.1.1 Positioning Gates

Use the following procedures to set the vertical and
horizontal position of the A and B-Gates. The effect of
each gate-positioning function is shown in Figure 3-2.
Note that the A-Gate is always displayed as a heavier
line than the B-Gate or optional IF Gate. Remember
that gate position has the following effects on
instrument performance:
A-Scan echos on the right side of the display screen
represent features that occur at a greater depth from
the test-material surface than those on the left of
the display screen. Therefore, moving a gate to the
right means that the gate is evaluating a deeper
portion of the test material
A wider gate will simply span the equivalent of more
test-material depth
Increasing the vertical height (called threshold) of a
gate means that only reflected signals of sufficiently
large amplitude will cross the gate
3-4
Setting a Gates Starting Point

(GATES-POSITION-GATE START)
Step 1: Activate the POSITION submenu (located in
the GATES Menu).
Step 2: Select the gate to be positioned (A and BGates in the base model USN 58) using the GATE
SELECT function. The color of function-block values
matches the color of the corresponding gate.
Step 3: Select the GATE START function and adjust
the starting point by turning the Function Knob.
Increasing and decreasing the value of the starting
point moves the gate to the right and left, respectively.
Step 4: The gate starting point will remain as set, even
when width adjustments are made.
H Note:
The position of Gate B can be linked to Gate As
starting point (using the START MODE function
located in the GATEMODE submenu). In this case,
Gate Bs GATE START position is measured from
Gate As starting point. This facilitates multi-echo
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 3-2Gate position and width can be adjusted as shown here.

Issue 04, 05/04
3-5
FIGURE 3-2Gate position and width can be adjusted as shown here.

Issue 04, 05/04
3-5
measurement. See section 3.5 to display the gate-togate thickness measurement, SBA.
Increasing and decreasing the value of the threshold

moves the gate up and down, respectively.
Adjusting a Gates Width

(GATES-POSITION-GATE WIDTH)
3.1.2 Selecting the Gate Detection Method
Step 1: Activate the POSITION submenu.

Step 2: Select the gate to be positioned using the
GATE SELECT function.
Step 3: Select the GATE WIDTH function and adjust
by turning the Function Knob.
Setting a Gates Threshold (Vertical

Position) (GATES-POSITION-GATE
THRESHOLD)

Method
Step 1: Activate the GATE MODE submenu (located in

the GATES Menu).

Step 3: Select the GATE THRESHOLD function and
adjust the vertical height by turning the Function Knob.
3-6
A-Scan signals crossing the A or B-Gate are evaluated

for the purposes of flaw detection and materialthickness evaluation. When the signal crosses the A or
B-Gate, either the gate-crossing point (flank) of the
signal, or the maximum point (peak) of the signal (in
the specific gate) is used for evaluation purposes. The
DETECTION function allows the user to specify which
A-Scan feature (FLANK or PEAK) is used to evaluate
the signal in each gate. See Figure 3-3.
Step 2: Select the gate to be positioned (A and

B-Gates in the base model USN 58) using the GATE
SELECT function.
Issue 04, 05/04
measurement. See section 3.5 to display the gate-togate thickness measurement, SBA.
Increasing and decreasing the value of the threshold

moves the gate up and down, respectively.
Adjusting a Gates Width

(GATES-POSITION-GATE WIDTH)
3.1.2 Selecting the Gate Detection Method

Step 3: Select the GATE WIDTH function and adjust
by turning the Function Knob.
Setting a Gates Threshold (Vertical

Position) (GATES-POSITION-GATE
THRESHOLD)

Method
Step 1: Activate the GATE MODE submenu (located in

the GATES Menu).

Step 3: Select the GATE THRESHOLD function and
adjust the vertical height by turning the Function Knob.
3-6
A-Scan signals crossing the A or B-Gate are evaluated

for the purposes of flaw detection and materialthickness evaluation. When the signal crosses the A or
B-Gate, either the gate-crossing point (flank) of the
signal, or the maximum point (peak) of the signal (in
the specific gate) is used for evaluation purposes. The
DETECTION function allows the user to specify which
A-Scan feature (FLANK or PEAK) is used to evaluate
the signal in each gate. See Figure 3-3.
Step 2: Select the gate to be positioned (A and

B-Gates in the base model USN 58) using the GATE
SELECT function.
Issue 04, 05/04

FIGURE 3-3Setting Gate
Detection Mode
Issue 04, 05/04
3-7

FIGURE 3-3Setting Gate
Detection Mode
Issue 04, 05/04
3-7
Step 3: Select the DETECTION function and choose

between FLANK and PEAK methods.
thats displayed in the specified gate. To specify the

magnified gate:
Note that the detection method chosen will be reflected

by a small icon. This icon is displayed in the display
box containing the measured reading, and in the
options offered in the READING 1 through 4 function
boxes (see Figure 3-3)
Step 1: Activate the GATEMODE submenu.
3.1.3 Selecting the Gate to be Magnified

Whenever an A-Scan is active, pressing H enlarges
the displayed portion of the A-Scan contained in the
specified gate. This can also be accomplished when
the Test Menu (X) is selected by pressing u below
the MAGNIFY selection. Any of the available gates
may be specified. The width of the magnified gate
determines the level of magnification since the display
is magnified until the gate width equals the full-screen
width. The display will contain the magnified view until
H is pressed again or MAGNIFY is again selected
with the u key.
Step 2: Select the MAGNIFY GATE function and

specify the desired gate.

TTL Outputs
An alarm can be set for each gate. When a gate alarm
is activated, one or more of the following will occur:
An alarm indication light on the front of the
instrument will illuminate
An audible alarm (HORN) will sound
A TTL alarm signal will be output
Pressing u below the MAGNIFY selection (found in

the Test Menu) magnifies the portion of the A-Scan
3-8
Issue 04, 05/04
Step 3: Select the DETECTION function and choose

between FLANK and PEAK methods.
thats displayed in the specified gate. To specify the

magnified gate:
Note that the detection method chosen will be reflected

by a small icon. This icon is displayed in the display
box containing the measured reading, and in the
options offered in the READING 1 through 4 function
boxes (see Figure 3-3)
3.1.3 Selecting the Gate to be Magnified

Whenever an A-Scan is active, pressing H enlarges
the displayed portion of the A-Scan contained in the
the Test Menu (X) is selected by pressing u below
the MAGNIFY selection. Any of the available gates
may be specified. The width of the magnified gate
determines the level of magnification since the display
is magnified until the gate width equals the full-screen
width. The display will contain the magnified view until
H is pressed again or MAGNIFY is again selected
with the u key.


TTL Outputs
An alarm can be set for each gate. When a gate alarm
is activated, one or more of the following will occur:
An alarm indication light on the front of the
instrument will illuminate
An audible alarm (HORN) will sound
A TTL alarm signal will be output
Pressing u below the MAGNIFY selection (found in

the Test Menu) magnifies the portion of the A-Scan
3-8
Issue 04, 05/04
Defining Gate-Alarm Logic

(GATES-ALARMS-LOGIC)
Turning the Audible Alarm On or Off

(GATES-ALARMS-HORN)
Each gates alarm can be triggered under one of two

circumstances. Gate alarms can be set to trigger when
an A-Scan echo crosses the gate or when no echo
crosses the gate. Use the following procedure to
specify GATE LOGIC settings:
When any gates alarm is triggered, an audible horn will

sound. Use the following procedure to turn this horn off
or on:
Step 1: Activate the ALARMS submenu (in the GATES

Menu).
Step 2: Select the gate whose logic you wish to
specify.
Step 3: Select the LOGIC function and choose the
gate-alarm triggering logic:
POSITIVEAn A-Scan signal crosses the gate
NEGATIVENo A-Scan signal crosses the gate
MEASUREAn A-Scan signal crosses the gate
but, in this mode no warning light illuminates
OFFNo alarm will be connected to the selected
gate

Menu).
Step 2: Select the HORN function and turn the audible
alarm ON or OFF.

Lights to Gates and/or Limits
(GATES-TTL OUT-TTL #1,2,3)
Three warning lights appear on the front of the
instrument (see Figure 1-2 for light location). These
lights are labeled 1, 2, 3. Each light corresponds to a
TTL Output, which is in-turn assigned to a gate alarm
or a user-inputted minimum or maximum material
thickness limit. When a gate alarm is triggered, or a
limit is violated, the corresponding TTL is activated.
This produces a TTL output signal to be sent to the
Issue 04, 05/04
3-9
Defining Gate-Alarm Logic

(GATES-ALARMS-LOGIC)
Turning the Audible Alarm On or Off

(GATES-ALARMS-HORN)
Each gates alarm can be triggered under one of two

circumstances. Gate alarms can be set to trigger when
an A-Scan echo crosses the gate or when no echo
crosses the gate. Use the following procedure to
specify GATE LOGIC settings:
When any gates alarm is triggered, an audible horn will

sound. Use the following procedure to turn this horn off
or on:

Menu).
Step 2: Select the gate whose logic you wish to
specify.
Step 3: Select the LOGIC function and choose the
gate-alarm triggering logic:
POSITIVEAn A-Scan signal crosses the gate
NEGATIVENo A-Scan signal crosses the gate
MEASUREAn A-Scan signal crosses the gate
but, in this mode no warning light illuminates
OFFNo alarm will be connected to the selected
gate

Menu).
Step 2: Select the HORN function and turn the audible
alarm ON or OFF.

Lights to Gates and/or Limits
(GATES-TTL OUT-TTL #1,2,3)
Three warning lights appear on the front of the
instrument (see Figure 1-2 for light location). These
lights are labeled 1, 2, 3. Each light corresponds to a
TTL Output, which is in-turn assigned to a gate alarm
or a user-inputted minimum or maximum material
thickness limit. When a gate alarm is triggered, or a
limit is violated, the corresponding TTL is activated.
This produces a TTL output signal to be sent to the
Issue 04, 05/04
3-9

REAL TIME I/O port and causes the matching warning
light to illuminate (except when the GATE LOGIC is set
to MEASURE). Note that these TTL outputs (as well as
all Analog outputs) can also be delayed to facilitate
data sequencing. (see section 7.2) Use the following
procedure to assign each TTL to a gate alarm or limit:
Step 1: Activate the TTL OUT submenu (in the GATES

Menu).
Step 2: Select the TTL (#1, 2, or 3) you wish to assign.
Step 3: Assign each TTL value to one of the following
selections:
A-GATE-selected TTL and alarm light indicate when
A-Gates alarm triggers
B-GATE-selected TTL and alarm light indicate when
B-Gates alarm triggers
LOW LIMIT-selected TTL and alarm light indicate
when material thickness (displayed in the large
reading box) is less than the low limit setting
3-10
HIGH LIMIT-selected TTL and matched alarm light

indicate when material thickness (displayed in the
large reading box) is greater than the high limit
setting
OFF-selected TTL and alarm indication light will not
function

Warning Lights
(GATES-TTL OUT-MODE)
When a TTL output and the corresponding alarm
indication light are activated, the warning may remain
set only as long as the alarm condition exists, or the
alarm may continue to be active for some longer period
of time. Use the following procedure to adjust the TTL
Output Mode:

Menu).
Step 2: Assign the MODE function to one of the
following selections:
Issue 04, 05/04

REAL TIME I/O port and causes the matching warning
light to illuminate (except when the GATE LOGIC is set
to MEASURE). Note that these TTL outputs (as well as
all Analog outputs) can also be delayed to facilitate
data sequencing. (see section 7.2) Use the following
procedure to assign each TTL to a gate alarm or limit:

Menu).
Step 2: Select the TTL (#1, 2, or 3) you wish to assign.
Step 3: Assign each TTL value to one of the following
selections:
A-GATE-selected TTL and alarm light indicate when
A-Gates alarm triggers
B-GATE-selected TTL and alarm light indicate when
B-Gates alarm triggers
LOW LIMIT-selected TTL and alarm light indicate
when material thickness (displayed in the large
reading box) is less than the low limit setting
3-10
HIGH LIMIT-selected TTL and matched alarm light

indicate when material thickness (displayed in the
large reading box) is greater than the high limit
setting
OFF-selected TTL and alarm indication light will not
function

Warning Lights
(GATES-TTL OUT-MODE)
indication light are activated, the warning may remain
set only as long as the alarm condition exists, or the
alarm may continue to be active for some longer period
of time. Use the following procedure to adjust the TTL
Output Mode:

Menu).
Step 2: Assign the MODE function to one of the
following selections:
Issue 04, 05/04
Setting the Minimum and Maximum Material-Thickness Limits
INSTANTANEOUSOne warning signal is tripped

for each instrument cycle. Alarm sounds for as long
as the alarm condition exists
Step 3: Select the AMPLITUDE function by pressing

v next to it. Youll note these two choices:
TIMEDWarning triggered when on the first

instrument cycle in which a violation exists. Warning
continues to signal for 0.25, .5, 1, or 2 seconds after
the first cycle in which the alarm condition no long
exists
LATCHEDWarning signals until reset by either
selecting ALRM RST (in the Test Menu) or by an
external reset via the REAL TIME I/O port.

Measurement
Amplitude values can be expressed in terms of
percentage of screen height (for the highest echo in
the reference gate) or in terms of the dB difference
between the echos peak and the gates threshold level.
To select the amplitude units of measurement
Step 1: Activate the PLSRCR menu by pressing u.
% Screen Height
dB Thresholddisplays amplitude reading as a dB
difference between the echos peak and the gate
threshold (dBtA, or between the echo and the
reference echo when operating in dB REF mode
(dBrA - see section 4.3 to operate in dB REF mode).
Step 4: The AMPLITUDE function selection will effect

the list of available reading values listed in section 3.5.
3.2 Setting the Minimum and

Maximum Material-Thickness
Limits
The user can specify minimum and maximum
expected material-thickness limits. Depending on the
alarm configuration (see 3.1.4 for setting alarms), an
alarm can be triggered anytime a detected thickness
violates these limits.
Step 2: Activate the GAIN submenu by pressing u.

Issue 04, 05/04
3-11
Setting the Minimum and Maximum Material-Thickness Limits
INSTANTANEOUSOne warning signal is tripped

for each instrument cycle. Alarm sounds for as long
as the alarm condition exists
Step 3: Select the AMPLITUDE function by pressing

v next to it. Youll note these two choices:
TIMEDWarning triggered when on the first

instrument cycle in which a violation exists. Warning
continues to signal for 0.25, .5, 1, or 2 seconds after
the first cycle in which the alarm condition no long
exists
LATCHEDWarning signals until reset by either
selecting ALRM RST (in the Test Menu) or by an
external reset via the REAL TIME I/O port.

Measurement
Amplitude values can be expressed in terms of
percentage of screen height (for the highest echo in
the reference gate) or in terms of the dB difference
between the echos peak and the gates threshold level.
To select the amplitude units of measurement
Step 1: Activate the PLSRCR menu by pressing u.
% Screen Height
dB Thresholddisplays amplitude reading as a dB
difference between the echos peak and the gate
threshold (dBtA, or between the echo and the
reference echo when operating in dB REF mode
(dBrA - see section 4.3 to operate in dB REF mode).
Step 4: The AMPLITUDE function selection will effect

the list of available reading values listed in section 3.5.
3.2 Setting the Minimum and

Maximum Material-Thickness
Limits
The user can specify minimum and maximum
expected material-thickness limits. Depending on the
alarm configuration (see 3.1.4 for setting alarms), an
alarm can be triggered anytime a detected thickness
violates these limits.
Step 2: Activate the GAIN submenu by pressing u.

Issue 04, 05/04
3-11

Thickness Limits
(GATES-LIMITS-HIGH OR LOW LIMIT)
The user can specify minimum and maximum materialthickness limits. Anytime a measured material
thickness (displayed in the large reading box) violates
these limits, an alarm and TTL output can be triggered
(See 3.1.4 for setting alarms). To set the expected
minimum and maximum material thickness:
Step 1: Activate the GATES menu.

Step 2: Activate the LIMITS submenu.
Step 3: Select the HIGH LIMIT function and input the
value of the maximum material thickness.
Step 4: Select the LOW LIMIT function and input the
value of the minimum material thickness.
appeared when W was pressed and the display will

remain frozen until W is pressed again. There are
several frozen-display configurations that allow
subsequent A-Scans to be displayed and evaluated
against the frozen A-Scan. The configuration of the
frozen display is determined by the FREEZE MODE
setting. There are four freeze configurations, as shown
in Figure 3-4.
Selecting the Freeze-Mode Action

(BASIC-OPTIONS-FREEZE MODE)
Pressing W freezes the currently displayed A-Scan. To
select the desired configuration of the frozen A-Scan
display:
Step 1: Activate the BASIC menu.

Step 2: Activate the OPTIONS submenu.
Step 3: Select the FREEZE MODE function and
choose from the following selections:
3.3 Setting the Freeze-Mode

Action
Whenever an A-Scan is active, pressing W freezes
the A-Scan display. The active A-Scan will remain as it
3-12
Setting the Freeze-Mode Action
ALLFreezes the currently active A-Scan. No

additional A-Scans are displayed until the display is
unfrozen. (See following NOTE regarding Behind the
Freeze Mode)
Issue 04, 05/04

Thickness Limits
(GATES-LIMITS-HIGH OR LOW LIMIT)
The user can specify minimum and maximum materialthickness limits. Anytime a measured material
thickness (displayed in the large reading box) violates
these limits, an alarm and TTL output can be triggered
(See 3.1.4 for setting alarms). To set the expected
minimum and maximum material thickness:
Step 1: Activate the GATES menu.

Step 2: Activate the LIMITS submenu.
Step 3: Select the HIGH LIMIT function and input the
value of the maximum material thickness.
Step 4: Select the LOW LIMIT function and input the
value of the minimum material thickness.
appeared when W was pressed and the display will

remain frozen until W is pressed again. There are
several frozen-display configurations that allow
subsequent A-Scans to be displayed and evaluated
against the frozen A-Scan. The configuration of the
frozen display is determined by the FREEZE MODE
setting. There are four freeze configurations, as shown
in Figure 3-4.
Selecting the Freeze-Mode Action

(BASIC-OPTIONS-FREEZE MODE)
Pressing W freezes the currently displayed A-Scan. To
select the desired configuration of the frozen A-Scan
display:

Step 2: Activate the OPTIONS submenu.
Step 3: Select the FREEZE MODE function and
choose from the following selections:
3.3 Setting the Freeze-Mode

Action
Whenever an A-Scan is active, pressing W freezes
the A-Scan display. The active A-Scan will remain as it
3-12
ALLFreezes the currently active A-Scan. No

additional A-Scans are displayed until the display is
unfrozen. (See following NOTE regarding Behind the
Freeze Mode)
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 3-4Four different freeze modes are available to allow for alternative viewing of frozen and active A-Scans.
Issue 04, 05/04
3-13
FIGURE 3-4Four different freeze modes are available to allow for alternative viewing of frozen and active A-Scans.
Issue 04, 05/04
3-13

COMPAREFreezes the currently active A-Scan on
the display screen (which is displayed in an
alternate color in the 58L) then displays subsequent
live A-Scans. Frozen A-Scan is cleared by selecting
an alternative FREEZE MODE
PEAK STDThe frozen A-Scan is displayed and
adjusted to match subsequent echoes whenever
higher-amplitude echoes are measured. This has the
effect of building onto the frozen A-Scan whenever
a higher-amplitude echo is encountered.
58R ENVELOPE PEAKThe frozen A-Scan is
displayed and adjusted (just as in PEAK STD
mode). Each displayed point remains until another of
greater amplitude occurs. Simultaneously,
subsequent live echoes are also displayed.
58L ENVELOPE (PEAK, .5S, 1S, 2S)The frozen
A-Scan is displayed and adjusted (just as in PEAK
STD) except that the frozen A-Scan persists for the
specified time. Depending on the ENVELOPE mode
(.5S, 1S, 2S) selected, the points in the Frozen
A-Scan are automatically replaced by live readings
at .5, 1, or 2 second intervals. When Envelope
PEAK is selected, each point remains until another
3-14
Using Angle Beam Probes and the TRIG Menu
of greater amplitude occurs. (Simultaneously,

subsequent live echoes are also displayed in the
selected A-Scan color.)
H Note:
Behind the Freeze Mode is a special feature which
allows for limited dynamic time-base adjustment of
frozen echoes. This mode is only available when
FREEZE MODE is set to ALL. In this mode (which is
illustrated in section 4.9) the A-Scan display delay and
range, as well as the gate start, width, and threshold
can all be adjusted after an A-Scan is frozen. Adjusting
these settings will cause the related measurements to
change.
3.4 Using Angle Beam Probes

and the TRIG Menu
When connecting an angle beam probe to the
instrument, adjustments must be made for probe
characteristics as well as test-piece geometry. These
features are shown in Figure 3-5 and include
Probe Angle
Issue 04, 05/04

COMPAREFreezes the currently active A-Scan on
the display screen (which is displayed in an
alternate color in the 58L) then displays subsequent
live A-Scans. Frozen A-Scan is cleared by selecting
an alternative FREEZE MODE
PEAK STDThe frozen A-Scan is displayed and
adjusted to match subsequent echoes whenever
higher-amplitude echoes are measured. This has the
effect of building onto the frozen A-Scan whenever
a higher-amplitude echo is encountered.
58R ENVELOPE PEAKThe frozen A-Scan is
displayed and adjusted (just as in PEAK STD
mode). Each displayed point remains until another of
greater amplitude occurs. Simultaneously,
subsequent live echoes are also displayed.
58L ENVELOPE (PEAK, .5S, 1S, 2S)The frozen
A-Scan is displayed and adjusted (just as in PEAK
STD) except that the frozen A-Scan persists for the
specified time. Depending on the ENVELOPE mode
(.5S, 1S, 2S) selected, the points in the Frozen
A-Scan are automatically replaced by live readings
at .5, 1, or 2 second intervals. When Envelope
PEAK is selected, each point remains until another
3-14
of greater amplitude occurs. (Simultaneously,

subsequent live echoes are also displayed in the
selected A-Scan color.)
H Note:
Behind the Freeze Mode is a special feature which
FREEZE MODE is set to ALL. In this mode (which is
illustrated in section 4.9) the A-Scan display delay and
range, as well as the gate start, width, and threshold
can all be adjusted after an A-Scan is frozen. Adjusting
change.
3.4 Using Angle Beam Probes

and the TRIG Menu
When connecting an angle beam probe to the
instrument, adjustments must be made for probe
characteristics as well as test-piece geometry. These
features are shown in Figure 3-5 and include
Probe Angle
Issue 04, 05/04

Probes X value (distance from the probes Beam
Index Point (BIP) to the front edge of its wedge.)
Certain test-piece features must also be input when
conducting angle beam probe measurements, including
Material Thickness
Outside Diameter for Curved Test Pieces (set to
infinity for flat test pieces)

Characteristics
To configure the instrument for an angle-beam probe,
follow this procedure
Step 1: Activate the Setup submenu located in the

TRIG menu. To access the TRIG menu, press h
then select NEXT two times by pressing u.
Step 2: Select the PROBE ANGLE function and input
the angle for the probe youve installed.
Step 3: Select the THICKNESS function and input the
thickness of the test piece.
FIGURE 3-5Angle Beam Flaw Detection
Issue 04, 05/04
3-15

Probes X value (distance from the probes Beam
Index Point (BIP) to the front edge of its wedge.)
Certain test-piece features must also be input when
conducting angle beam probe measurements, including
Material Thickness
Outside Diameter for Curved Test Pieces (set to
infinity for flat test pieces)

Characteristics
To configure the instrument for an angle-beam probe,
Step 1: Activate the Setup submenu located in the

TRIG menu. To access the TRIG menu, press h
then select NEXT two times by pressing u.
Step 2: Select the PROBE ANGLE function and input
the angle for the probe youve installed.
Step 3: Select the THICKNESS function and input the
thickness of the test piece.
FIGURE 3-5Angle Beam Flaw Detection
Issue 04, 05/04
3-15
Displaying Measured Readings
Step 4: Select the X VALUE function and input the

user-determined X value for the probe. When desired,
this compensates for the distance from the BIP to the
front of the probes wedge.
When set to A-SCAN (meaning the leg-indicating color

is applied to the A-Scan itself, and not the background)
the following requirements must be met before the
COLOR LEG function will operate:
Step 5: Select the O-DIAMETER function and input

the outside diameter of a curved test piece (when
using angle beam probes only). Note that this value
should be set to FLAT when evaluating flat
(non-curved) test pieces. Also, note that when
O-DIAMETER is set to any value other then FLAT, the
d will appear in the icon bar near the top right-hand
corner of the instrument display. If the defined
geometry is outside of the instruments curved testpiece capability, the d will be displayed.
Start mode of Gates A and B must be set to IP
3.4.2 Indicating Leg with Color (58L)

The leg in which a reflector is encountered, as
identified in Figure 3-5, can be visually indicated on the
instrument display using color. Setting the COLOR
LEG function (located in the COLORING submenu of
the TRIG menu) to either ASCAN or GRID will cause
each ultrasonic leg to be displayed in a unique color.
Display Start mode must be set to IP

Freeze mode must be set to ALL or PEAK
A-Scan Enhance must be set to NONE or
BASELINE BREAK
3.5 Displaying Measured

Readings
The USN 58 is capable of displaying up to four
measured readings at one time. Parameters available
for display include the following (availability depends
on instrument configuration and operating mode):
A%AAmplitude (as a % of full-screen height) of
the highest echo to cross A-Gate
A%BAmplitude (as a % of full-screen height) of
the highest echo to cross B-Gate
3-16
Issue 04, 05/04
Step 4: Select the X VALUE function and input the

user-determined X value for the probe. When desired,
this compensates for the distance from the BIP to the
front of the probes wedge.
When set to A-SCAN (meaning the leg-indicating color

is applied to the A-Scan itself, and not the background)
the following requirements must be met before the
COLOR LEG function will operate:
Step 5: Select the O-DIAMETER function and input

the outside diameter of a curved test piece (when
using angle beam probes only). Note that this value
should be set to FLAT when evaluating flat
(non-curved) test pieces. Also, note that when
O-DIAMETER is set to any value other then FLAT, the
d will appear in the icon bar near the top right-hand
corner of the instrument display. If the defined
geometry is outside of the instruments curved testpiece capability, the d will be displayed.
Start mode of Gates A and B must be set to IP
3.4.2 Indicating Leg with Color (58L)

The leg in which a reflector is encountered, as
identified in Figure 3-5, can be visually indicated on the
instrument display using color. Setting the COLOR
LEG function (located in the COLORING submenu of
the TRIG menu) to either ASCAN or GRID will cause
each ultrasonic leg to be displayed in a unique color.
Display Start mode must be set to IP

Freeze mode must be set to ALL or PEAK
A-Scan Enhance must be set to NONE or
BASELINE BREAK
3.5 Displaying Measured

Readings
measured readings at one time. Parameters available
for display include the following (availability depends
on instrument configuration and operating mode):
A%AAmplitude (as a % of full-screen height) of
the highest echo to cross A-Gate
A%BAmplitude (as a % of full-screen height) of
the highest echo to cross B-Gate
3-16
Issue 04, 05/04
dBtAdB difference between the height of A-Gate

and the height of the highest echo in A-Gate.
(available when AMPLITUDE is set to dB
THRESHOLD)
SASound-Path distance or duration represented

by the highest echo to cross A-Gate
dBtBdB difference between the height of B-Gate

and the height of the highest echo in B-Gate.
(available when AMPLITUDE is set to dB THRESHOLD)
dBrAdB difference between the reference echo the
height of the highest echo in A-Gate. (available when
AMPLITUDE is set to dB THRESHOLD and dB REF
is ON)
dBrBdB difference between the reference echo
(available when AMPLITUDE is set to dB THRESHOLD and dB REF is ON)
Note that when S, D, P, or R readings are displayed,

the Gate-Detection Mode (3.1.2) setting for the
referenced gate (A or B) is indicated by a ^ (Peak
Mode) or a / (Flank Mode).
SBSound-Path distance or duration represented

by the highest echo to cross B-Gate
SBASound-Path distance or duration from the
highest echo in A-Gate to the echo in B-Gate.
Reading is only available if B-Gate and A-Gate are
on.
DAMaterial-thickness depth from the test-piece
surface (the probe-contacted side) to the reflector
represented by the echo in A-Gate. (see Figure 3-5)
DBMaterial-thickness depth from the test-piece
represented by the echo in B-Gate. (see Figure 3-5)
DBAMaterial-thickness depth from the reflector
represented by the echo in A-Gate to the one
represented by the echo in B-Gate.
PAProjection distance from the probes BIP to the
reflector represented by the echo in A-Gate. (see
Figure 3-5)
Issue 04, 05/04
3-17
dBtAdB difference between the height of A-Gate

and the height of the highest echo in A-Gate.
(available when AMPLITUDE is set to dB
THRESHOLD)
SASound-Path distance or duration represented

by the highest echo to cross A-Gate
dBtBdB difference between the height of B-Gate

(available when AMPLITUDE is set to dB THRESHOLD)
dBrAdB difference between the reference echo the
height of the highest echo in A-Gate. (available when
AMPLITUDE is set to dB THRESHOLD and dB REF
is ON)
(available when AMPLITUDE is set to dB THRESHOLD and dB REF is ON)
Note that when S, D, P, or R readings are displayed,

the Gate-Detection Mode (3.1.2) setting for the
referenced gate (A or B) is indicated by a ^ (Peak
Mode) or a / (Flank Mode).
SBSound-Path distance or duration represented

by the highest echo to cross B-Gate
SBASound-Path distance or duration from the
highest echo in A-Gate to the echo in B-Gate.
Reading is only available if B-Gate and A-Gate are
on.
DAMaterial-thickness depth from the test-piece
represented by the echo in A-Gate. (see Figure 3-5)
DBMaterial-thickness depth from the test-piece
represented by the echo in B-Gate. (see Figure 3-5)
DBAMaterial-thickness depth from the reflector
PAProjection distance from the probes BIP to the
reflector represented by the echo in A-Gate. (see
Figure 3-5)
Issue 04, 05/04
3-17
PBProjection distance from the probes BIP to the

reflector represented by the echo in B-Gate. (see
Figure 3-5)
LBAIndicates the number of legs between the

reflector represented by the echo in A-Gate and the
one represented by the echo in B-Gate.
PBAProjection distance from the reflector

OFFNo reading will be displayed in the reading

box.
RAProjection distance from the probes BIP to the

reflector represented by the echo in A-Gate, minus
the inputted X-VALUE. (see Figure 3-5)
RBProjection distance from the probes BIP to the
reflector represented by the echo in B-Gate, minus
RBAProjection distance from the reflector
represented by the echo in B-Gate, minus the
inputted X-VALUE.
LALeg Indicator identifies on which leg the
reflector represented by the echo in A-Gate was
detected (Legs 1 through 5). (see Figure 3-5)
LBLeg Indicator identifies on which leg the
reflector represented by the echo in B-Gate was
3-18
The four measured readings can be displayed in any of

the four small reading boxes at the top of the display
screen. In addition, the result displayed in one of the
four small boxes can be shown in the large reading box
(see Figure 3-6). Also note that when time or thickness
readings are displayed, the detection method selected
for that gate is indicated with a ^ (representing PEAK)
or / (representing FLANK). See 3.1.2 to select
detection methods.

Displayed Reading Boxes
(BASIC-RESULTS-READING #)
The display includes a total of five boxes where
measured values can be displayed. Four small
reading boxes can each contain one of four measured
Issue 04, 05/04
PBProjection distance from the probes BIP to the

reflector represented by the echo in B-Gate. (see
Figure 3-5)
LBAIndicates the number of legs between the

reflector represented by the echo in A-Gate and the
one represented by the echo in B-Gate.
PBAProjection distance from the reflector

OFFNo reading will be displayed in the reading

box.
RAProjection distance from the probes BIP to the

reflector represented by the echo in A-Gate, minus
RBProjection distance from the probes BIP to the
reflector represented by the echo in B-Gate, minus
RBAProjection distance from the reflector
represented by the echo in B-Gate, minus the
inputted X-VALUE.
LALeg Indicator identifies on which leg the
reflector represented by the echo in A-Gate was
LBLeg Indicator identifies on which leg the
reflector represented by the echo in B-Gate was
3-18
The four measured readings can be displayed in any of

the four small reading boxes at the top of the display
screen. In addition, the result displayed in one of the
four small boxes can be shown in the large reading box
(see Figure 3-6). Also note that when time or thickness
readings are displayed, the detection method selected
for that gate is indicated with a ^ (representing PEAK)
or / (representing FLANK). See 3.1.2 to select
detection methods.

Displayed Reading Boxes
(BASIC-RESULTS-READING #)
The display includes a total of five boxes where
measured values can be displayed. Four small
reading boxes can each contain one of four measured
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 3-6The RESULTS submenu is used to specify which measured values to display.
Issue 04, 05/04
3-19
FIGURE 3-6The RESULTS submenu is used to specify which measured values to display.
Issue 04, 05/04
3-19

values. A large reading box can display, in a larger
format, any one of the values shown in the small
boxes. To define the reading-box contents:
Saving the Instrument Configuration in a Data Set
H Note:
Only thickness measurements contained in the large
display box can be stored in data logger files.

Step 2: Select the RESULTS submenu.
Step 3: Select the READING box location you wish to
specify and choose from several of the selections
listed above (available readings depend on designated
operating mode):
H Note:
Under certain conditions (when a DGS reference echo
is stored, while TCG reference points are being
recorded, or when AWS MODE is ON) two
measurement result boxes will be automatically set (if
not already configured) to display SA and A%A values.
These result selections will remain locked until the
DGS reference is deleted, the TCG recording process
is finished, or AWS MODE is turned OFF.
Step 4: The large display box is modified from the

TEST menu. Access the Test menu by pressing X,
then press u below the LRG DISP selection until the
large reading box contains the desired value.
3-20
3.6 Saving the Instrument

Configuration in a Data Set
Instrument settings can be stored as Data Sets. Those
functional settings that are saved within a data set are
shown in Table 5.1. When a stored data set is later
recalled, all active functional settings are replaced with
those settings contained in the data set, and the
stored A-Scan is displayed and frozen on the display
screen (if stored with data set). Once a data set is
recalled, the newly active functional settings may be
modified. Anytime that data set is recalled, the
functional settings will be returned to their initially
stored values. The operating parameters of a stored
data set can be modified after recalling the data set by
selecting SAVE EDITS in the ACTION function, then
following the on-screen instructions.
See section 5.1.2 to create a data set file.
Issue 04, 05/04

values. A large reading box can display, in a larger
format, any one of the values shown in the small
boxes. To define the reading-box contents:
Saving the Instrument Configuration in a Data Set
H Note:
Only thickness measurements contained in the large
display box can be stored in data logger files.

Step 2: Select the RESULTS submenu.
Step 3: Select the READING box location you wish to
specify and choose from several of the selections
listed above (available readings depend on designated
operating mode):
H Note:
Under certain conditions (when a DGS reference echo
is stored, while TCG reference points are being
recorded, or when AWS MODE is ON) two
measurement result boxes will be automatically set (if
DGS reference is deleted, the TCG recording process
is finished, or AWS MODE is turned OFF.
Step 4: The large display box is modified from the

TEST menu. Access the Test menu by pressing X,
then press u below the LRG DISP selection until the
large reading box contains the desired value.
3-20
3.6 Saving the Instrument

Configuration in a Data Set
Instrument settings can be stored as Data Sets. Those
functional settings that are saved within a data set are
shown in Table 5.1. When a stored data set is later
recalled, all active functional settings are replaced with
those settings contained in the data set, and the
stored A-Scan is displayed and frozen on the display
screen (if stored with data set). Once a data set is
recalled, the newly active functional settings may be
modified. Anytime that data set is recalled, the
functional settings will be returned to their initially
stored values. The operating parameters of a stored
data set can be modified after recalling the data set by
selecting SAVE EDITS in the ACTION function, then
following the on-screen instructions.
See section 5.1.2 to create a data set file.
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Master Lock Function to Prevent Setting Adjustment
3.7 Using the Master Lock (all

models) Function or the Lock
Key (58L) to Prevent
Adjustment

Knobs
To prevent modification of settings (except for the Gain

Knob), the instrument may be locked using the
MASTER LOCK function. Alternatively, pressing
(58L only) prevents modifications of settings and
disables the gain knob. When the instrument is locked,
the x will appear in the upper left corner of the display
screen. To lock the instrument (except for the Gain
Knob):
Step 1: Activate the Options submenu (located in the

BASIC Menu).
Step 2: Select the MASTER LOCK function by
pressing v.
Step 3: Turning the MASTER LOCK ON will cause the
x to appear in the upper right corner of the display
screen and will prevent further adjustment of most
instrument settings. Setting this function to OFF will
unlock the instrument.
The gain and function knobs can be locked so that

turning either knob has no effect on the instrument.
This feature operates independently of the instruments
Master Lock and x (on the 58L) and does not prevent
adjustment of function values as long as those
changes are made by pressing a function key (v). To
lock the gain and function knobs:
Step 1: Activate the TEST MENU by pressing X.

Step 2: Press u below the selection titled dB STEP.
Step 3: Continue pressing u while observing that the
value of dB STEP (in the upper left-hand corner of the
display) changes to various step values. When the
word LOCK appears as the dB STEP value, the gain
and function knobs are locked.
Step 4: To unlock the knobs, change the setting of dB
STEP to some value other than LOCK.
Issue 04, 05/04
3-21
Using the Master Lock Function to Prevent Setting Adjustment
3.7 Using the Master Lock (all

models) Function or the Lock
Key (58L) to Prevent
Adjustment

Knobs
To prevent modification of settings (except for the Gain

Knob), the instrument may be locked using the
MASTER LOCK function. Alternatively, pressing
(58L only) prevents modifications of settings and
disables the gain knob. When the instrument is locked,
the x will appear in the upper left corner of the display
screen. To lock the instrument (except for the Gain
Knob):
Step 1: Activate the Options submenu (located in the

BASIC Menu).
Step 2: Select the MASTER LOCK function by
pressing v.
Step 3: Turning the MASTER LOCK ON will cause the
x to appear in the upper right corner of the display
screen and will prevent further adjustment of most
instrument settings. Setting this function to OFF will
unlock the instrument.
The gain and function knobs can be locked so that

turning either knob has no effect on the instrument.
This feature operates independently of the instruments
Master Lock and x (on the 58L) and does not prevent
adjustment of function values as long as those
changes are made by pressing a function key (v). To
lock the gain and function knobs:
Step 1: Activate the TEST MENU by pressing X.

Step 2: Press u below the selection titled dB STEP.
Step 3: Continue pressing u while observing that the
value of dB STEP (in the upper left-hand corner of the
display) changes to various step values. When the
word LOCK appears as the dB STEP value, the gain
and function knobs are locked.
Step 4: To unlock the knobs, change the setting of dB
STEP to some value other than LOCK.
Issue 04, 05/04
3-21
3-22
Issue 04, 05/04
3-22
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
Issue 04, 05/04
4-1
Using the Test Menu
Issue 04, 05/04
4-1
Using the Test Menu
Accessing the TEST Menu
This chapter explains how to use the features found in

your instruments Test Menu, how to freeze a displayed
A-Scan, and how to access the Help Screens. Youll
also learn how to use the full range of gainadjustments. In this chapter, youll learn how to
FREEZE and unfreeze the A-Scan and work in the

Behind the Freeze Mode (section 4.9)
Access the Test Menu (section 4.1)
4.1 Accessing the TEST Menu
Adjust the A-Scan gain using the Gain Knob and the
dB STEP feature (section 4.2)
Use the dB REFERENCE feature (section 4.3)
Change the displayed VIEW (section 4.4)
Navigate through an active data logger file and
attach NOTES to thickness measurements (section
4.5)
MAGNIFY the contents of a selected gate (section
4.6)
Reset latched alarms (section 4.7)
Access the instruments HELP SCREENS (section

4.10)
The Test Menu contains six features which are directly

controlled with the six Menu Keys arranged under the
display screen. To access the Test Menu from
anywhere else in the menu system, press X. The
display will appear as shown in Figure 4-1 (if the probe
is coupled to a test piece) with one possible exception.
The function bar displayed when X is pressed will
continue to be displayed together with the Test Menu.
Pressing X when the Test Menu is displayed will
change the menu bar to the grid markers. Another
press will place display delay and range values under
the A-Scan while a fourth press returns the display to
the menu location from which it originated.
Select the value to view in the LARGE DISPLAY

box (section 4.8)
4-2
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
This chapter explains how to use the features found in

your instruments Test Menu, how to freeze a displayed
A-Scan, and how to access the Help Screens. Youll
also learn how to use the full range of gainadjustments. In this chapter, youll learn how to
FREEZE and unfreeze the A-Scan and work in the

Behind the Freeze Mode (section 4.9)
Access the Test Menu (section 4.1)
4.1 Accessing the TEST Menu
Adjust the A-Scan gain using the Gain Knob and the
dB STEP feature (section 4.2)
Use the dB REFERENCE feature (section 4.3)
Change the displayed VIEW (section 4.4)
Navigate through an active data logger file and
attach NOTES to thickness measurements (section
4.5)
MAGNIFY the contents of a selected gate (section
4.6)
Reset latched alarms (section 4.7)
Access the instruments HELP SCREENS (section

4.10)
The Test Menu contains six features which are directly

controlled with the six Menu Keys arranged under the
display screen. To access the Test Menu from
anywhere else in the menu system, press X. The
display will appear as shown in Figure 4-1 (if the probe
is coupled to a test piece) with one possible exception.
The function bar displayed when X is pressed will
continue to be displayed together with the Test Menu.
Pressing X when the Test Menu is displayed will
change the menu bar to the grid markers. Another
press will place display delay and range values under
the A-Scan while a fourth press returns the display to
the menu location from which it originated.
Select the value to view in the LARGE DISPLAY

box (section 4.8)
4-2
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
FIGURE 4-1The Test Menu includes these menu-key controlled features as well as whichever four functions were
active when X was pressed. While the placement of some keys vary, all USN 58 series instruments display the same
test menu.
Issue 04, 05/04
4-3
Using the Test Menu
FIGURE 4-1The Test Menu includes these menu-key controlled features as well as whichever four functions were
active when X was pressed. While the placement of some keys vary, all USN 58 series instruments display the same
test menu.
Issue 04, 05/04
4-3
Using the Test Menu
Setting the Gain
4.2 Setting the Gain

Instrument gain, which increases and decreases the
height of a displayed A-Scan, is adjusted with the Gain
Knob as shown in Figure 4-2. The instruments gain can
be adjusted while in any menu location except when
the dB STEP feature is set to LOCK. Note that the
MASTER LOCK function, which causesx to appear in
the icon bar, does not prevent gain adjustment.

Increment (dB STEP)
When adjusting the A-Scan gain, each click of the
gain-adjustment knob increases or decreases the gain
level by a dB increment equal to the dB STEP. Several
values can be specified for dB STEP, including a userspecified gain step, known as the USER GAIN STEP,
and a gain Function knob adjustment LOCK, which
prevents any gain adjustment and any changes using
the Function knob. To select one of the existing dB
STEP values:
4-4
Step 1: Activate the TEST MENU by pressing X and

proceed to Step 2 or press V and immediately
proceed to Step 3.
Step 2: Press u below the feature titled dB STEP.
Step 3: Note that the dB STEP (gain-adjustment
increment) value, as labeled in Figure 4-2, changes as
you continue to push u. Available increments include:
0.1 dB, 0.5 dB, 1.0 dB, 2.0 dB, 6 dB, a user-defined
Gain Step (if one has been defined), and LOCK. To
specify a user-defined dB STEP value, see the next
manual procedure. Note that setting the dB STEP to
LOCK prevents adjustment of the instrument gain and
prevents any changes using the Function knob. Also
note that the dB STEP setting can be changed from
the GAIN submenu found in the PLSRCVR menu.
Step 4: Once a dB STEP value has been selected,
each click of the Gain Knob will increase or decrease
the instruments gain by the dB STEP increment.
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
Setting the Gain
4.2 Setting the Gain

Instrument gain, which increases and decreases the
height of a displayed A-Scan, is adjusted with the Gain
Knob as shown in Figure 4-2. The instruments gain can
be adjusted while in any menu location except when
the dB STEP feature is set to LOCK. Note that the
MASTER LOCK function, which causesx to appear in
the icon bar, does not prevent gain adjustment.

Increment (dB STEP)
level by a dB increment equal to the dB STEP. Several
values can be specified for dB STEP, including a userspecified gain step, known as the USER GAIN STEP,
and a gain Function knob adjustment LOCK, which
prevents any gain adjustment and any changes using
the Function knob. To select one of the existing dB
STEP values:
4-4
Step 1: Activate the TEST MENU by pressing X and

proceed to Step 2 or press V and immediately
proceed to Step 3.
Step 2: Press u below the feature titled dB STEP.
Step 3: Note that the dB STEP (gain-adjustment
increment) value, as labeled in Figure 4-2, changes as
you continue to push u. Available increments include:
0.1 dB, 0.5 dB, 1.0 dB, 2.0 dB, 6 dB, a user-defined
Gain Step (if one has been defined), and LOCK. To
specify a user-defined dB STEP value, see the next
manual procedure. Note that setting the dB STEP to
LOCK prevents adjustment of the instrument gain and
prevents any changes using the Function knob. Also
note that the dB STEP setting can be changed from
the GAIN submenu found in the PLSRCVR menu.
Step 4: Once a dB STEP value has been selected,
each click of the Gain Knob will increase or decrease
the instruments gain by the dB STEP increment.
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
Setting the Gain
FIGURE 4-2Setting instrument gain and the gain adjustment capability

Issue 04, 05/04
4-5
Using the Test Menu
Setting the Gain
FIGURE 4-2Setting instrument gain and the gain adjustment capability
Issue 04, 05/04
4-5
Using the Test Menu
Using the dB Reference Feature
H Note:
Setting dB STEP to LOCK prevents any adjustment
using either the Gain or Function Knob.
4.2.2 Setting the User-Defined Gain Step

(PLSRCVR-GAIN-USER GAIN)
level by the amount of the dB STEP (see above for
adjusting the dB STEP). Several values can be
specified for dB STEP, including a user-specified gain
step, known as USER GAIN STEP. To input a userspecified gain step:
Step 1: Activate the GAIN submenu (located in the

Plsrcvr Menu) by pressing u below it. Four functions
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled USER
GAIN STEP.
4.3 Using the dB Reference

Feature
When dB REF is activated, the amplitude of the
highest echo in A-Gate becomes the reference echo
against which subsequent echo amplitudes are
evaluated. At the time of dB REF activation, the gain
setting also becomes a reference against which
subsequent gain values are compared.
dB REF is activated from the Test Menu by pressing u
below the dBREF selection. Its important to remember
that the highest echo in A-Gate and GAIN setting,
when dB REF is selected, will become the reference
amplitude and gain value for as long as dB REF is
activated. Note that dB REF can also be turned on from
the GAIN Submenu found in the PLSRCVR Menu.
H Note:
The reference echo amplitude must not exceed 100%
of full-screen height.
Step 3: To set the USER GAIN STEP size, continue

4-6
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
H Note:
Setting dB STEP to LOCK prevents any adjustment
using either the Gain or Function Knob.
4.2.2 Setting the User-Defined Gain Step

(PLSRCVR-GAIN-USER GAIN)
level by the amount of the dB STEP (see above for
adjusting the dB STEP). Several values can be
specified for dB STEP, including a user-specified gain
step, known as USER GAIN STEP. To input a userspecified gain step:
Step 1: Activate the GAIN submenu (located in the

Plsrcvr Menu) by pressing u below it. Four functions
Step 2: Press v next to the selection titled USER
GAIN STEP.
4.3 Using the dB Reference

Feature
When dB REF is activated, the amplitude of the
highest echo in A-Gate becomes the reference echo
against which subsequent echo amplitudes are
evaluated. At the time of dB REF activation, the gain
setting also becomes a reference against which
subsequent gain values are compared.
dB REF is activated from the Test Menu by pressing u
below the dBREF selection. Its important to remember
that the highest echo in A-Gate and GAIN setting,
when dB REF is selected, will become the reference
amplitude and gain value for as long as dB REF is
activated. Note that dB REF can also be turned on from
the GAIN Submenu found in the PLSRCVR Menu.
H Note:
The reference echo amplitude must not exceed 100%
of full-screen height.
Step 3: To set the USER GAIN STEP size, continue

4-6
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
FIGURE 4-3dB Ref capabilities

Issue 04, 05/04
4-7
Using the Test Menu
FIGURE 4-3dB Ref capabilities
Issue 04, 05/04
4-7
Using the Test Menu
Changing the Displayed VIEW
Once dB REF is activated, the Gain-Display Block

lists both the Reference Gain and Incremental Gain
4.4 Changing the Displayed VIEW
levels. Also, the
The instrument is capable of displaying an active

A-Scan in three different VIEW modes (Figures 4-4 and
4-5) including:
icon will appear. The Reference
Gain remains constant throughout the dB REF session

while the Incremental Gain value changes as the Gain
Knob is rotated (Figure 4-3).
After dB REF is activated, any amplitude
measurements are stated in relation to the reference
echo amplitude. Available amplitude readings (see
section 3.5 to change display-box reading values)
when operating in dB REF mode are
dBrAdB difference between the reference echo
and the highest echo to cross A-Gate (available
when AMPLITUDE is set to dB THRESHOLD).
Full-screen A-Scan
Half-screen A-Scan with memory and file status in
the lower portion of the display
Half-screen A-Scan with File Navigation Window in
the lower portion of the display (only when a data
logger file is active)
To change the displayed VIEW, activate the Test Menu
and press below the VIEW feature.

and the highest echo to cross B-Gate (available
4-8
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
Once dB REF is activated, the Gain-Display Block

lists both the Reference Gain and Incremental Gain
4.4 Changing the Displayed VIEW
levels. Also, the
The instrument is capable of displaying an active

A-Scan in three different VIEW modes (Figures 4-4 and
4-5) including:
icon will appear. The Reference
Gain remains constant throughout the dB REF session

while the Incremental Gain value changes as the Gain
Knob is rotated (Figure 4-3).
After dB REF is activated, any amplitude
measurements are stated in relation to the reference
echo amplitude. Available amplitude readings (see
section 3.5 to change display-box reading values)
when operating in dB REF mode are
dBrAdB difference between the reference echo
and the highest echo to cross A-Gate (available
Full-screen A-Scan
Half-screen A-Scan with memory and file status in
the lower portion of the display
Half-screen A-Scan with File Navigation Window in
the lower portion of the display (only when a data
logger file is active)
To change the displayed VIEW, activate the Test Menu
and press below the VIEW feature.

and the highest echo to cross B-Gate (available
4-8
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
FIGURE 4-4Three display options are available to allow the user to view an A-Scan while navigating through a data
logger file or examining existing file count and available memory.
Issue 04, 05/04
4-9
Using the Test Menu
FIGURE 4-4Three display options are available to allow the user to view an A-Scan while navigating through a data
logger file or examining existing file count and available memory.
Issue 04, 05/04
4-9
Using the Test Menu
Navigating Through a Data Logger File and Attaching Notes
4.5 Navigating Through a Data

Logger File and Attaching
Notes
Step 4: Follow the navigation instructions and attach

notes as shown in Figure 4-5. Note that all available
notes can be displayed by setting the NOTE ACTION
function to DISPLAY NOTES.
Thickness measurements may be stored in data logger

files (see section 5.1 to create a data logger file). After
a data logger file is created, the user may select
specific file locations, make them active, and store
thickness readings in those locations by pressing C
(see 5.2 to store thickness measurements). The user
may also attach one or more notes to each data logger
file location. To navigate through the file contents of a
data logger file
4.6 Magnifying the Contents of a

Gate
Step 1: Ensure that a data logger file is open by

selecting it with the FILENAME function (in the Files
submenu). (VIEW is not applicable to data set files as
they do not contain thickness measurements.)
Step 2: Activate the Test Menu (or access the DL
DATA Function from the FILES menu).
Whenever an A-Scan is active, presssing H enlarges

the displayed portion of the A-Scan contained in a
the Test Menu (X) is activated, by pressing u below
the MAGNIFY feature. Any available gate may be
specified. The width of the magnified gate determines
the level of magnification. This is because the display
is magnified until the gate width equals 100% fullscreen width. (Figure 4-6) The display will contain the
magnified view until H is pressed a second time or
MAGNIFY is again selected with u.
Step 3: Press u below the VIEW selection.
4-10
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
Navigating Through a Data Logger File and Attaching Notes
4.5 Navigating Through a Data

Logger File and Attaching
Notes
Step 4: Follow the navigation instructions and attach

notes as shown in Figure 4-5. Note that all available
notes can be displayed by setting the NOTE ACTION
function to DISPLAY NOTES.

files (see section 5.1 to create a data logger file). After
a data logger file is created, the user may select
specific file locations, make them active, and store
thickness readings in those locations by pressing C
(see 5.2 to store thickness measurements). The user
may also attach one or more notes to each data logger
file location. To navigate through the file contents of a
data logger file
4.6 Magnifying the Contents of a

Gate
Step 1: Ensure that a data logger file is open by

selecting it with the FILENAME function (in the Files
submenu). (VIEW is not applicable to data set files as
they do not contain thickness measurements.)
Step 2: Activate the Test Menu (or access the DL
DATA Function from the FILES menu).
Whenever an A-Scan is active, presssing H enlarges

the displayed portion of the A-Scan contained in a
the Test Menu (X) is activated, by pressing u below
the MAGNIFY feature. Any available gate may be
specified. The width of the magnified gate determines
the level of magnification. This is because the display
is magnified until the gate width equals 100% fullscreen width. (Figure 4-6) The display will contain the
magnified view until H is pressed a second time or
MAGNIFY is again selected with u.
Step 3: Press u below the VIEW selection.
4-10
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
Magnifying the Contents of a Gate
FIGURE 4-5This display option allows the user to view an A-Scan while navigating through a data logger file. In this
view the contents and attached notes of an active data logger file are visible.
Issue 04, 05/04
4-11
Using the Test Menu
FIGURE 4-5This display option allows the user to view an A-Scan while navigating through a data logger file. In this
view the contents and attached notes of an active data logger file are visible.
Issue 04, 05/04
4-11
Using the Test Menu
FIGURE 4-6The Magnify feature magnifies the A-Scan contents of a gate. The gate to be magnified is selected by
the user.
4-12
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
FIGURE 4-6The Magnify feature magnifies the A-Scan contents of a gate. The gate to be magnified is selected by
the user.
4-12
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
Resetting Latched Alarms
4.8 Large Display Box-Specifying

the Contents (LRG DISP)
Selecting the Gate to Be Magnified

(GATES-GATEMODE-MAGNIFY GATE)
Pressing u below the MAGNIFY selection (whenever
the Test Menu is active) magnifies the portion of the
A-Scan thats displayed in the specified gate. To
specify the magnified gate:

4.7 Resetting Latched Alarms

indication light are activated, and TTL output mode is
set to LATCHED (section 3.1.5) the warning will remain
set until cleared. To clear a latched alarm:
Step 1: Activate the Test Menu.

Step 2: Press u below the ALRM RST selection or
reset the alarm using an external signal via the Real
Time I/O port.

measured readings in the four small reading boxes at
the top of the display screen (see 3.4 to set the small
reading box values). In addition, the result displayed in
one of the four small boxes can be shown in the large
reading box in the top right-hand corner of the display
(see Figure 4-7).
The large display boxs contents are modified from the
TEST menu by pressing u below the LRG DISP
selection until the large reading box contains the
desired value.
H Note:
When so configured, pressing C stores the value in
the Large Display Box in an active data logger file, or
outputs this value via the RS 232 Port. Only thickness
readings (and not amplitude readings) may be stored in
data logger files. Section 5.2 explains how to configure
the C function. The value displayed in the Large
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
Resetting Latched Alarms
4.8 Large Display Box-Specifying

the Contents (LRG DISP)
Selecting the Gate to Be Magnified

(GATES-GATEMODE-MAGNIFY GATE)
Pressing u below the MAGNIFY selection (whenever
the Test Menu is active) magnifies the portion of the
A-Scan thats displayed in the specified gate. To
specify the magnified gate:

4.7 Resetting Latched Alarms

indication light are activated, and TTL output mode is
set to LATCHED (section 3.1.5) the warning will remain
set until cleared. To clear a latched alarm:
Step 1: Activate the Test Menu.

Step 2: Press u below the ALRM RST selection or
reset the alarm using an external signal via the Real
Time I/O port.
4-13

measured readings in the four small reading boxes at
the top of the display screen (see 3.4 to set the small
reading box values). In addition, the result displayed in
one of the four small boxes can be shown in the large
reading box in the top right-hand corner of the display
(see Figure 4-7).
The large display boxs contents are modified from the
TEST menu by pressing u below the LRG DISP
selection until the large reading box contains the
desired value.
H Note:
When so configured, pressing C stores the value in
the Large Display Box in an active data logger file, or
outputs this value via the RS 232 Port. Only thickness
readings (and not amplitude readings) may be stored in
data logger files. Section 5.2 explains how to configure
the C function. The value displayed in the Large
Issue 04, 05/04
4-13
Using the Test Menu
Large Display Box Specifying the Contents (LRG DISP)
FIGURE 4-7Notice that when time or thickness readings (SA, SB, etc.) are displayed, in the small or large display
boxes, the detection method selected for that gate is indicated with a ^ (representing PEAK) or / (representing
FLANK). Available readings are the same for all USN 58 series instruments.
4-14
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
Large Display Box Specifying the Contents (LRG DISP)
FIGURE 4-7Notice that when time or thickness readings (SA, SB, etc.) are displayed, in the small or large display
boxes, the detection method selected for that gate is indicated with a ^ (representing PEAK) or / (representing
FLANK). Available readings are the same for all USN 58 series instruments.
4-14
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
Freezing the A-Scan Display
Display Box is also used for the Smart View A-Scan

Mode selection. (Refer to section 6.3)

Mode
4.9 Freezing the A-Scan Display
Behind the Freeze Mode is a special feature, which

FREEZE MODE is set to ALL. In this mode the AScan display delay and range, as well as the gate
start, width, and threshold can all be adjusted (by a
limited amount) after an A-Scan is frozen. Adjusting
change.
Whenever an A-Scan is active, pressing the freeze key

(W) freezes the A-Scan display. The active A-Scan will
remain as it appeared when W was pressed and the
display will remain frozen until W is pressed again.
There are several frozen-display configurations,
however, that allow subsequent A-Scans to be
displayed and evaluated against the frozen A-Scan
(compare) or that adjust the frozen A-Scan whenever
an active echo is higher in amplitude (PEAK STD). The
configuration of the frozen display is determined by the
FREEZE MODE setting (see section 3.3 to adjust this
setting). There are four freeze configurations, as shown
in Figure 4-8.
While the display is frozen, the displayed readings are
based on the frozen echoes.
Issue 04, 05/04
4-15
Using the Test Menu
Display Box is also used for the Smart View A-Scan

Mode selection. (Refer to section 6.3)

Mode
4.9 Freezing the A-Scan Display
Behind the Freeze Mode is a special feature, which

FREEZE MODE is set to ALL. In this mode the AScan display delay and range, as well as the gate
start, width, and threshold can all be adjusted (by a
limited amount) after an A-Scan is frozen. Adjusting
change.
Whenever an A-Scan is active, pressing the freeze key

(W) freezes the A-Scan display. The active A-Scan will
remain as it appeared when W was pressed and the
display will remain frozen until W is pressed again.
There are several frozen-display configurations,
however, that allow subsequent A-Scans to be
displayed and evaluated against the frozen A-Scan
(compare) or that adjust the frozen A-Scan whenever
an active echo is higher in amplitude (PEAK STD). The
configuration of the frozen display is determined by the
FREEZE MODE setting (see section 3.3 to adjust this
setting). There are four freeze configurations, as shown
in Figure 4-8.
While the display is frozen, the displayed readings are
based on the frozen echoes.
Issue 04, 05/04
4-15
Using the Test Menu
FIGURE 4-8There are four different freeze modes available.

4-16
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
FIGURE 4-8There are four different freeze modes available.

4-16
Issue 04, 05/04
Using the Test Menu
Accessing the HELP SCREENS
4.10 Accessing the HELP

SCREENS
Based on the submenu selected, one or more
functions appear in the function bar. These four
function positions and the function bar are identified in
Figure 4-9. The HELP SCREEN contains a brief
explanation for each displayed function. Press ? to

access the HELP SCREENS for the displayed
functions. The help screen will remain active until ? is
pressed again. Note that selecting another submenu
and changing the displayed functions causes the
help-screen information for the new functions to be
displayed.
FIGURE 4-9 The Help Screen contains a description for each displayed function. The USN 58L Help Screen display
includes the active function bar.
Issue 04, 05/04
4-17
Using the Test Menu
Accessing the HELP SCREENS
4.10 Accessing the HELP

SCREENS
Based on the submenu selected, one or more
functions appear in the function bar. These four
function positions and the function bar are identified in
Figure 4-9. The HELP SCREEN contains a brief
explanation for each displayed function. Press ? to

access the HELP SCREENS for the displayed
functions. The help screen will remain active until ? is
pressed again. Note that selecting another submenu
and changing the displayed functions causes the
help-screen information for the new functions to be
displayed.
FIGURE 4-9 The Help Screen contains a description for each displayed function. The USN 58L Help Screen display
includes the active function bar.
Issue 04, 05/04
4-17
4-18
Issue 04, 05/04
4-18
Issue 04, 05/04
Storing and Outputting Data
Issue 04, 05/04
Issue 04, 05/04
5-1
5-1

Your instrument is equipped with a data-storage
system. A-Scans instrument settings, thickness
readings, and notes can be stored in data files for later
retrieval. Information to be contained in report headers,
as well as short memos may also be included in files.
Files are created, modified, recalled, and deleted by
using the FILES MENU (Figure 5-1).
Store thickness measurements in a data logger file

(section 5.2)
Data logger file contents, along with specified

attachments can be output to a personal computer or
printer. The outputting functions are accessed through
the FILES MENU.
Input REPORT-HEADER information (section 5.6)
Finally, instrument settings can be stored as data sets.

Most functional settings are saved within a data set.
When a stored data set is later recalled, all active
function settings will be modified to match those
contained in the data set. The FILES MENU is used to
create, recall, and delete data sets. (See section 3.5 to
work with data sets).
Specify REPORT Content and print reports (section

5.8)
In this chapter, youll learn how to work with all FILES

MENU functions including:
RECALL and PREVIEW existing files (section 5.3)

Delete (CLEAR) existing files (section 5.4)
Create and attach a MEMO to a Data file (5.5)
Edit NOTES to be attached to stored readings

(section 5.7)
Configure the instrument to output data to a printer

via the RS-232 serial port (section 5.9)
Configure the instrument to output data to a personal
computer via the RS-232 serial port. (section 5.10)
Set the action taken when C is pressed
(section 5.9.1)
CREATE and name new (data logger or data set)

files (section 5.1)
SAVE EDITS to existing files (section 5.1.3)
5-2
Issue 04, 05/04

Your instrument is equipped with a data-storage
system. A-Scans instrument settings, thickness
readings, and notes can be stored in data files for later
retrieval. Information to be contained in report headers,
as well as short memos may also be included in files.
Files are created, modified, recalled, and deleted by
using the FILES MENU (Figure 5-1).
Store thickness measurements in a data logger file

(section 5.2)
Data logger file contents, along with specified

attachments can be output to a personal computer or
printer. The outputting functions are accessed through
the FILES MENU.
Input REPORT-HEADER information (section 5.6)
Finally, instrument settings can be stored as data sets.

Most functional settings are saved within a data set.
When a stored data set is later recalled, all active
function settings will be modified to match those
contained in the data set. The FILES MENU is used to
create, recall, and delete data sets. (See section 3.5 to
work with data sets).
Specify REPORT Content and print reports (section

5.8)
In this chapter, youll learn how to work with all FILES

MENU functions including:
RECALL and PREVIEW existing files (section 5.3)

Delete (CLEAR) existing files (section 5.4)
Create and attach a MEMO to a Data file (5.5)
Edit NOTES to be attached to stored readings

(section 5.7)
Configure the instrument to output data to a printer

via the RS-232 serial port (section 5.9)
Configure the instrument to output data to a personal
computer via the RS-232 serial port. (section 5.10)
Set the action taken when C is pressed
(section 5.9.1)
CREATE and name new (data logger or data set)

files (section 5.1)
SAVE EDITS to existing files (section 5.1.3)
5-2
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 5-1The Files Menu allows access to all data storage, and output functions.
Issue 04, 05/04
5-3
FIGURE 5-1The Files Menu allows access to all data storage, and output functions.
Issue 04, 05/04
5-3
Data Set and Data Logger Files
5.1 Data Set and Data Logger Files
in section 5.1.3. Otherwise, the original file

structure will remain as-saved.
Data set files are used to store a specific instrumentsetup configuration. Instrument settings, and the active
A-Scan, present when the data set file is created are
stored in the file. Table 5-1 lists all settings saved in a
data set file. When the data set file is recalled, all
instrument settings are modified to match the settings
stored in the data set file. However, once a data set file
is opened, instrument settings may be modified from
their data-set-file configurations. However, these
changes will only affect the data set file if
additional actions are taken to do so as described
Data logger files are used to store thickness

measurements, along with the same instrument
settings stored in data set files (Table 5-2). Data logger
files can be arranged into one of three file types:
LINEAR (a series of 1 to 99,999 consecutive data
points), GRID (a matrix of data points up to 701 x 701),
or CUSTOM LINEAR (up to 999 data points stored in
up to 9,999 locations). After a data logger file is
created, thickness data can be stored, erased, and
modified in that file.
5-4
Issue 04, 05/04
5.1 Data Set and Data Logger Files
in section 5.1.3. Otherwise, the original file

structure will remain as-saved.
Data set files are used to store a specific instrumentsetup configuration. Instrument settings, and the active
A-Scan, present when the data set file is created are
stored in the file. Table 5-1 lists all settings saved in a
data set file. When the data set file is recalled, all
instrument settings are modified to match the settings
stored in the data set file. However, once a data set file
is opened, instrument settings may be modified from
their data-set-file configurations. However, these
changes will only affect the data set file if
additional actions are taken to do so as described
Data logger files are used to store thickness

measurements, along with the same instrument
settings stored in data set files (Table 5-2). Data logger
files can be arranged into one of three file types:
LINEAR (a series of 1 to 99,999 consecutive data
points), GRID (a matrix of data points up to 701 x 701),
or CUSTOM LINEAR (up to 999 data points stored in
up to 9,999 locations). After a data logger file is
created, thickness data can be stored, erased, and
modified in that file.
5-4
Issue 04, 05/04
Table 5-1
Data Set File Settings
A Detection Mode
B Start
DGS Reference Amp
Noise Window #1
Report Header
A Logi c
A Start
A Start Mode
B Start Mode
B Threshold
B Width
DGS Reference Gain IF Start

DGS Reference Type IF Start Mode
DGS Test Attenuation IF Threshold
IF Offset
Noise Window #2
Noise Window #3
Note Action
Selected Gate
TCG Curve Display
TCG Gain Points
A Threshold
BW Attenuator Gain
DGS Transfer Loss
IF Width
Notes
TCG Time Points
A Width
BW Attenuator Mode
DGS Xtal Diam
Large Display Index
# of TCG Points
TCG Mode
Alarm Mode
Color Leg (58L)
DGS Xtal Frequency
LOS
Outer Diameter
TCG Record Mode
Alarm Selected
Damping
Display Delay
Magnification State
Output Delay
TCG Ref Amp
Amplitude Mode
Ascan Enhance
Ascan Mode
DB Ref Gain
DB Ref Mode
Delay Mode
Display Start
Dual Mode
Energy
Magnify Gate
Manual PRF Value
Master Lock
PRF Mode
Probe Angle
Probe Delay
TCG Start Mode

Trig Thickness
Trig X Value
AutoCal Thick Ref
DGS Amp Correction File MultiStore
Material
Range
TTL#1 Assignment
AutoCal Thin Ref
DGS Curve
Maximum Alarm
Reading Index #1
TTL#2 Assignment
Frequency
AWS Attenuation
DGS Delay Velocity
Gain Step
Memo
Reading Index #2
TTL#3 Assignment
AWS Indication
DGS Eval Result
Grid Type
Menu Gain
Reading Index #3
Units
AWS Mode
AWS Rating
AWS Reference
DGS Mode
DGS Probe
DGS Ref Attenuation
High Speed Out

Horn
IF Delay Mode
Minimum Alarm
Noise Count #1
Noise Count #2
Reading Index #4
Rectification Mode
Reject
User Gain Step

Velocity
Water Path Velocity
B Detection Mode
DGS Ref Recorded
IF Detection Mode
Noise Count #3
Rep Rate
B Logi c
DGS Ref Size
IF Logic
Issue 04, 05/04
5-5
Table 5-1
Data Set File Settings
A Detection Mode
B Start
DGS Reference Amp
Noise Window #1
Report Header
A Logi c
A Start
A Start Mode
B Start Mode
B Threshold
B Width
DGS Reference Gain IF Start

DGS Reference Type IF Start Mode
DGS Test Attenuation IF Threshold
IF Offset
Noise Window #2
Noise Window #3
Note Action
Selected Gate
TCG Curve Display
TCG Gain Points
A Threshold
BW Attenuator Gain
DGS Transfer Loss
IF Width
Notes
TCG Time Points
A Width
BW Attenuator Mode
DGS Xtal Diam
Large Display Index
# of TCG Points
TCG Mode
Alarm Mode
Color Leg (58L)
DGS Xtal Frequency
LOS
Outer Diameter
TCG Record Mode
Alarm Selected
Damping
Display Delay
Magnification State
Output Delay
TCG Ref Amp
Amplitude Mode
Ascan Enhance
Ascan Mode
DB Ref Gain
DB Ref Mode
Delay Mode
Display Start
Dual Mode
Energy
Magnify Gate
Manual PRF Value
Master Lock
PRF Mode
Probe Angle
Probe Delay
TCG Start Mode

Trig Thickness
Trig X Value
AutoCal Thick Ref
DGS Amp Correction File MultiStore
Material
Range
TTL#1 Assignment
AutoCal Thin Ref
DGS Curve
Frequency
Maximum Alarm
Reading Index #1
TTL#2 Assignment
AWS Attenuation
DGS Delay Velocity
Gain Step
Memo
Reading Index #2
TTL#3 Assignment
AWS Indication
DGS Eval Result
Grid Type
Menu Gain
Reading Index #3
Units
AWS Mode
AWS Rating
AWS Reference
DGS Mode
DGS Probe
DGS Ref Attenuation
High Speed Out

Horn
IF Delay Mode
Minimum Alarm
Noise Count #1
Noise Count #2
Reading Index #4
Rectification Mode
Reject
User Gain Step

Velocity
Water Path Velocity
B Detection Mode
DGS Ref Recorded
IF Detection Mode
Noise Count #3
Rep Rate
B Logi c
DGS Ref Size
IF Logic
Issue 04, 05/04
5-5
USN 58s Text-Entry feature (see description in

Figure 5-2).
Table 5-2
Data Logger File C ontents
All parameter settings saved in data set files

(Refer to Table 5-1)
Stored Thickness Measurements

Location Indications for each thickness measurement
Note Tags attached to thickness measurements
Memo attached to the file
File's report header
Step 4: Do not select a file type (LINEAR, GRID,

CUSTOM LINEAR) as these only apply to data logger
files which contain stored thickness measurements
(see section 5.1.2 to create data logger files).
Step 5: Once the desired file name is entered on the
screen, press v next to STORE. The instruments
settings have been saved in the data set file.
H Note:
The newly created file name automatically becomes
the default file name. This default name with increment
by 1 the next time a new file is created (i.e. after the
file name GRIDz is entered, the next default file name
will be GRIDz1.)
5.1.1 Creating Data Set Files

To store instrument settings in a new data-set file
Step 1: Activate the FILES MENU.

Step 2: With the FILENAME submenu selected, press
(two times) v next to the CREATE NEW function.
Step 3: Note that the bottom of the display screen
contains a default file name (the word FILE followed
by a numeral). This name can be adjusted using the
5-6
5.1.2 Creating Data Logger Files

To store thickness readings and instrument settings in a
new data logger file follow this procedure (Figure 5-3).
Step 1: Activate the FILES MENU (located in the

HOME MENU).
Issue 04, 05/04
USN 58s Text-Entry feature (see description in

Figure 5-2).
Table 5-2
Data Logger File C ontents
All parameter settings saved in data set files

(Refer to Table 5-1)
Stored Thickness Measurements

Location Indications for each thickness measurement
Note Tags attached to thickness measurements
Memo attached to the file
File's report header
Step 4: Do not select a file type (LINEAR, GRID,

CUSTOM LINEAR) as these only apply to data logger
files which contain stored thickness measurements
(see section 5.1.2 to create data logger files).
Step 5: Once the desired file name is entered on the
screen, press v next to STORE. The instruments
settings have been saved in the data set file.
H Note:
will be GRIDz1.)
5.1.1 Creating Data Set Files

To store instrument settings in a new data-set file

5-6
5.1.2 Creating Data Logger Files

To store thickness readings and instrument settings in a
new data logger file follow this procedure (Figure 5-3).
Step 1: Activate the FILES MENU (located in the

HOME MENU).
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 5-2The Text-Entry display allows you to quickly enter or edit file names, notes, report headers, memos, and
other alphanumeric labels.
Issue 04, 05/04
5-7
FIGURE 5-2The Text-Entry display allows you to quickly enter or edit file names, notes, report headers, memos, and
other alphanumeric labels.
Issue 04, 05/04
5-7

USN 58s Text-Entry display (see description in
Figure 5-2).
Step 4: Select a file type by pressing v next to the
desired type:
Step 6: Once the desired file name and characteristics

are entered, press v next to STORE. The data logger
file has been created.
H Note:
LINEARcontains up to 99,999 consecutive

thickness measurements
GRIDstores thickness measurements in a matrix
format (up to 701 rows and 701 columns) See note
below related to the MULTISTORE feature.
CUSTOM LINEARstores data in up to 9999
locations, each containing from up to 999 points
Step 5: Set characteristics as shown in Figure 5-3.

H Note:
When a grid file is active, turning MULTISTORE ON
allows 2, 3, or 4 thickness readings (from each of the
RESULTS Boxes) to be simultaneously stored in an
5-8
equal number of grid positions by pressing C. For

this feature to operate a grid file type must be active,
the file must have MULTISTORE turned ON, and
COPY MODE must be set to LOG To FILE. Caution:
the file will contain only a numerical thickness value,
and will not identify the quantity (SA, A%A, etc.).

will be GRIDz1.)
5.1.3 Editing Active Files

Parameters (other than recorded measurements) stored
as part of an existing data set or data logger file can
be edited anytime the file is active. To save these edits
to any active file do the following:
Step 1: Make all edits desired.
Issue 04, 05/04

USN 58s Text-Entry display (see description in
Figure 5-2).
Step 4: Select a file type by pressing v next to the
desired type:
equal number of grid positions by pressing C. For

this feature to operate a grid file type must be active,
the file must have MULTISTORE turned ON, and
COPY MODE must be set to LOG To FILE. Caution:
the file will contain only a numerical thickness value,
and will not identify the quantity (SA, A%A, etc.).
Step 6: Once the desired file name and characteristics

are entered, press v next to STORE. The data logger
file has been created.
H Note:
LINEARcontains up to 99,999 consecutive

thickness measurements
GRIDstores thickness measurements in a matrix
format (up to 701 rows and 701 columns) See note
below related to the MULTISTORE feature.
CUSTOM LINEARstores data in up to 9999
locations, each containing from up to 999 points
Step 5: Set characteristics as shown in Figure 5-3.

H Note:
When a grid file is active, turning MULTISTORE ON
allows 2, 3, or 4 thickness readings (from each of the
RESULTS Boxes) to be simultaneously stored in an
5-8

will be GRIDz1.)
5.1.3 Editing Active Files

Parameters (other than recorded measurements) stored
as part of an existing data set or data logger file can
be edited anytime the file is active. To save these edits
to any active file do the following:
Step 1: Make all edits desired.
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 5-3After selecting file type (LINEAR, GRID, or CUSTOM LINEAR) you must specify the applicable group of
file characteristics.
Issue 04, 05/04
5-9
FIGURE 5-3After selecting file type (LINEAR, GRID, or CUSTOM LINEAR) you must specify the applicable group of
file characteristics.
Issue 04, 05/04
5-9
Storing Thickness Measurements in Data Logger Files
Step 2: Set the ACTION function (in the FILENAME

submenu) to SAVE EDITS.
Step 3: Follow the on-screen instructions to make the
edits to this file permanent.
5.2 Storing Thickness

Measurements in Data
Logger Files
Only data logger files can contain measurement data
(data set files contain only instrument settings and an
A-Scan) and only thickness measurements may be
stored in data logger files. Thickness measurements
can be stored in active (newly created or recalled) data
logger files using as follows:
Step 1: Access the PRINTER Submenu (in the FILES

Menu).
Step 2: Activate the COPY MODE function and select
LOG TO FILE. This sets the C action.
Step 3: Couple the probe to the test piece.
5-10
Step 4: With a thickness measurement in the Large

Display Window (see section 4.8 to change the
contents of the Large Display Box) press C.
Step 5: The thickness measurement will be stored in
the next available file location of the active data logger
file. You can display the data logger file contents by
first accessing the Test Menu (X), then the VIEW
selection. (see sections 4.4 and 4.5 to change views
and navigate through active data logger files).
5.3 Recalling Existing Data Files

Existing data files are typically accessed for the
following purposes:
DATA SET FILESaccessing an existing file resets
the current instrument setting to the stored data-setfile settings
DATA LOGGER FILESaccessing an existing file
allows stored thickness measurements to be
replaced and/or new thickness values to be stored. It
also resets the current instrument setting to the
stored data-logger-file settings and allows editing of
stored memos, report headers, and notes.
Issue 04, 05/04
Storing Thickness Measurements in Data Logger Files
Step 2: Set the ACTION function (in the FILENAME

submenu) to SAVE EDITS.
Step 3: Follow the on-screen instructions to make the
edits to this file permanent.
5.2 Storing Thickness

Measurements in Data
Logger Files
Only data logger files can contain measurement data
(data set files contain only instrument settings and an
A-Scan) and only thickness measurements may be
stored in data logger files. Thickness measurements
can be stored in active (newly created or recalled) data
logger files using as follows:

Menu).
Step 2: Activate the COPY MODE function and select
LOG TO FILE. This sets the C action.
Step 3: Couple the probe to the test piece.
5-10
Step 4: With a thickness measurement in the Large

Display Window (see section 4.8 to change the
contents of the Large Display Box) press C.
Step 5: The thickness measurement will be stored in
the next available file location of the active data logger
file. You can display the data logger file contents by
first accessing the Test Menu (X), then the VIEW
selection. (see sections 4.4 and 4.5 to change views
and navigate through active data logger files).
5.3 Recalling Existing Data Files

Existing data files are typically accessed for the
following purposes:
DATA SET FILESaccessing an existing file resets
the current instrument setting to the stored data-setfile settings
DATA LOGGER FILESaccessing an existing file
allows stored thickness measurements to be
replaced and/or new thickness values to be stored. It
also resets the current instrument setting to the
stored data-logger-file settings and allows editing of
stored memos, report headers, and notes.
Issue 04, 05/04
Deleting (CLEARING) Existing Data Files
To access an existing file:
5.3.1 Previewing Existing Data Files
Step 1: Activate the FILENAME submenu (in the

FILES menu).
Existing data files can be PREVIEWED rather than

RECALLED. Previewing only allows the user to view
the report header and A-Scan stored with the file
settings. To preview an existing file:
Step 2: Press v next to the FILENAME function.

Press v or turn the Function Knob until the desired file
name appears.
Step 3: Press v next to the ACTION function once,
then turn the Function Knob until RECALL appears.
Then press v again. (In this case, turning the knob
and pressing the button perform different operations.)
Step 4: Press HOME to confirm
Step 5: If an A-scan is stored with the recalled data
set, press FREEZE to unfreeze the display and
activate the recalled data set.
Step 6: The selected file is now active. The instrument
settings will be configured to those stored in the file.
files as discussed in section 5.2.

FILES menu).
Step 2: Turn previewing ON by pressing v next to the
PREVIEW function.
name appears.
Step 4: The selected file can only be previewed. Only
the file name, report header, and A-Scan stored with
the file will be displayed.
5.4 Deleting (CLEARING) Existing

Data Files
Existing data files are deleted using this procedure:
Issue 04, 05/04
5-11
Deleting (CLEARING) Existing Data Files
To access an existing file:
5.3.1 Previewing Existing Data Files

FILES menu).
Existing data files can be PREVIEWED rather than

RECALLED. Previewing only allows the user to view
the report header and A-Scan stored with the file
settings. To preview an existing file:

name appears.
then turn the Function Knob until RECALL appears.
Then press v again. (In this case, turning the knob
and pressing the button perform different operations.)
Step 4: Press HOME to confirm
Step 5: If an A-scan is stored with the recalled data
set, press FREEZE to unfreeze the display and
activate the recalled data set.
Step 6: The selected file is now active. The instrument
settings will be configured to those stored in the file.
files as discussed in section 5.2.

FILES menu).
Step 2: Turn previewing ON by pressing v next to the
PREVIEW function.
name appears.
Step 4: The selected file can only be previewed. Only
the file name, report header, and A-Scan stored with
the file will be displayed.
5.4 Deleting (CLEARING) Existing

Data Files
Existing data files are deleted using this procedure:
Issue 04, 05/04
5-11
Creating a Memo

FILES menu).
allows you to create or edit a memo.
Step 2: Press v next to the FILENAME function. Press

v or turn the Function Knob until the desired function
name appears.
then turn the Function Knob until CLEAR appears. Now
press (two times) v next to the ACTION function.
Follow the display-screen prompting and press h to
confirm the file-delete command.
Step 4: The deleted file may not be retrieved.
5.5 Creating a Memo

contains a blank six-line memo. A memo can be
created using the USN 58s Text-Entry feature (see
description in Figure 5-4).

a Report
You can specify whether the memo attached to the
active data file is included a in a printed report. To add
or remove an active files memo from the printed
report:
Step 1: Activate the MEMO submenu (in the FILES

menu).
Memos are attached to data logger and data set files

at the time the files are stored. After a file is stored,
the attached memo may be modified. To create or edit
a memo:

menu).
Step 2: Press v next to the PRINT ? function.

Choosing a value of ON indicates that the memo
should be printed as part of the report. Choosing OFF
omits the memo from the report.
5.6 Creating a Report Header
Step 2: Press v to set the EDIT function to ON. This

5-12
Issue 04, 05/04
Creating a Memo

FILES menu).
allows you to create or edit a memo.
Step 2: Press v next to the FILENAME function. Press

v or turn the Function Knob until the desired function
name appears.
then turn the Function Knob until CLEAR appears. Now
press (two times) v next to the ACTION function.
Follow the display-screen prompting and press h to
confirm the file-delete command.
Step 4: The deleted file may not be retrieved.
5.5 Creating a Memo

contains a blank six-line memo. A memo can be
created using the USN 58s Text-Entry feature (see
description in Figure 5-4).

a Report
You can specify whether the memo attached to the
active data file is included a in a printed report. To add
or remove an active files memo from the printed
report:

menu).
Memos are attached to data logger and data set files

at the time the files are stored. After a file is stored,
the attached memo may be modified. To create or edit
a memo:

menu).
Step 2: Press v next to the PRINT ? function.

Choosing a value of ON indicates that the memo
should be printed as part of the report. Choosing OFF
omits the memo from the report.
5.6 Creating a Report Header
Step 2: Press v to set the EDIT function to ON. This

5-12
Issue 04, 05/04
Creating a Report Header
FIGURE 5-4The Text-Entry display allows you to create or edit memos, file names, notes, report headers, and other
alphanumeric labels.
Issue 04, 05/04
5-13
Creating a Report Header
FIGURE 5-4The Text-Entry display allows you to create or edit memos, file names, notes, report headers, and other
Issue 04, 05/04
5-13
Entering and Editing Notes for Attachment to Thickness Measurements
Report Headers are attached to data logger and data

set files at the time the files are stored. After a file is
stored, the attached Report Header may be edited. To
create or edit a Report Header:
Step 1: Activate the REP HEAD submenu (in the

FILES menu).
FILES menu).
Step 2: Press v (two times) next to the PRINT ?

function. This will set the value to ON which indicates
the header should be printed as part of the report.
Choosing OFF omits the header from the report.
5.7 Entering and Editing Notes for

Measurements
Step 2: Press v twice to access and set the EDIT

function to ON. This allows you to create or edit a
Header.
contains a nine-entry report header. A report header
can be created using the USN 58s Text-Entry feature
(see description in Figure 5-5).

Printed Report
Notes can be attached to data logger thickness

measurements when the file is active and the Test
Menu is accessed (section 4.5). The contents of six
available notes must be modified prior to the time the
file is stored. After a note is attached to a thickness
reading, that note cannot be modified. To create or edit
You can specify whether the report header attached to

the active data file is included in a printed report. To
add or remove an active files report header from the
printed report:

5-14
Issue 04, 05/04
Report Headers are attached to data logger and data

set files at the time the files are stored. After a file is
stored, the attached Report Header may be edited. To
create or edit a Report Header:

FILES menu).
FILES menu).

function. This will set the value to ON which indicates
the header should be printed as part of the report.
Choosing OFF omits the header from the report.
5.7 Entering and Editing Notes for

Measurements
Step 2: Press v twice to access and set the EDIT

function to ON. This allows you to create or edit a
Header.
contains a nine-entry report header. A report header
can be created using the USN 58s Text-Entry feature
(see description in Figure 5-5).

Printed Report
Notes can be attached to data logger thickness

measurements when the file is active and the Test
Menu is accessed (section 4.5). The contents of six
available notes must be modified prior to the time the
file is stored. After a note is attached to a thickness
reading, that note cannot be modified. To create or edit
You can specify whether the report header attached to

the active data file is included in a printed report. To
add or remove an active files report header from the
printed report:

5-14
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 5-5 The Text-Entry display allows you to create or edit report headers, memos, file names, notes, and other
Issue 04, 05/04
5-15
FIGURE 5-5 The Text-Entry display allows you to create or edit report headers, memos, file names, notes, and other
Issue 04, 05/04
5-15
Printing a Report
a files notes:
Step 1: Activate the NOTES submenu (in the FILES

menu).
individual data logger thickness measurements will be

included in the report whenever the thickness
measurements are included. To add or remove an
active files notes list from the printed report:
Step 2: Press v twice to set the EDIT function to ON.

This allows you to create or edit notes.

menu).

contains six notes (NOTE A through F). One or more
notes can be created using the USN 58s Text-Entry
feature (see description in Figure 5-6).

function. This will set the vaue to ON which indicates
that the NOTES will be printed as part of the report.
Choosing OFF omits the NOTES listing from the
report.
Step 4: Those notes which are attached to specific

thickness measurements may be deleted with the
measurement, but cannot be modified once attached.

Report
You can specify whether the Notes attached to the
active data file are listed in a printed report. This
function effects only the list of note letters and
content. The actual note letter which are attached to
5-16
5.8 Printing a Report

Any data logger or data set file can be output as a
printed report. Reports can also be outputted through
the serial port to a computer. The contents of a report
are specified by the user. Several features of the
active data file can be omitted from or included in the
report as described below.
Prior to creating a report for output to a printer, see
Issue 04, 05/04
Printing a Report
a files notes:

menu).
individual data logger thickness measurements will be

included in the report whenever the thickness
measurements are included. To add or remove an
active files notes list from the printed report:
Step 2: Press v twice to set the EDIT function to ON.

This allows you to create or edit notes.

menu).

contains six notes (NOTE A through F). One or more
notes can be created using the USN 58s Text-Entry
feature (see description in Figure 5-6).

function. This will set the vaue to ON which indicates
that the NOTES will be printed as part of the report.
Choosing OFF omits the NOTES listing from the
report.
Step 4: Those notes which are attached to specific

thickness measurements may be deleted with the
measurement, but cannot be modified once attached.

Report
You can specify whether the Notes attached to the
active data file are listed in a printed report. This
function effects only the list of note letters and
content. The actual note letter which are attached to
5.8 Printing a Report

Any data logger or data set file can be output as a
printed report. Reports can also be outputted through
the serial port to a computer. The contents of a report
are specified by the user. Several features of the
active data file can be omitted from or included in the
report as described below.
Prior to creating a report for output to a printer, see
5-16
Issue 04, 05/04
Printing a Report
FIGURE 5-6The Text-Entry display allows you to create or edit notes, report headers, memos, file names, and other
Issue 04, 05/04
5-17
Printing a Report
FIGURE 5-6The Text-Entry display allows you to create or edit notes, report headers, memos, file names, and other
Issue 04, 05/04
5-17
Outputting to a Printer
section 5.9 to designate printer properties and

physically connect to the printer. Prior to creating a
report for output to a computer, see section 5.10 to
establish necessary connections.
Step 1: Activate the PRINTER submenu (in the FILES

menu).
Step 2: Press v to select the COPY MODE function.
Set this function to REPORT. This outputs a report
whenever C is pressed.
Step 3: Turn the following features ON or Off to
indicate whether or not they should be printed as part
of the report (ON) or excluded from the report (OFF).
Following each item is a notation that identifies its
menu location (menu/submenu/function).
Report Header (FILE / REP HEAD / PRINT ?)
Notes (FILE / NOTES / PRINT ?)
Data Logger Thickness Readings (FILE / NOTES /
DL PRINT ?)
Memo (FILE / MEMO / PRINT ?)
5-18
A-Scan (FILE / PRINTER / ASCAN PRINT ?)

Listing of Data-set or Data-Logger Stored
Instrument Settings (FILE / PRINTER / PARAM
PRINT ?)
Step 4: Press C to print or output the report.
5.9 Outputting to a Printer

A printer connects to the instrument via the RS-232
serial port located at the upper-rear corner of the
instrument. To output data to a specific printer you
must
Connect the instrument to the printer using the
correct cable (Serial Printer or Parallel Printer
Interface)
Configure the instrument to communicate with the
attached printer
Specify what data should be sent to the printer when
C is pressed
Issue 04, 05/04
section 5.9 to designate printer properties and

physically connect to the printer. Prior to creating a
report for output to a computer, see section 5.10 to
establish necessary connections.
Step 1: Activate the PRINTER submenu (in the FILES

menu).
Step 2: Press v to select the COPY MODE function.
Set this function to REPORT. This outputs a report
whenever C is pressed.
Step 3: Turn the following features ON or Off to
indicate whether or not they should be printed as part
of the report (ON) or excluded from the report (OFF).
Following each item is a notation that identifies its
menu location (menu/submenu/function).
Report Header (FILE / REP HEAD / PRINT ?)
Notes (FILE / NOTES / PRINT ?)
Data Logger Thickness Readings (FILE / NOTES /
DL PRINT ?)
Memo (FILE / MEMO / PRINT ?)
5-18
A-Scan (FILE / PRINTER / ASCAN PRINT ?)

Listing of Data-set or Data-Logger Stored
Instrument Settings (FILE / PRINTER / PARAM
PRINT ?)
Step 4: Press C to print or output the report.
5.9 Outputting to a Printer

A printer connects to the instrument via the RS-232
serial port located at the upper-rear corner of the
instrument. To output data to a specific printer you
must
Connect the instrument to the printer using the
correct cable (Serial Printer or Parallel Printer
Interface)
attached printer
Specify what data should be sent to the printer when
C is pressed
Issue 04, 05/04

Baud Rate
parallel interface cable) the baud rate must be set to

match the cables requirements.
5.9.2 Setting the COPY Key Function
Step 2: Select the PRINTER submenu then press v

next to the PRINTER function. Note that the following
printer options are available:
The user can select one of four actions to be taken

when C is pressed. Three of these four available
Copy Key actions send data to the RS-232 serial port
located at the upper-rear corner of the instrument. To
select the Copy Key action
EPSON (dot matrix)

HP LASERJET

Menu).
HP DESKJET
Step 2: Activate the COPY MODE function and

choose from the following
SEIKO DPU-4xx
Step 3: The printer type will remain set to the last

choice selected.
REPORTThe previously specified report contents

(see section 5.8) will be sent to the RS-232 port
Step 4: Set the baud rate to match your serial printer

by first selecting the SER COMM submenu (still in the
FILE menu) by pressing u. Then press v next to the
BAUD function until the correct value is chosen.
Available baud rates include 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200. Note
that if you have connected a parallel printer (with a
PARADUMPAll instrument settings, parameter

names, and remote codes will be sent to the RS-232
port
Issue 04, 05/04
5-19

Baud Rate
parallel interface cable) the baud rate must be set to

match the cables requirements.
5.9.2 Setting the COPY Key Function
Step 2: Select the PRINTER submenu then press v

next to the PRINTER function. Note that the following
printer options are available:
The user can select one of four actions to be taken

when C is pressed. Three of these four available
Copy Key actions send data to the RS-232 serial port
located at the upper-rear corner of the instrument. To
select the Copy Key action
EPSON (dot matrix)

HP LASERJET

Menu).
HP DESKJET
Step 2: Activate the COPY MODE function and

choose from the following
SEIKO DPU-4xx
Step 3: The printer type will remain set to the last

choice selected.
REPORTThe previously specified report contents

(see section 5.8) will be sent to the RS-232 port
Step 4: Set the baud rate to match your serial printer

by first selecting the SER COMM submenu (still in the
FILE menu) by pressing u. Then press v next to the
BAUD function until the correct value is chosen.
Available baud rates include 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200. Note
that if you have connected a parallel printer (with a
PARADUMPAll instrument settings, parameter

names, and remote codes will be sent to the RS-232
port
Issue 04, 05/04
5-19
Outputting to a Computer via the RS-232 Serial Port
LOG TO PORTThe value displayed in the Large

Display Box (see section 4.8) will be sent to the
RS-232 port
LOG TO FILEThe value displayed in the Large
Display Box (but only if it is a thickness value) will
be stored in the active data file. Note that no data
will be sent to the RS-232 port when this action is
selected.
Step 3: Pressing C will result in the specified action.
5.10 Outputting to a Computer via

the RS-232 Serial Port
The serial port of a PC can connect with the
instrument via the RS-232 serial port located at the
upper-rear corner of the instrument. To output data to a
connected PC you must
Connect the USN 58 to the PC using the correct
cable (RS-232-to-9 Pin Serial Printer Cable)
attached PC
5-20
Specify what data should be sent to the PC when

C is pressed (see section 5.9.2)
Indicate what should be ouput when a Loss of Signal
(LOS) occurs.
5.10.1 Specifying the Baud Rate

Step 1: From the HOME MENU, select NEXT then
activate the GENERAL MENU and the SER COMM
submenu by pressing u.
Step 2: Then press v next to the BAUD function until
the baud rate to matches the rate of your software
application. Available baud rates include 300, 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and
115200. Note that if you are using the UltraDOC
software utility, you do not need to adjust the baud
rate.
5.10.2 Loss of Signal

When the COPY MODE is set to LOG TO PORT, the
LOSS OF SIGNAL function affects the value that the
instrument outputs through the serial port whenever C
Issue 04, 05/04
LOG TO PORTThe value displayed in the Large

Display Box (see section 4.8) will be sent to the
RS-232 port
LOG TO FILEThe value displayed in the Large
Display Box (but only if it is a thickness value) will
be stored in the active data file. Note that no data
will be sent to the RS-232 port when this action is
selected.
Step 3: Pressing C will result in the specified action.
5.10 Outputting to a Computer via

the RS-232 Serial Port
The serial port of a PC can connect with the
instrument via the RS-232 serial port located at the
upper-rear corner of the instrument. To output data to a
connected PC you must
Connect the USN 58 to the PC using the correct
cable (RS-232-to-9 Pin Serial Printer Cable)
attached PC
5-20
Specify what data should be sent to the PC when

C is pressed (see section 5.9.2)
Indicate what should be ouput when a Loss of Signal
(LOS) occurs.
5.10.1 Specifying the Baud Rate

Step 1: From the HOME MENU, select NEXT then
activate the GENERAL MENU and the SER COMM
submenu by pressing u.
Step 2: Then press v next to the BAUD function until
the baud rate to matches the rate of your software
application. Available baud rates include 300, 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and
115200. Note that if you are using the UltraDOC
software utility, you do not need to adjust the baud
rate.
5.10.2 Loss of Signal

When the COPY MODE is set to LOG TO PORT, the
LOSS OF SIGNAL function affects the value that the
instrument outputs through the serial port whenever C
Issue 04, 05/04
is pressed. LOSS OF SIGNAL (located in the SER

COM Menu) may be set to
ON HIGHA thickness value of 0.000 is
transmitted via the RS-232 port whenever an
uncoupled probe condition exists and C is pressed.
The analog output is set to high.
ON LOWA thickness value of 0.000 is transmitted
via the RS-232 port whenever an uncoupled probe
condition exists and C is pressed. The analog
output is set to low.
OFF HIGHThe last valid thickness reading is
OFF LOWThe last valid thickness reading is
The analog output is set to low.
Changing the LOSS OF SIGNAL setting affects only
the output via the RS-232 port and has no effect on
the screens displayed value.
Issue 04, 05/04
5-21
is pressed. LOSS OF SIGNAL (located in the SER

COM Menu) may be set to
ON HIGHA thickness value of 0.000 is
ON LOWA thickness value of 0.000 is transmitted
via the RS-232 port whenever an uncoupled probe
condition exists and C is pressed. The analog
output is set to low.
OFF HIGHThe last valid thickness reading is
OFF LOWThe last valid thickness reading is
The analog output is set to low.
Changing the LOSS OF SIGNAL setting affects only
the output via the RS-232 port and has no effect on
the screens displayed value.
Issue 04, 05/04
5-21
5-22
Issue 04, 05/04
5-22
Issue 04, 05/04
Advanced Base-Model
Features 6
Issue 04, 05/04
6-1
Advanced Base-Model
Features 6
Issue 04, 05/04
6-1
Advanced Base-Model Features
Noise Immunization
In addition to the commonly used features of your USN

58, the instrument has several special features used
for advanced applications or by more advanced users.
This chapter describes these special features and
explains how they are used.
In this chapter, youll learn how to:
Use the Noise Immunization capabilities (section
6.1)
normal operation, a TTL is output whenever the first

echo triggers the gates logic. When the NOISE IMMN
features is activated, the user can determine the
number of triggering counts required before the TTL is
output. The user indicates the number of counts, out of
the total number of counts in an overall window,
which must trigger the gate before the assigned TTL is
output. To setup the noise immunization feature follow
these steps:
Use the SMART VIEW feature (section 6.2)
Step 1: Activate the GATES MENU (located in the

HOME MENU).
Use the SPARKLE feature (58L only) which

emulates an analog-display screen and BASELINE
BREAK, which resolves dynamic echo information
to the baseline (section 6.3)
Step 2: With the NSE IMMN submenu selected, press

v next to the ALARM SELECT function. Choose the
TTL output to which you wish to apply noise
immunization.
Use the AWS D1.1 weld rating feature (section 6.4)
Step 3: Press v next to the WINDOW function.

Continue to press v or turn the function knob to define
the number of counts in the window of examination.
Note that if the window size is set to 16 counts (the
maximum available) and the count function is set to 4
counts, this means that at least 25% (4 16) of all
echoes in the window must trigger the gate before the
TTL will set.
Reset the instrument and perform other operations

with combined key presses (section 6.5)
6.1 Noise Immunization

TTL outputs can be assigned to any available gate and
are set whenever the assigned gate is triggered. Under
6-2
Issue 04, 05/04
Noise Immunization
In addition to the commonly used features of your USN

58, the instrument has several special features used
for advanced applications or by more advanced users.
This chapter describes these special features and
explains how they are used.
In this chapter, youll learn how to:
Use the Noise Immunization capabilities (section
6.1)
normal operation, a TTL is output whenever the first

echo triggers the gates logic. When the NOISE IMMN
features is activated, the user can determine the
number of triggering counts required before the TTL is
output. The user indicates the number of counts, out of
the total number of counts in an overall window,
which must trigger the gate before the assigned TTL is
output. To setup the noise immunization feature follow
these steps:
Use the SMART VIEW feature (section 6.2)
Step 1: Activate the GATES MENU (located in the

HOME MENU).
Use the SPARKLE feature (58L only) which

emulates an analog-display screen and BASELINE
BREAK, which resolves dynamic echo information
to the baseline (section 6.3)
Step 2: With the NSE IMMN submenu selected, press

v next to the ALARM SELECT function. Choose the
TTL output to which you wish to apply noise
immunization.
Use the AWS D1.1 weld rating feature (section 6.4)
Step 3: Press v next to the WINDOW function.

Continue to press v or turn the function knob to define
the number of counts in the window of examination.
Note that if the window size is set to 16 counts (the
maximum available) and the count function is set to 4
counts, this means that at least 25% (4 16) of all
echoes in the window must trigger the gate before the
TTL will set.
Reset the instrument and perform other operations

with combined key presses (section 6.5)
6.1 Noise Immunization

TTL outputs can be assigned to any available gate and
are set whenever the assigned gate is triggered. Under
6-2
Issue 04, 05/04
Using SMART VIEW
Step 4: Press v next to the COUNT function.

Continue to press v or turn the function knob to
select the number of counts which must trigger the
gate (during the total window period) before the TTL is
output.
all the echoes acquired since the last displayed echo.

The echo with the highest peak in the A-gate will be
displayed. To use the SMART VIEW feature:
Step 5: When Noise IMMN is activated, the

will be displayed.
Step 2: With the CONFIG submenu selected, press v

next to the ASCAN MODE function. Continue to press
v or turn the function knob to select SMART FILLED
or HOLLOW.
icon
6.2 Using SMART VIEW

The USN 58 receives many more A-Scan echoes per
second than are displayed (see section 2.3.4 for PRF).
In normal operation, the displayed echo is updated on
a cycle/time basis. When operating in either SMART
FILLED or HOLLOW mode, the instrument examines
all echoes, acquired since the last display-screen
update, and displays the one with the most critical
characteristics. The instrument determines which
characteristics are most critical to the user based on
the users choice of parameter in the large display box.
For instance, assume the user selects A%A (the
amplitude percentage of the echo in gate A) to appear
in the large display box, and the instrument is set to
one of the SMART modes. The instrument will examine
Step 1: Activate the BASIC MENU (located in the

HOME MENU).
Note that in SMART HOLLOW mode, the A-Scans

Outline is displayed, while in SMART FILLED mode, a
filled A-Scan is displayed.
Step 3: When SMART FILLED or SMART HOLLOW is

icon will be displayed.
selected, the
H Note:
When SMART FILLED or HOLLOW is activated, and
an amplitude reading (A%A, A%B, etc.) is displayed in
the large display box, SMART VIEW will select the
A-Scan with the maximum peak to display. When the
large display box contains a thickness reading
(SA/, DA^, etc.) SMART VIEW will select the A-Scan
with the thinnest peak or flank measurement to display.
Issue 04, 05/04
6-3
Using SMART VIEW
Step 4: Press v next to the COUNT function.

Continue to press v or turn the function knob to
select the number of counts which must trigger the
gate (during the total window period) before the TTL is
output.
all the echoes acquired since the last displayed echo.

The echo with the highest peak in the A-gate will be
displayed. To use the SMART VIEW feature:
Step 5: When Noise IMMN is activated, the

will be displayed.
Step 2: With the CONFIG submenu selected, press v

next to the ASCAN MODE function. Continue to press
v or turn the function knob to select SMART FILLED
or HOLLOW.
icon
6.2 Using SMART VIEW

The USN 58 receives many more A-Scan echoes per
second than are displayed (see section 2.3.4 for PRF).
In normal operation, the displayed echo is updated on
a cycle/time basis. When operating in either SMART
FILLED or HOLLOW mode, the instrument examines
all echoes, acquired since the last display-screen
update, and displays the one with the most critical
characteristics. The instrument determines which
characteristics are most critical to the user based on
the users choice of parameter in the large display box.
For instance, assume the user selects A%A (the
amplitude percentage of the echo in gate A) to appear
in the large display box, and the instrument is set to
one of the SMART modes. The instrument will examine
Step 1: Activate the BASIC MENU (located in the

HOME MENU).
Note that in SMART HOLLOW mode, the A-Scans

Outline is displayed, while in SMART FILLED mode, a
filled A-Scan is displayed.
Step 3: When SMART FILLED or SMART HOLLOW is

selected, the
icon will be displayed.
H Note:
When SMART FILLED or HOLLOW is activated, and
an amplitude reading (A%A, A%B, etc.) is displayed in
the large display box, SMART VIEW will select the
A-Scan with the maximum peak to display. When the
large display box contains a thickness reading
(SA/, DA^, etc.) SMART VIEW will select the A-Scan
with the thinnest peak or flank measurement to display.
Issue 04, 05/04
6-3
Using A-Scan Enhancement Analog Display Emulation
6.3 Using A-Scan Enhancement

Analog Display Emulation
The USN 58 series incorporates break-through features
that improve traditional displays. These features are
activated by selecting the A-SCAN ENHANCE function
in the CONFIG submenu.
With SPARKLEs intensity variation, the A-Scan display

can now indicate acoustic phenomena not apparent
with conventional digital displays. Figure 6-1 illustrates
the intensity variation visible in a SPARKLE A-Scan.
6.3.2 Baseline Break (CONFIG/A-SCAN

ENHANCE/BASELINE BREAK)
This feature, shown in Figure 6-2, details acoustic
phenomena and is available in all USN 58 instruments.
BASELINE BREAK extends down to the display
baseline each point on the A-Scan which represents a
non-continuous location on the acoustic signal.

(CONFIG/ASCAN ENHANCE/
SPARKLE) (58L only)
The built-in SPARKLE feature emulates the intensity
variation traditionally found only with analog displays.
6-4
Issue 04, 05/04
6.3 Using A-Scan Enhancement

Analog Display Emulation
The USN 58 series incorporates break-through features
that improve traditional displays. These features are
activated by selecting the A-SCAN ENHANCE function
in the CONFIG submenu.
With SPARKLEs intensity variation, the A-Scan display

can now indicate acoustic phenomena not apparent
with conventional digital displays. Figure 6-1 illustrates
the intensity variation visible in a SPARKLE A-Scan.
6.3.2 Baseline Break (CONFIG/A-SCAN

ENHANCE/BASELINE BREAK)
This feature, shown in Figure 6-2, details acoustic
phenomena and is available in all USN 58 instruments.
BASELINE BREAK extends down to the display
baseline each point on the A-Scan which represents a
non-continuous location on the acoustic signal.

(CONFIG/ASCAN ENHANCE/
SPARKLE) (58L only)
The built-in SPARKLE feature emulates the intensity
variation traditionally found only with analog displays.
6-4
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 6-1The SPARKLE feature emulates an analog display by

offering varied A-Scan intensity.
Issue 04, 05/04
6-5
FIGURE 6-1The SPARKLE feature emulates an analog display by

offering varied A-Scan intensity.
Issue 04, 05/04
6-5
FIGURE 6-2Baseline Break

6-6
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 6-2Baseline Break

6-6
Issue 04, 05/04
AWS D1.1 Weld Rating Feature
6.4 AWS D1.1 Weld Rating

Feature
H Note:
This feature allows analysis of welds according to

AWS specification D1.1 and provides a D1.1 rating.
The AWS D1.1 feature is accessed via the TRIG Menu.
The feature utilizes four AWS-specified variables
including:
A INDICATIONGain (in dB) required to position an
A-Scan echos peak (from the measured reflector) at
an amplitude equal to the reference amplitude (between
20 and 90% of full screen height)
B REFERENCEGain (in dB) required to position an AScan echos peak (from the reference reflector) at the
user-selected amplitude (between 20 and 90% of FSH)
C ATTENUATIONDetermined by subtracting 1 inch
from the sound-path distance to the discontinuity,
using the equation: C = (SA-1) 2. This compensates
for sound loss from material attenuation along the
sound path to the discontinuity.
The dB value of A-Indication will be automatically

adjusted to match the amplitude of the B-Ref upon
performing the dB rating calculation.
Before activating the AWS D1.1 weld rating feature, be
sure that all instrument settings are properly adjusted
for the specific measurement application. Then access
the AWS D1.1 Submenu (via the TRIG Menu) and
follow this procedure:
Step 1: Apply couplant and couple the probe to a

suitable reference test standard.
Step 2: Ensure that the A-Gate is positioned over the
desired echo. Then adjust the gain until the peak of the
desired reference echo reaches the desired amplitude
as shown in Figure 6-3. Note that if the echos peak
amplitude (A%A) does not fall between 20% and 90%,
the inputted point will not be accepted.
Step 3: Press v next to the B REFERENCE function
(then h to confirm) to define the reference dB level.
D D1.1 RATINGCalculated based on the AWS

formula: D = A-B-C (See NOTE)
Issue 04, 05/04
6-7
6.4 AWS D1.1 Weld Rating

Feature
H Note:
This feature allows analysis of welds according to

AWS specification D1.1 and provides a D1.1 rating.
The AWS D1.1 feature is accessed via the TRIG Menu.
The feature utilizes four AWS-specified variables
including:
A INDICATIONGain (in dB) required to position an
A-Scan echos peak (from the measured reflector) at
an amplitude equal to the reference amplitude (between
20 and 90% of full screen height)
B REFERENCEGain (in dB) required to position an AScan echos peak (from the reference reflector) at the
user-selected amplitude (between 20 and 90% of FSH)
C ATTENUATIONDetermined by subtracting 1 inch
from the sound-path distance to the discontinuity,
using the equation: C = (SA-1) 2. This compensates
for sound loss from material attenuation along the
sound path to the discontinuity.
The dB value of A-Indication will be automatically

adjusted to match the amplitude of the B-Ref upon
performing the dB rating calculation.
Before activating the AWS D1.1 weld rating feature, be
sure that all instrument settings are properly adjusted
for the specific measurement application. Then access
the AWS D1.1 Submenu (via the TRIG Menu) and
follow this procedure:
Step 1: Apply couplant and couple the probe to a

suitable reference test standard.
Step 2: Ensure that the A-Gate is positioned over the
desired echo. Then adjust the gain until the peak of the
desired reference echo reaches the desired amplitude
as shown in Figure 6-3. Note that if the echos peak
amplitude (A%A) does not fall between 20% and 90%,
the inputted point will not be accepted.
Step 3: Press v next to the B REFERENCE function
(then h to confirm) to define the reference dB level.
D D1.1 RATINGCalculated based on the AWS

formula: D = A-B-C (See NOTE)
Issue 04, 05/04
6-7
FIGURE 6-3After adjusting the gain so that the reference echos peak is at the desired amplitude, record the
reference dB. This reference dB value will be stored in the instrument until manually changed.
6-8
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 6-3After adjusting the gain so that the reference echos peak is at the desired amplitude, record the
reference dB. This reference dB value will be stored in the instrument until manually changed.
6-8
Issue 04, 05/04
Resetting the Instrument
H Note:
Storing an AWS reference will automatically switch the
value of the AWS MODE function (located in the
POSITION Submenu of the TRIG Menu) to ON. While
AWS MODE is ON, two measurement result boxes will
be automatically set (if not already configured) to
display SA and A%A values. These result selections
will remain locked until AWS MODE is turned OFF.
Step 4: To evaluate a reflector in a test piece, couple

the probe to the test piece and press u to select the
POSITION Submenu as shown in Figure 6-4. Now
adjust the A-Gate position so that it is over the desired
echo.
Step 6: Return to the AWS D1.1 Submenu and press

v next to the A INDICATION function. This will record
the adjusted dB setting and will automatically calculate
and display values for the AWS variables C and D as
shown in Figure 6-5. Rating D can then be applied to
the appropriate acceptance criteria found in AWS D1.1.
To evaluate additional reflectors against the recorded
reference, simply repeat Steps 4 to 6.
6.5 Resetting the Instrument

The instrument can be reset, in one of two ways, by
using a combination of key presses.
To reset the instrument settings WITHOUT deleting all
stored data files, turn the instrument on by pressing
and holding K and C simultaneously. Hold both
buttons until the startup cycle is complete.
Step 5: Adjust the gain until the peak of the testpieces echo reaches the desired screen height as
shown in Figure 6-4.
H Note:
The dB value that is recorded for A-Indication will be
automatically adjusted based upon the amplitude
difference between it and the value recorded for B-REF.
It will usually NOT match the instruments dB gain
setting.
Issue 04, 05/04
6-9
Resetting the Instrument
H Note:
Storing an AWS reference will automatically switch the
value of the AWS MODE function (located in the
POSITION Submenu of the TRIG Menu) to ON. While
AWS MODE is ON, two measurement result boxes will
be automatically set (if not already configured) to
display SA and A%A values. These result selections
will remain locked until AWS MODE is turned OFF.
Step 4: To evaluate a reflector in a test piece, couple

the probe to the test piece and press u to select the
POSITION Submenu as shown in Figure 6-4. Now
adjust the A-Gate position so that it is over the desired
echo.
Step 5: Adjust the gain until the peak of the testpieces echo reaches the desired screen height as
Step 6: Return to the AWS D1.1 Submenu and press

v next to the A INDICATION function. This will record
the adjusted dB setting and will automatically calculate
and display values for the AWS variables C and D as
shown in Figure 6-5. Rating D can then be applied to
the appropriate acceptance criteria found in AWS D1.1.
To evaluate additional reflectors against the recorded
reference, simply repeat Steps 4 to 6.
6.5 Resetting the Instrument

The instrument can be reset, in one of two ways, by
using a combination of key presses.
To reset the instrument settings WITHOUT deleting all
stored data files, turn the instrument on by pressing
and holding K and C simultaneously. Hold both
buttons until the startup cycle is complete.
H Note:
The dB value that is recorded for A-Indication will be
automatically adjusted based upon the amplitude
difference between it and the value recorded for B-REF.
It will usually NOT match the instruments dB gain
setting.
Issue 04, 05/04
6-9
FIGURE 6-4Position the A-Gate so that it is over the desired echo.
6-10
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 6-4Position the A-Gate so that it is over the desired echo.
6-10
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 6-5After adjusting the gain so that the echos peak is at the desired screen height, record the dB as shown
here. The attenuation (C) and AWS D1.1 rating (D) will be automatically calculated and displayed.
Issue 04, 05/04
6-11
FIGURE 6-5After adjusting the gain so that the echos peak is at the desired screen height, record the dB as shown
here. The attenuation (C) and AWS D1.1 rating (D) will be automatically calculated and displayed.
Issue 04, 05/04
6-11
To reset the instrument settings and DELETE all stored

data files, turn the instrument on by pressing and
holding K and X simultaneously. Hold both buttons
until the startup cycle is complete.
H Note:
When the instrument has been reset, the settings are
returned to the default values and data files (when
applicable) are deleted. The effects of resetting the
instrument may not be reversed.
6-12
Issue 04, 05/04
To reset the instrument settings and DELETE all stored

data files, turn the instrument on by pressing and
holding K and X simultaneously. Hold both buttons
until the startup cycle is complete.
H Note:
When the instrument has been reset, the settings are
returned to the default values and data files (when
applicable) are deleted. The effects of resetting the
instrument may not be reversed.
6-12
Issue 04, 05/04
I/O Ports Technical Data
Issue 04, 05/04
Issue 04, 05/04
7-1
7-1
Sending Readings to Other Devices
7.1 Sending Readings to Other

Devices
Table 7-1
Single R eading Formats
B yte #
Digital measurements displayed in the Large Display

Box can be transmitted via the RS-232 I/O port to any
compatible device, such as a personal computer,
printer, or other RS-232 recording instrument.
In all cases, the correct cable will be required. Contact
your nearest Krautkramer representative.
To output the measurement value displayed in the large
display box
1. Connect the instruments RS-232 Port to the
external device with the correct cable
2. Set the COPY MODE to LOG TO PORT.
3. Press C to output the measurement value in the
large display box.
X.XXX IN
XX.XX IN
XX.XX MM XXX.X MM
1
S p a ce
S p a ce
2
D i gi t
D i gi t
3
D .P.
D i gi t
4
D i gi t
D .P.
5
D i gi t
D i gi t
6
D i gi t
D i gi t
7
S p a ce
S p a ce
8
I
I
9
N
N
10
S p a ce
S p a ce
11
S p a ce
S p a ce
12
CR
CR
13
LF
LF
D .P.: D eci mal Poi nt; C R: C arriage
S p a ce
S p a ce
D i gi t
D i gi t
D i gi t
D i gi t
D .P.
D i gi t
D i gi t
D .P.
D i gi t
D i gi t
S p a ce
S p a ce
M
M
M
M
S p a ce
S p a ce
S p a ce
S p a ce
CR
CR
LF
LF
Return; LF: Li ne Feed
Table 7-1 shows single-reading formats of

measurement values transmitted by the USN 58.
Specific format depends on the unit of measure and
the measurement resolution.
7-2
Issue 04, 05/04
Sending Readings to Other Devices
7.1 Sending Readings to Other

Devices
Table 7-1
Single R eading Formats
B yte #
Digital measurements displayed in the Large Display

Box can be transmitted via the RS-232 I/O port to any
compatible device, such as a personal computer,
printer, or other RS-232 recording instrument.
In all cases, the correct cable will be required. Contact
your nearest Krautkramer representative.
To output the measurement value displayed in the large
display box
1. Connect the instruments RS-232 Port to the
external device with the correct cable
2. Set the COPY MODE to LOG TO PORT.
3. Press C to output the measurement value in the
large display box.
X.XXX IN
XX.XX IN
XX.XX MM XXX.X MM
1
S p a ce
S p a ce
2
D i gi t
D i gi t
3
D .P.
D i gi t
4
D i gi t
D .P.
5
D i gi t
D i gi t
6
D i gi t
D i gi t
7
S p a ce
S p a ce
8
I
I
9
N
N
10
S p a ce
S p a ce
11
S p a ce
S p a ce
12
CR
CR
13
LF
LF
D .P.: D eci mal Poi nt; C R: C arriage
S p a ce
S p a ce
D i gi t
D i gi t
D i gi t
D i gi t
D .P.
D i gi t
D i gi t
D .P.
D i gi t
D i gi t
S p a ce
S p a ce
M
M
M
M
S p a ce
S p a ce
S p a ce
S p a ce
CR
CR
LF
LF
Return; LF: Line Feed
Table 7-1 shows single-reading formats of

measurement values transmitted by the USN 58.
Specific format depends on the unit of measure and
the measurement resolution.
7-2
Issue 04, 05/04
Analog Output
7.2 Analog Output
3.
H Note:
The OUTPUT DELAY function (located in the ALARM
Submenu of the GATES Menu) allows you to specify
the number of PRF Cycles (0, 1, 2, or 3) delay to
impose on all analog and TTL outputs that pass
through the Real-time I/O Connector.
Amplitude and time of flight (distance) analog outputs
are provided via the 15-pin Real-time I/O Connector
1.
2.
External TriggerThe rising edge of this signal

causes the USN 58 to begin a new cycle. The
pulser will fire 35 ns (+0 to 20 ns) after the rising
edge of External Trigger. The minimum high period
for External Trigger is 40 ns, there is no maximum
high period, but the signal must be low for at least
166.6 microseconds before any sub-sequent
rising edge. Note: PRF Mode must be set to
EXTERNAL for the trigger to be recognized.
4-7 Analog Outputsthese pins will output a voltage

proportional to the values selected for reading
boxes 1-4. When an amplitude is selected for a
reading a 0 V output indicates a 0% fsh signal
and a 2.5 output indicates a 100% fsh signal.
When a thickness value is selected for a reading
a 0 V output corresponds to a thickness value
that is less than or equal to the left edge of the
displayed screen (0% horizontal) and a 2.5 output
corresponds to a thickness value that is greater
than or equal to the value at 100% horizontal of
the displayed screen.
8.
Issue 04, 05/04
7-3
Analog Output
7.2 Analog Output
3.
H Note:
The OUTPUT DELAY function (located in the ALARM
Submenu of the GATES Menu) allows you to specify
the number of PRF Cycles (0, 1, 2, or 3) delay to
impose on all analog and TTL outputs that pass
through the Real-time I/O Connector.
Amplitude and time of flight (distance) analog outputs
are provided via the 15-pin Real-time I/O Connector
2.
Data Validthis signal is generated once per

cycle. During the high portion of the signal the
TTL and Analog Outputs are being updated and
are not valid. The falling edge of this signal or a
low level on this signal indicate that data is valid
and stable. (See Figure 7-2)
Data Out InhibitThe rising edge of this signal

will cause all outputs to become inactive (TTLs
go low and Analog Outputs are set to 0 V)
1.
Reset AlarmThe rising edge of this signal will

reset the TTL outputs to a low level when latched
has been selected for TTL mode.
External TriggerThe rising edge of this signal

causes the USN 58 to begin a new cycle. The
pulser will fire 35 ns (+0 to 20 ns) after the rising
edge of External Trigger. The minimum high period
for External Trigger is 40 ns, there is no maximum
high period, but the signal must be low for at least
166.6 microseconds before any sub-sequent
rising edge. Note: PRF Mode must be set to
EXTERNAL for the trigger to be recognized.
Reset AlarmThe rising edge of this signal will

reset the TTL outputs to a low level when latched
has been selected for TTL mode.
4-7 Analog Outputsthese pins will output a voltage

proportional to the values selected for reading
boxes 1-4. When an amplitude is selected for a
reading a 0 V output indicates a 0% fsh signal
and a 2.5 output indicates a 100% fsh signal.
When a thickness value is selected for a reading
a 0 V output corresponds to a thickness value
that is less than or equal to the left edge of the
displayed screen (0% horizontal) and a 2.5 output
corresponds to a thickness value that is greater
than or equal to the value at 100% horizontal of
the displayed screen.
8.
Data Validthis signal is generated once per

cycle. During the high portion of the signal the
TTL and Analog Outputs are being updated and
are not valid. The falling edge of this signal or a
low level on this signal indicate that data is valid
and stable. (See Figure 7-2)
Data Out InhibitThe rising edge of this signal

will cause all outputs to become inactive (TTLs
go low and Analog Outputs are set to 0 V)
Issue 04, 05/04
7-3
Analog Output
FIGURE 7-1Real time I/O connector

7-4
Issue 04, 05/04
Analog Output
FIGURE 7-1Real time I/O connector

7-4
Issue 04, 05/04
Analog Output
9-11 TTL OutputsThese pins output a level which

indicate the alarm state of the selected
parameter. When an alarm condition exist the
output is high (5 V) and when no alarm exists
the output is low (0 V).
12. Ground
13. SAP Outthis pin outputs a 50 microseconds

long pulse at the beginning of each cycle. The
pulser fires 35 microseconds after the rising edge
of this signal. (See Figure 7-2)
14. MUXD Ascan Enablethis pin accepts a signal
from the Krautkramer MUXD multiscanner. This
signal indicates the channel from the MUXD
which should be selected for display on the
USN 58.
FIGURE 7-2Data Valid Signal

Issue 04, 05/04
Analog Output
9-11 TTL OutputsThese pins output a level which

indicate the alarm state of the selected
parameter. When an alarm condition exist the
output is high (5 V) and when no alarm exists
the output is low (0 V).
12. Ground
7-5
13. SAP Outthis pin outputs a 50 microseconds

long pulse at the beginning of each cycle. The
pulser fires 35 microseconds after the rising edge
of this signal. (See Figure 7-2)
14. MUXD Ascan Enablethis pin accepts a signal
from the Krautkramer MUXD multiscanner. This
signal indicates the channel from the MUXD
which should be selected for display on the
USN 58.
FIGURE 7-2Data Valid Signal

Issue 04, 05/04
7-5
Remote Control of the USN 58
7.3 Remote Control of the

USN 58
sequence using the format below. Refer to the tables

later in this section for the 2 digit code, acceptable
value range, and resolution.
The USN 58 is capable of receiving coded instructions

from a personal computer or terminal connected to the
RS-232 I/O port.
<<[Esc]>><<Code>><<Space>><<Value>><<[Return]>>
[Esc] = Escape Key - CHR$(27)
Code = 2 digit code from the table
Instructions must be transmitted to the USN 58 as

escape sequences, that is, a series of keystrokes, the
first of which is always the Escape key (ASCII 27).
The Escape key will be identified in this manual as
[Esc].
Every key press and menu function of the USN 58 can
be operated by remote control. In addition, the current
value (setting) of a particular function may be
requested.
This section provides general instructions on command
sequence format. Function codes, along with the
values for the options associated with the functions,
are provided in tables in this section.
To execute a keypad operation or adjust the setting of
a menu function, transmit the required escape
7-6
Space = Space bar

Value = Desired value from the tables
[Return] Enter key - CHR$(13)
Values must be entered as a multiple of the resolution
shown in the table for each function. As an example,
the following sequence would adjust the range of the
USN 60 to 5.000 inches:
<<[Esc]>><<DW>><<Space>><<5.000>><<[Return]>>
To request the following status, or value, of any
function, use the following sequence:
<<[Escape]>><<AT>><<[Return]>>
Issue 04, 05/04
Remote Control of the USN 58
7.3 Remote Control of the

USN 58
sequence using the format below. Refer to the tables

later in this section for the 2 digit code, acceptable
value range, and resolution.
The USN 58 is capable of receiving coded instructions

from a personal computer or terminal connected to the
RS-232 I/O port.
<<[Esc]>><<Code>><<Space>><<Value>><<[Return]>>
[Esc] = Escape Key - CHR$(27)
Code = 2 digit code from the table
Instructions must be transmitted to the USN 58 as

escape sequences, that is, a series of keystrokes, the
first of which is always the Escape key (ASCII 27).
The Escape key will be identified in this manual as
[Esc].
Every key press and menu function of the USN 58 can
be operated by remote control. In addition, the current
value (setting) of a particular function may be
requested.
This section provides general instructions on command
sequence format. Function codes, along with the
values for the options associated with the functions,
are provided in tables in this section.
To execute a keypad operation or adjust the setting of
a menu function, transmit the required escape
7-6
Space = Space bar

Value = Desired value from the tables
[Return] Enter key - CHR$(13)
Values must be entered as a multiple of the resolution
shown in the table for each function. As an example,
the following sequence would adjust the range of the
USN 60 to 5.000 inches:
<<[Esc]>><<DW>><<Space>><<5.000>><<[Return]>>
To request the following status, or value, of any
function, use the following sequence:
<<[Escape]>><<AT>><<[Return]>>
Issue 04, 05/04
Remote Codes for the USN 58
The unit will answer with the threshold value,

expressed as a multiple of the resolution shown in the
table. In this case, a response or 40 would indicate a
threshold level of 40%, because the resolution is 1.
Commands can be sent using either a user written
program, or a commercially available serial
communications program. There are many such
inexpensive programs for terminal and modern
communications.
Range is either the adjustment range of the function

or a list options. In either case, values from the Range
column are used in the Value Portion of the escape
sequence.
Resolution specifies the smallest increment for
choosing the value above.
H Note:
The instrument will make no response to a command
until <[Return]> is input.
The tables in this section show all functions, their
related codes, values and resolution. An explanations
of table organization and content follows.
All functions are listed in Table 7-2 by the names that
appear in the menus.
Keypad controls are also listed alphabetically in the
same tables.
Code is the 2 digit code to activate the particular

function, as explained earlier in this section.
7.4 Remote Codes for the

USN 58
It is possible to set or read any parameter in the
instrument over the serial communication port. To read
or set the value of any parameter the following
instructions must be followed.
To read the value of a parameter the following
command string should be sent to the instrument:
<ESC>XX<RETURN> . where XX is the remote code
of the desired parameter
Issue 04, 05/04
The unit will answer with the threshold value,

expressed as a multiple of the resolution shown in the
table. In this case, a response or 40 would indicate a
threshold level of 40%, because the resolution is 1.
Commands can be sent using either a user written
program, or a commercially available serial
communications program. There are many such
inexpensive programs for terminal and modern
communications.
Code is the 2 digit code to activate the particular

function, as explained earlier in this section.
Range is either the adjustment range of the function
or a list options. In either case, values from the Range
column are used in the Value Portion of the escape
sequence.
Resolution specifies the smallest increment for
choosing the value above.
H Note:
The instrument will make no response to a command
until <[Return]> is input.
The tables in this section show all functions, their
related codes, values and resolution. An explanations
of table organization and content follows.
All functions are listed in Table 7-2 by the names that
appear in the menus.
Keypad controls are also listed alphabetically in the
same tables.
7-7
7.4 Remote Codes for the

USN 58
It is possible to set or read any parameter in the
instrument over the serial communication port. To read
or set the value of any parameter the following
instructions must be followed.
To read the value of a parameter the following
command string should be sent to the instrument:
<ESC>XX<RETURN> . where XX is the remote code
of the desired parameter
Issue 04, 05/04
7-7
The instrument will return the following (provided

ECHO mode is ON):
H Note:
*XX<SPACE>YYY<RETURN> Where XX is the

remote code and YYY is the setting / value
To set the value of a parameter the following command
string should be sent to the instrument:
<ESC>XX<SPACE>YYY<RETURN> Where XX is
the remote code and YYY is the setting / value
The state of the ECHO mode (see the end of Table 7-2)
determines what information will be returned by the
instrument to the connected computer. If ECHO mode
(8L) is set to ON, entered command characters and (if
applicable) settings will be returned by the instrument
to the connected computer as soon as <[Return]> is
input. If ECHO mode is set to OFF, only requested
data will be returned to the connected computer.

ECHO mode is ON):
Table 7-2 summarizes the remote codes and allowable
settings for all of the parameters.
7-8
Issue 04, 05/04
H Note:

ECHO mode is ON):
*XX<SPACE>YYY<RETURN>
Where XX is the
To set the value of a parameter the following command
string should be sent to the instrument:
<ESC>XX<SPACE>YYY<RETURN> Where XX is
the remote code and YYY is the setting / value
The state of the ECHO mode (see the end of Table 7-2)
determines what information will be returned by the
instrument to the connected computer. If ECHO mode
(8L) is set to ON, entered command characters and (if
applicable) settings will be returned by the instrument
to the connected computer as soon as <[Return]> is
input. If ECHO mode is set to OFF, only requested
data will be returned to the connected computer.

ECHO mode is ON):
Table 7-2 summarizes the remote codes and allowable
settings for all of the parameters.
7-8
Issue 04, 05/04

Table 7-2
R emote C odes
PAR AMETER
Ascan Pri nt ?
R EMOTE
C OD E
A?
Gate A AGC
AA
C olor Leg (58L)
AC
Gate A Start
AD
Ascan Enhance
AE
Horn
AH
TTL Mode
AL
Gate A Logi c
AM
D GS Ref Attenuati on
AR
Gate A Start Mode
Gate A Threshold
D GS Ampli tude C orrecti on
SETTIN GS
PAR AMETER
R EMOTE C OD E
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
NOT IMPLEMENTED
0: OFF
1: A-Scan
2: Gri d
0.000 i n.480.0 i n.
0.00 mm12.19 M
0: NONE
1: SPARKLE (58L)
2: BASELINE BREAK
3: SPARKLE & BASE BRK (58L)
0: D ISABLE
1: ENABLE
0: TIMED .25 sec
1: TIMED .50 sec
2: TIMED 1.0 sec
3. TIMED 2.0 sec
4: INSTANTANEOUS
5: LATC HED
0: OFF
1: POSITIVE
2: NEGATIVE
3: MEASURE
02.540 dB/i n.
0100.0 dB/m
Gate A Wi dth
AW
Alarm Reset
AX
Gate B AGC
BA
Gate B Start
BD
Backwall Gai n
BG
AS
AT
AV
SETTIN GS
0.010 i n.480.0 i n.
0.25 mm12.19 M
1: RESETS
(Wri te Only)
0: OFF
1: ON
NOT IMPLEMENTED
0.000 i n.480.0 i n.
0.00 mm12.19 M
0.0 to 110.0 dB
Back Li ght
BL
Gate B Logi c
BM
Backwall Mode
BO
0: OFF
1: ON
Baud Rate
BR
0: IP
1: IF
Gate B Start Mode
BS
5 to 90 / steps of 1%
-20.0 dB to 20.0 dB
Gate B Threshold
Gate B Wi dth
BT
BW
0: 1200
1: 2400
2: 4800
3: 9600
4: 19200
5: 38400
6: 57600
7: 115200
0: IP
1: IF
2: GATE #1
5 to 90 /steps of 1%
0.010 i n.480.0 i n.
0.25 mm12.19 M
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: POSITIVE
2: NEGATIVE
3: MEASURE
Issue 04, 05/04
7-9

Table 7-2
R emote C odes
Ascan Pri nt ?
PAR AMETER
R EMOTE
C OD E
A?
Gate A AGC
AA
C olor Leg (58L)
AC
Gate A Start
AD
Ascan Enhance
AE
Horn
AH
TTL Mode
AL
Gate A Logi c
AM
D GS Ref Attenuati on
AR
Gate A Start Mode
Gate A Threshold
D GS Ampli tude C orrecti on
SETTIN GS
PAR AMETER
R EMOTE C OD E
SETTIN GS
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
NOT IMPLEMENTED
0: OFF
1: A-Scan
2: Gri d
0.000 i n.480.0 i n.
0.00 mm12.19 M
0: NONE
1: SPARKLE (58L)
2: BASELINE BREAK
3: SPARKLE & BASE BRK (58L)
0: D ISABLE
1: ENABLE
0: TIMED .25 sec
1: TIMED .50 sec
2: TIMED 1.0 sec
3. TIMED 2.0 sec
4: INSTANTANEOUS
5: LATC HED
0: OFF
1: POSITIVE
2: NEGATIVE
3: MEASURE
02.540 dB/i n.
0100.0 dB/m
Gate A Wi dth
AW
Alarm Reset
AX
Gate B AGC
BA
Gate B Start
BD
Backwall Gai n
BG
Back Li ght
BL
Gate B Logi c
BM
Backwall Mode
BO
0: OFF
1: ON
Baud Rate
BR
AS
0: IP
1: IF
Gate B Start Mode
BS
AT
AV
-20.0 dB to 20.0 dB
Gate B Threshold
Gate B Wi dth
BT
BW
0: 1200
1: 2400
2: 4800
3: 9600
4: 19200
5: 38400
6: 57600
7: 115200
0: IP
1: IF
2: GATE #1
5 to 90 /steps of 1%
0.010 i n.480.0 i n.
0.25 mm12.19 M
Issue 04, 05/04
0.010 i n.480.0 i n.
0.25 mm12.19 M
1: RESETS
(Wri te Only)
0: OFF
1: ON
NOT IMPLEMENTED
0.000 i n.480.0 i n.
0.00 mm12.19 M
0.0 to 110.0 dB
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: POSITIVE
2: NEGATIVE
3: MEASURE
7-9

Table 7-2C ontinued
PAR AME TE R
D ata Logger P ri nt
R E MOTE
C OD E
C?
D elete C urve
CC
C lear Readi ng
CD
C GB Mode
CG
C opy Mode
CM
C OP Y K ey
CO
C olor (58L only)
CR
C GB Offset
CT
C ontrast
TOF D etecti on Gate A
S E TTIN GS
PAR AME TE R
0: No pri nt of data logger readi ngs

1: P ri nt of data logger readi ngs
0: No A cti on
1: D eletes C urve
0: No A cti on
1: D eletes C urrent Readi ng
0: OFF
1: ON
Not Implemented
0: RE P ORT
1: PA RA D UMP
2: LOG to FILE
3: LOG to P ORT
0: OFF
1: ON
Gai n
R E MOTE
C OD E
DB
D B Reference
DC
D i splay D elay
DD
D i rectory E mpti es
DE
Number of avai lable fi les

(Wri te Only)
D elete Fi le
DF
Takes fi le number (from D R command)

(Wri te Only)
Language
DG
0: S cheme 1
1: S cheme 2
2: S cheme 3
3: S cheme 4
-40 to 40 / steps of 1%
Not Implemented
Number of D R fi les
DL
0: E NGLIS H
8: S WE D ISH
1: GE RMA N
9: D UTC H
2: FRE NC H
10: FINNIS H
3: S PA NIS H
11: RUS S IA N
4: ITA LIA N
12: C ZE C H
5: P ORTUGUE S E 13: ROMA NIA N
6: NORWE GIA N
14: S LOV E NIA N
7: D A NIS H
Number of i nstrument fi les (Read Only)
D ual Mode
DM
CX
1-20 (bri ghtness)
D GS Test A ttenuati on
DN
D1
0: FLA NK
1: P E A K
2: ZE RO-C ROS S ING
Fi le D i rectory
DR
0: FLA NK
1: P E A K
0: FLA NK
1: P E A K
Returns 314 amp poi nts or pai rs
(386 i n Zoom)
User Gai n
DS
0.0 24.0 / steps of 0.1 dB
D ate
DT
Get i nstrument date

D ay-Month-Year
TOF D etecti on Gate B
D2
TOF D etecti on IF Gate
D3
D ump A scan
DA
7-10
D ata Logger Pri nt
0: dB reference mode OFF

1: dB reference mode ON
-20.00 uS ec to -3499 uS ec
0: OFF
1: ON
2: Through
02.540 dB /i n.
0100.0 dB /m
File#
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
Issue 04, 05/04
R EMOTE
C OD E
C?
E XAMP LE
File
File
N ame
Type
cltest
cli n
dactest
li nr
dgstest
li nr
fi le1
gri d
gatetest
li nr
gri dtest
gri d
tcgtest
li nr
File
D ate
10/2/2002
10/2/2002
10/2/2002
10/2/2002
10/2/2002
10/2/2002
10/2/2002

Table 7-2C ontinued
PAR AMETER
S E TTIN GS
0 to 110.0 / steps of 0.1 dB
SETTIN GS
PAR AMETER
0: No pri nt of data logger readi ngs

1: Pri nt of data logger readi ngs
0: No Acti on
1: D eletes C urve
0: No Acti on
1: D eletes C urrent Readi ng
0: OFF
1: ON
Not Implemented
0: REPORT
1: PARAD UMP
2: LOG to FILE
3: LOG to PORT
0: OFF
1: ON
Gai n
R EMOTE
C OD E
DB
SETTIN GS
0 to 110.0 / steps of 0.1 dB
D elete C urve
CC
C lear Readi ng
CD
C GB Mode
CG
C opy Mode
CM
C OPY Key
CO
C olor (58L only)
CR
C GB Offset
CT
C ontrast
CX
1-20 (bri ghtness)
D GS Test Attenuati on
DN
TOF D etecti on Gate A
D1
0: FLANK
1: P E A K
2: ZERO-C ROSSING
Fi le D i rectory
DR
0: FLANK
1: P E A K
2: ZERO-C ROSSING
0: FLANK
1: P E A K
2: ZERO-C ROSSING
Returns 314 amp poi nts or pai rs
(386 i n Zoom)
User Gai n
DS
0.0 24.0 / steps of 0.1 dB
D ate
DT
Get i nstrument date

D ay-Month-Year
TOF D etecti on Gate B
D2
TOF D etecti on IF Gate
D3
D ump Ascan
DA
7-10
0: Scheme 1
1: Scheme 2
2: Scheme 3
3: Scheme 4
-40 to 40 / steps of 1%
Not Implemented
D B Reference
DC
D i splay D elay
DD
0: dB reference mode OFF

1: dB reference mode ON
-20.00 uSec to -3499 uSec
D i rectory Empti es
DE
Number of avai lable fi les

(Wri te Only)
D elete Fi le
DF
Takes fi le number (from D R command)

(Wri te Only)
Language
DG
Number of D R fi les
DL
0: ENGLISH
8: SWED ISH
1: GERMAN
9: D UTC H
2: FRENC H
10: FINNISH
3: SPANISH
11: RUSSIAN
4: ITALIAN
12: C ZEC H
5: PORTUGUESE 13: ROMANIAN
6: NORWEGIAN
14: SLOVENIAN
7: D ANISH
Number of i nstrument fi les (Read Only)
D ual Mode
DM
0: OFF
1: ON
2: Through
02.540 dB/i n.
0100.0 dB/m
File#
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
Issue 04, 05/04
EXAMPLE
File
File
N ame
Type
cltest
cli n
dactest
li nr
dgstest
li nr
fi le1
gri d
gatetest
li nr
gri dtest
gri d
tcgtest
li nr
File
D ate
10/2/2002
10/2/2002
10/2/2002
10/2/2002
10/2/2002
10/2/2002
10/2/2002

Table 7-2C ontinued
PAR AME TE R
D GS D elay Veloci ty
R E MOTE
C OD E
DV
Range
DW
E valuate Result
ER
D GS C urve
ES
Fi ni sh TC G C urve
FH
A scan D i splay Mode
FI
Fi le Name
FN
Frequency
FR
Transmi t Fi le
FX
Freeze K ey
FZ
Fi le Upload
FU
Grati cule
GR
Gate S elect
GS
Header #
Header P ri nt ?
H#
H?
Help K ey
HE
S E TTIN GS
PAR AME TE R
0.0098 i n/uS ec0.6299 i n/uS ec

250 M/S ec16000 M/S ec
0.040 i n.480.0 i n.
1.00 mm12.19 M
0: A mp to C urve (% or dB )
1: E RS (E qui v. Ref. S i ze)
From 0.012 i n. to probe's E ff. D i a.
From 0.30 mm to probe's E ff. D i a.
Header Informati on
R E MOTE
C OD E
HI
Hi gh Li mi t
HL
HOME K ey
HM
Thi ckness Mode
HR
No parameters
(Wri te Only)
Hi gh S peed Output Mode
HS
0: HOLLOW
1: FILLE D
2: S MA RT HOLLOW
3: S MA RT FILLE D
Returns current fi le name or sets
current fi le to the i nputted name
(i f i t exi sts) (up to 14 characters)
0: 1 MHz
1: 2 MHz
2: 2.25 MHz
3: 4 MHz
4: 5 MHz
5: 10 MHz
6: 15 MHz
7: .25 2.25 MHz LP
8: 10 25 MHz HP
9: 2 25 MHz B B
Requi res fi le number (from D R
command) (Read Only)
0: OFF
1: ON
Header Ti tle
HT
Takes fi le (as suppli ed wi th FX

command)
0: OFF
1: 20%
2: 10%
0: GATE #1
1: GATE #2
2: IF GATE
1 to 10 / steps of 1
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
IF A GC
IA
Instrument C onfi gurati on
IC
0: OFF
1: ON
Not Implemented
Returns li st of i nstalled modules
Instrument Identi fi cati on
ID
Returns US N 58L or US N 58R
IF Gate Logi c
IM
IF Gate S tart
IS
IF Gate Threshold
IT
0: OFF
1: P OS ITIV E
2: NE GATIV E
3: ME A S URE
0.000 i n.480.0 i n.
0.00 mm12.19 M
IF Gate Wi dth
IW
0.010 i n.480.0 i n.
0.00 mm12.19 M
JIS C olor
Module Query
JC
JH
JIS Mode
JM
Not Implemented
D eci mal word representi ng
i nstalled modules. C onvert to
hexadeci mal; Module i nstalled i f
B i t i s set.
B i t 0TC G Module
B i t 1D GS Module
B i t 2JIS Module
B i t 3C GB Module
B i t 4IF Gate Module
B i t 5P reci si on Thi ckness Module
B i t 6B ackwall A ttenuator Module
B i t 7Rai l Module
B i t 8A utoVeloci ty Module
B i t 9Hi gh S peed Output Module
Not Implemented
Issue 04, 05/04
7-11

Table 7-2C ontinued
PAR AME TE R
D GS D elay Veloci ty
R E MOTE
C OD E
DV
Range
DW
E valuate Result
ER
D GS C urve
ES
Fi ni sh TC G C urve
FH
A scan D i splay Mode
FI
Fi le Name
FN
Frequency
FR
Transmi t Fi le
FX
Freeze K ey
FZ
Fi le Upload
FU
Grati cule
GR
Gate S elect
GS
Header #
Header P ri nt ?
H#
H?
Help K ey
HE
S E TTIN GS
C haracter stri ng up to 16
characters
0.0 i n.480.0 i n.
0.0 mm12.19 M
0: OFF
1: ON
0: NORMA L
1: HIGH-RE S OLUTION
2: P RE C IS ION
Not Implemented
0: None
1: Out at 57600
2: Out at 115900
characters
S E TTIN GS
PAR AME TE R
0.0098 i n/uS ec0.6299 i n/uS ec

250 M/S ec16000 M/S ec
0.040 i n.480.0 i n.
1.00 mm12.19 M
0: A mp to C urve (% or dB )
1: E RS (E qui v. Ref. S i ze)
From 0.012 i n. to probe's E ff. D i a.
From 0.30 mm to probe's E ff. D i a.
Header Informati on
R E MOTE
C OD E
HI
Hi gh Li mi t
HL
HOME K ey
HM
Thi ckness Mode
HR
No parameters
(Wri te Only)
Hi gh S peed Output Mode
HS
0: HOLLOW
1: FILLE D
2: S MA RT HOLLOW
3: S MA RT FILLE D
Returns current fi le name or sets
current fi le to the i nputted name
(i f i t exi sts) (up to 14 characters)
0: 1 MHz
1: 2 MHz
2: 2.25 MHz
3: 4 MHz
4: 5 MHz
5: 10 MHz
6: 15 MHz
7: .25 2.25 MHz LP
8: 10 25 MHz HP
9: 2 25 MHz B B
Requi res fi le number (from D R
command) (Read Only)
0: OFF
1: ON
Header Ti tle
HT
Takes fi le (as suppli ed wi th FX

command)
0: OFF
1: 20%
2: 10%
0: GATE #1
1: GATE #2
2: IF GATE
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
IF A GC
IA
Instrument C onfi gurati on
IC
S E TTIN GS
characters
0.0 i n.480.0 i n.
0.0 mm12.19 M
0: OFF
1: ON
0: NORMA L
1: HIGH-RE S OLUTION
2: P RE C IS ION
Not Implemented
0: None
1: Out at 57600
2: Out at 115900
characters
0: OFF
1: ON
Not Implemented
Returns li st of i nstalled modules
Instrument Identi fi cati on
ID
Returns US N 58L or US N 58R
IF Gate Logi c
IM
IF Gate S tart
IS
0: OFF
1: P OS ITIV E
2: NE GATIV E
3: ME A S URE
0.000 i n.480.0 i n.
0.00 mm12.19 M
IF Gate Threshold
IT
IF Gate Wi dth
IW
0.010 i n.480.0 i n.
0.00 mm12.19 M
JIS C olor
Module Query
JC
JH
JIS Mode
JM
Not Implemented
D eci mal word representi ng
i nstalled modules. C onvert to
hexadeci mal; Module i nstalled i f
B i t i s set.
B i t 0TC G Module
B i t 1D GS Module
B i t 2JIS Module
B i t 3C GB Module
B i t 4IF Gate Module
B i t 5P reci si on Thi ckness Module
B i t 6B ackwall A ttenuator Module
B i t 7Rai l Module
B i t 8A utoVeloci ty Module
B i t 9Hi gh S peed Output Module
Not Implemented
Issue 04, 05/04
7-11

Table 7-2C ontinued
PAR AMETER
JIS Offset
JIS C urve
R EMOTE
C OD E
JO
JV
Gai n Knob Up
K1
Gai n Knob D own
K2
Functi on Knob Up
K3
Functi on Knob D own
K4
Thi ck Reference
KR
LED 1 State
L1
LED 2 State
L2
LED 3 State
L3
Large C har D i splay
LC
Lock Key (58L only)
LK
Low Li mi t
LL
Loss of Si gnal Mode
LO
D GS Transfer C orrecti on
LS
SETTIN GS
PAR AMETER
Not Implemented
Not Implemented
Memo Pri nt ?
Turns Gai n Knob up one cli ck.

(Wri te Only, No Parameter)
Turns Gai n Knob down one cli ck.
Turns Functi on Knob up one cli ck.
Turns Functi on Knob down one cli ck.
0.000 i n.480.0 i n.
0.00 mm12.19 M
Reports State of LED 1.
0: OFF
1: ON
(Read Only, No parameter)
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: Readi ng #1
2: Readi ng #2
3: Readi ng #3
4: Readi ng #4
0: OFF
1: ON
0.0 i n.480.0 i n.
0.0 mm12.19 M
0: OFF
1: ON
-30.0 dB30.0 dB
7-12
R EMOTE C OD E
M?
MENU Key #1
M1
MENU Key #2
M2
MENU Key #3
M3
JIS Offset
JIS C urve
Gai n Knob Up
MENU Key #4
M4
M5
MENU Key #6
M6
Magni fi cati on
MA
0: No Magni fi cati on
1: Magni fi cati on
D GS Mode
MD
0: OFF
1: ON
Magni fy Gate
MG
0: GATE #1
1: GATE #2
2: IF GATE
IF D elay Mode
MI
Master Lock
ML
Memo
MO
Measurement Type
MT
0: C ontact
1: Immersi on
0: OFF
1: ON
<esc>MO # stri ng
#=1-7
(memo li ne number)
stri ng = up
36 characters
0: IPF
1: IFF
2: MULT
Not Implemented
Issue 04, 05/04
R EMOTE
C OD E
JO
JV
K1
Gai n Knob D own
K2
Functi on Knob Up
K3
Functi on Knob D own
K4
Thi ck Reference
KR
LED 1 State
L1
LED 2 State
L2
LED 3 State
L3
Large C har D i splay
LC
Lock Key (58L only)
LK
Low Li mi t
LL
Loss of Si gnal Mode
LO
D GS Transfer C orrecti on
LS
7-12
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
MENU Key #5

Table 7-2C ontinued
PAR AMETER
SETTIN GS
SETTIN GS
PAR AMETER
Not Implemented
Not Implemented
Turns Gai n Knob up one cli ck.
Turns Gai n Knob down one cli ck.
Turns Functi on Knob up one cli ck.
Turns Functi on Knob down one cli ck.
0.000 i n.480.0 i n.
0.00 mm12.19 M
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: Readi ng #1
2: Readi ng #2
3: Readi ng #3
4: Readi ng #4
0: OFF
1: ON
0.0 i n.480.0 i n.
0.0 mm12.19 M
0: OFF
1: ON
-30.0 dB30.0 dB
R EMOTE C OD E
Memo Pri nt ?
M?
MENU Key #1
M1
MENU Key #2
M2
MENU Key #3
M3
SETTIN GS
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
MENU Key #4
M4
MENU Key #5
M5
MENU Key #6
M6
Magni fi cati on
MA
0: No Magni fi cati on
1: Magni fi cati on
D GS Mode
MD
0: OFF
1: ON
Magni fy Gate
MG
0: GATE #1
1: GATE #2
2: IF GATE
IF D elay Mode
MI
Master Lock
ML
Memo
MO
Measurement Type
MT
Issue 04, 05/04
0: C ontact
1: Immersi on
0: OFF
1: ON
<esc>MO # stri ng
#=1-7
(memo li ne number)
stri ng = up
36 characters
0: IPF
1: IFF
2: MULT
Not Implemented
Table 7-2Continued
PARAMETER
Material
REMOTE CODE
MV
SETTINGS
0: Custom material
1: AL Oxide
2: AL Oxide (Shear)
3: Aluminum
4: Aluminum (Shear)
5: Beryllium
6: Beryllium (Shear)
7: Brass
8: Brass (Shear)
9: Cadmium
10: Cadmium (Shear)
11: Copper
12: Copper (Shear)
13: Glass (crown)
14: Glass (crown) (Shear)
15: Glycerin
16: Gold
17: Ice
18: Ice (Shear)
19: Inconel
20: Inconel (Shear)
21: Iron
22: Iron (Shear)
23: Iron (cast)
24: Iron (cast) (Shear)
25: Lead
26: Magnesium
27: Magnesium (Shear)
28: Mercury
29: Molybdenum
30: Molybdenum (Shear)
31: Monel
32: Monel (Shear)
PARAMETER
Material
Issue 04, 05/04
REMOTE CODE
MV
SETTINGS
33: Neoprene
34: Nickel
35: Nickel (Shear)
36: Nylon, 6-6
37: Oil (SAE-30)
38: Platinum
39: Platinum (Shear)
40: Plexiglass
41: Polyethylene
42: Polystyrene
43: Polyurethane
44: Quartz
45: Quartz (Shear)
46: Rubber, Butyl
47: Silver
48: Silver (Shear)
49: Steel, mild
50: Steel, mild (Shear)
51: Steel, stainless
52: Steel, stainless (Shear)
53: Teflon
54: Tin
55: Tin (Shear)
56: Titanium
57: Titanium (Shear)
58: Tungsten
59: Tungsten (Shear)
60: Uranium
61: Uranium (Shear)
62: Water
63: Zinc
64: Zinc (Shear)
65: Zirconium
7-13
Table 7-2Continued
PARAMETER
Material
REMOTE CODE
MV
SETTINGS
0: Custom material
1: AL Oxide
2: AL Oxide (Shear)
3: Aluminum
4: Aluminum (Shear)
5: Beryllium
6: Beryllium (Shear)
7: Brass
8: Brass (Shear)
9: Cadmium
10: Cadmium (Shear)
11: Copper
12: Copper (Shear)
13: Glass (crown)
14: Glass (crown) (Shear)
15: Glycerin
16: Gold
17: Ice
18: Ice (Shear)
19: Inconel
20: Inconel (Shear)
21: Iron
22: Iron (Shear)
23: Iron (cast)
24: Iron (cast) (Shear)
25: Lead
26: Magnesium
27: Magnesium (Shear)
28: Mercury
29: Molybdenum
30: Molybdenum (Shear)
31: Monel
32: Monel (Shear)
PARAMETER
Material
Issue 04, 05/04
REMOTE CODE
MV
SETTINGS
33: Neoprene
34: Nickel
35: Nickel (Shear)
36: Nylon, 6-6
37: Oil (SAE-30)
38: Platinum
39: Platinum (Shear)
40: Plexiglass
41: Polyethylene
42: Polystyrene
43: Polyurethane
44: Quartz
45: Quartz (Shear)
46: Rubber, Butyl
47: Silver
48: Silver (Shear)
49: Steel, mild
50: Steel, mild (Shear)
51: Steel, stainless
52: Steel, stainless (Shear)
53: Teflon
54: Tin
55: Tin (Shear)
56: Titanium
57: Titanium (Shear)
58: Tungsten
59: Tungsten (Shear)
60: Uranium
61: Uranium (Shear)
62: Water
63: Zinc
64: Zinc (Shear)
65: Zirconium
7-13

Table 7-2C ontinued
PAR AMETER
Note #
R EMOTE C OD E
SETTIN GS
N#
1 to 6 / steps of 1
Note Pri nt ?
N?
Noi se C ount
NC
Note
NO
Thi n Reference (AutoC al)
NR
Alarm Select
NS
0: OFF
1: ON
1 through 16
<esc>MO # stri ng
#=1-6
(note number)
stri ng = up
16 characters
0.000 i n.480.0 i n.
0.00 mm12.19 M
0: TTL 1
1: TTL 2
2: TTL 3
PAR AMETER
PARAMETER Key #1
R EMOTE C OD E
P1
PARAMETER Key #2
P2
PARAMETER Key #3
P3
PARAMETER Key #4
P4
Probe Angle
PA
0 to 90 / steps OF 0.1
Freeze Mode
PC
0: A LL
1: P E A K
2: C OMPARE
3: ENVELOPE .5 Sec
4: ENVELOPE 1 Sec
5: ENVELOPE 2 Sec
6: ENVELOPE PEAK
0.0000999.9997 uSec
Noi se Wi ndow
NW
1 through 16
Probe D elay
PD
O-D i ameter
OD
Up to 150.0 i n or 3810 mm
Low li mi t depends on probe
angle, part thi ckness
PRF Mode
PF
IF OFFSET
OF
-999.9997 u/Sec 999.9997

u/Sec
D ampi ng
PG
Operati on Mode
OM
Not Implemented
Energy
0: Analog Output Low w/LOS

1: Analog Output HIgh w/LOS
0 to 3
D GS Probe Name
PN
PRINTER SELEC TION
PR
TC G Poi nt
PRF Value
PT
PV
Loss of Si gnal State
OS
Output D elay
OY
D GS Probe Number
Parameter Pri nt ?
P#
P?
0: OFF
1: ON
7-14
0: AUTOLOW
1: AUTOHIGH
2: MANUAL
3: EXTERNAL
0 - 50 Ohm
1 - 75 ohm
2 - 150 ohm
0: LOW
1: HIGH
User defi ned name (up to
16 characters)
0 : E p so n
1: HP Laserjet
2: HP D eskjet
3: Sei ko D PU-4xxx
1 through 16
15 through 6000 Hz
PI
Issue 04, 05/04

Table 7-2C ontinued
PAR AMETER
Note #
R EMOTE C OD E
SETTIN GS
N#
1 to 6 / steps of 1
Note Pri nt ?
N?
Noi se C ount
NC
Note
NO
Thi n Reference (AutoC al)
NR
Alarm Select
NS
Noi se Wi ndow
NW
O-D i ameter
OD
IF OFFSET
SETTIN GS
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
1 through 16
<esc>MO # stri ng
#=1-6
(note number)
stri ng = up
16 characters
0.000 i n.480.0 i n.
0.00 mm12.19 M
0: TTL 1
1: TTL 2
2: TTL 3
PAR AMETER
PARAMETER Key #1
R EMOTE C OD E
P1
PARAMETER Key #2
P2
PARAMETER Key #3
P3
PARAMETER Key #4
P4
SETTIN GS
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
Probe Angle
PA
0 to 90 / steps OF 0.1
Freeze Mode
PC
1 through 16
Probe D elay
PD
0: A LL
1: P E A K
2: C OMPARE
3: ENVELOPE .5 Sec
4: ENVELOPE 1 Sec
5: ENVELOPE 2 Sec
6: ENVELOPE PEAK
0.0000999.9997 uSec
Up to 150.0 i n or 3810 mm
Low li mi t depends on probe
angle, part thi ckness
PRF Mode
PF
OF
-999.9997 u/Sec 999.9997

u/Sec
D ampi ng
PG
Operati on Mode
OM
Not Implemented
Energy
PI
Loss of Si gnal State
OS
D GS Probe Name
PN
Output D elay
OY
0: Analog Output Low w/LOS

1: Analog Output HIgh w/LOS
0 to 3
PRINTER SELEC TION
PR
D GS Probe Number
Parameter Pri nt ?
P#
P?
TC G Poi nt
PRF Value
PT
PV
7-14
0: OFF
1: ON
Issue 04, 05/04
0: AUTOLOW
1: AUTOHIGH
2: MANUAL
3: EXTERNAL
0 - 50 Ohm
1 - 75 ohm
2 - 150 ohm
0: LOW
1: HIGH
User defi ned name (up to
16 characters)
0 : E p so n
1: HP Laserjet
2: HP D eskjet
3: Sei ko D PU-4xxx
1 through 16
15 through 6000 Hz

Table 7-2C ontinued
PAR AMETER
Readi ng Box 1
R EMOTE C OD E
R1
Readi ng Box 2
R2
Readi ng Box 3
Readi ng Box 4
R3
R4
SETTIN GS
PAR AMETER
Store
R EMOTE C OD E
SD
TC G Start Mode
SM
Seri al Number
D B Step
SN
ST
0: OFF
1: ON
0: S D H
1: F B H
2: B W
Veloci ty
SV
TTL #1
T1
C ontact KK for li sti ng
SETTIN GS
0: OFF
1: ON
0: IP
1: IF
up to 9 characters
0 = LOC K knobs
1 = .1 dB
2 = .5 dB
3 = 1.0 dB
4 = 2.0 dB
5 = 6.0 dB
6 = USER PROG
0.0394 i n./uSec0.6298 i n/uSec
1000 M/Sec16000 M/Sec
0: OFF
1: Gate A
2: Gate B
3: Gate IF
4: Hi gh Li mi t
5: Low Li mi t
0: OFF
1: Gate A
2: Gate B
3: Gate IF
4: Hi gh Li mi t
5: Low Li mi t
0: OFF
1: Gate A
2: Gate B
3: Gate IF
4: Hi gh Li mi t
5: Low Li mi t
0.0110.0 dB
Recall C urrent Fi le
RD
D GS Reference Echo
RE
Recti fy
RF
0: POSITIVE HW
1: NEGATIVE HW
2: FULLWAVE
3: RF
TTL #2
T2
Reject
RJ
0 80 / steps of 1%
TTL #3
T3
D GS Record
RR
TC G Transfer C orrecti on
TC
TC G D elay
TD
Not Implemented
TEST Key
TE
0: OFF
1: ON
Not Implemented
0.024 i n.480.0 i n.
0.60 mm12.19 M
HH MM SS
Not Implemented
D GS Reference Si ze
RS
Output Readi ng #1
S1
0: No record
1: Record
0.020 i n.0.393 i n.
0.50 mm10.0 mm
OFF or Readi ng 1
Output Readi ng #2
Output Readi ng #3
S2
S3
OFF or Readi ng 2
OFF or Readi ng 3
TC G Gai n
Thi ckness
TG
TH
Output Readi ng #4
Ampli tude
S4
SA
OFF or Readi ng 4
0: % SC REEN HEIGHT
1: D B THRESHOLD
Ti me
TC G Slope
TI
TL
Issue 04, 05/04
7-15
Table 7-2C ontinued

PAR AMETER
Readi ng Box 1
R EMOTE C OD E
R1
Recall C urrent Fi le
RD
D GS Reference Echo
RE
Recti fy
RF
0: POSITIVE HW
1: NEGATIVE HW
2: FULLWAVE
3: RF
TTL #2
T2
Reject
RJ
0 80 / steps of 1%
TTL #3
T3
D GS Record
RR
TC G Transfer C orrecti on
TC
SETTIN GS
0: OFF
1: ON
0: IP
1: IF
up to 9 characters
0 = LOC K knobs
1 = .1 dB
2 = .5 dB
3 = 1.0 dB
4 = 2.0 dB
5 = 6.0 dB
6 = USER PROG
0.0394 i n./uSec0.6298 i n/uSec
1000 M/Sec16000 M/Sec
0: OFF
1: Gate A
2: Gate B
3: Gate IF
4: Hi gh Li mi t
5: Low Li mi t
0: OFF
1: Gate A
2: Gate B
3: Gate IF
4: Hi gh Li mi t
5: Low Li mi t
0: OFF
1: Gate A
2: Gate B
3: Gate IF
4: Hi gh Li mi t
5: Low Li mi t
0.0110.0 dB
D GS Reference Si ze
RS
TC G D elay
TD
Not Implemented
0: OFF
1: ON
Not Implemented
0.024 i n.480.0 i n.
0.60 mm12.19 M
HH MM SS
Not Implemented
Readi ng Box 2
R2
Readi ng Box 3
Readi ng Box 4
R3
R4
SETTIN GS
PAR AMETER
Store
R EMOTE C OD E
SD
TC G Start Mode
SM
Seri al Number
D B Step
SN
ST
0: OFF
1: ON
0: S D H
1: F B H
2: B W
Veloci ty
SV
TTL #1
T1
C ontact KK for li sti ng
Output Readi ng #1
S1
0: No record
1: Record
0.020 i n.0.393 i n.
0.50 mm10.0 mm
OFF or Readi ng 1
TEST Key
TE
Output Readi ng #2
Output Readi ng #3
S2
S3
OFF or Readi ng 2
OFF or Readi ng 3
TC G Gai n
Thi ckness
TG
TH
Output Readi ng #4
Ampli tude
S4
SA
OFF or Readi ng 4
0: % SC REEN HEIGHT
1: D B THRESHOLD
Ti me
TC G Slope
TI
TL
Issue 04, 05/04
7-15

Table 7-2C ontinued
PAR AME TE R
TC G Mode
R E MOTE C OD E
TM
TC G A ttenuati on
TC G Offset
Thi ckness P robe
D i splay S tart Mode
TN
TO
TP
TR
Record TC G
TS
TC G P oi nt Ti me, current poi nt
TT
TC G P oi nt Gai n, current poi nt

TC G C urve D i splay
TV
TY
Uni ts
UN
S oftware Versi on
VR
Record AWS Indi cati on
WA
Record AWS Reference
WB
AWS A ttenuati on
AWS Rati ng
AWS Mode
WC
WD
WS
Water P ath Veloci ty
WV
D GS X tal D i ameter
XD
D GS X tal Frequency
D elete D GS Reference
XF
XR
X -Value
XV
Zoom
ZM
E cho
8L
7-16
S E TTIN GS
0: OFF
1: TC G
2: D A C
-4.000 dB /i n. to +4.000 dB /i n.
0 to 110.0 dB
Not Implemented
0: IP
1: IF
0: OFF
1: ON
0.000 i n. to 480.0 i n.
0.00 mm to 12.19 M
0.0 to 110 dB
0: OFF
1: ON
0: MM
1: INC H
2: us
A A .B B .C C .D D .E E
A A : Mai n Operati ng C ode versi on
B B : B oot C ode versi on
C C : D S P C ode versi on
D D : Mai n FP GA C ode versi on
E E : D i splay FP GA C ode versi on
0 - OFF, query - 0 110.0 dB
1 - ON
0 - OFF, query - 0 110.0 dB
1 - ON
-110.0 dB to 110.0 dB
-110.0 dB to 110.0 dB
0: OFF
1: ON
0.0394 i n/S ec0.6298 i n/S ec
1000 M/S ec16000 M/S ec
0.119 i n.1.377 i n.
3.00 mm35.00 mm
0.510.0 MHz
0: No D elete
1: D elete Reference
0.000200.0 i n.
00.0 mm5080 mm
0: OFF
1: ON
0 - No echo of command
characters recei ved
1 - E cho command characters
recei ved after <cr>
Issue 04, 05/04

Table 7-2C ontinued
PAR AME TE R
TC G Mode
7-16
R E MOTE C OD E
TM
TC G A ttenuati on
TC G Offset
Thi ckness P robe
D i splay S tart Mode
TN
TO
TP
TR
Record TC G
TS
TC G P oi nt Ti me, current poi nt
TT
TC G P oi nt Gai n, current poi nt

TC G C urve D i splay
TV
TY
Uni ts
UN
S oftware Versi on
VR
Record AWS Indi cati on
WA
Record AWS Reference
WB
AWS A ttenuati on
AWS Rati ng
AWS Mode
WC
WD
WS
Water P ath Veloci ty
WV
D GS Xtal D i ameter
XD
D GS Xtal Frequency
D elete D GS Reference
XF
XR
X-Value
XV
Zoom
ZM
E cho
8L
S E TTIN GS
0: OFF
1: TC G
2: D A C
-4.000 dB /i n. to +4.000 dB /i n.
0 to 110.0 dB
Not Implemented
0: IP
1: IF
0: OFF
1: ON
0.000 i n. to 480.0 i n.
0.00 mm to 12.19 M
0.0 to 110 dB
0: OFF
1: ON
0: MM
1: INC H
2: us
A A .B B .C C .D D .E E
A A : Mai n Operati ng C ode versi on
B B : B oot C ode versi on
C C : D S P C ode versi on
D D : Mai n FP GA C ode versi on
E E : D i splay FP GA C ode versi on
0 - OFF, query - 0 110.0 dB
1 - ON
0 - OFF, query - 0 110.0 dB
1 - ON
-110.0 dB to 110.0 dB
-110.0 dB to 110.0 dB
0: OFF
1: ON
0.0394 i n/S ec0.6298 i n/S ec
1000 M/S ec16000 M/S ec
0.119 i n.1.377 i n.
3.00 mm35.00 mm
0.510.0 MHz
0: No D elete
1: D elete Reference
0.000200.0 i n.
00.0 mm5080 mm
0: OFF
1: ON
0 - No echo of command
characters recei ved
1 - E cho command characters
recei ved after <cr>
Issue 04, 05/04
DAC/TCG Option
Issue 04, 05/04
8-1
DAC/TCG Option
Issue 04, 05/04
8-1
DAC/TCG Option
Using TCG
The USN 58 is available with optional Time Corrected

Gain (TCG) and Multi-Curve Distance Amplitude
Correction (DAC) functions. These functions are
accessed through the TCG Menu, which is located by
pressing u below the NEXT selection on the HOME
Menu bar. Both the DAC and TCG functions operate
based on a set of user-recorded data points. These
points are recorded from the TCG menu as described
below.
The TCG function displays reflectors of equal size at
equal A-Scan amplitudes, regardless of the reflectors
depth in the test material. The USN 58 accomplishes
this by adjusting the gain at different locations in the
A-scan display, corresponding to different material
depths, to compensate for signal loss (or variation) due
to attenuation, beam spread, or other factors. When
recorded curve is displayed in bold. Each curve, like

the one shown in Figure 8-1, represents constant
reflector size at varying material depth.
8.1 Using TCG

When the TCG function is in use, echoes from equally
sized reflectors appear as the same height on the
A-Scan display. When operating in TCG mode,
will
appear on the display screen. Before using the TCG
function do the following:
TCG is activated,
Step 1: The instrument/probe combination has been

calibrated and all instrument settings (PULSER,
RECEIVER, MATERIAL, etc.) have been made.
Changing these settings after the TCG reference points
are input will affect the accuracy of measurement.
The DAC function displays all echoes at their true

amplitude (without depth compensation). However,
when operating in DAC mode, either one or five
Distance Amplitude Correction curves are
superimposed on the A-Scan display. The original
Step 2: TCG reference points (up to 16) must be

recorded. This process allows the USN 58 to calculate
and compensate for the effect on material depth on
reflector-echo height. The dynamic range of the
TCG function is 40 dB. Maximum curve slope is
12 dB per microsecond. Successive data points do not
appears in the status bar near

the top right-hand corner of the display.
8-2
Issue 04, 05/04
DAC/TCG Option
Using TCG
The USN 58 is available with optional Time Corrected

Gain (TCG) and Multi-Curve Distance Amplitude
Correction (DAC) functions. These functions are
accessed through the TCG Menu, which is located by
pressing u below the NEXT selection on the HOME
Menu bar. Both the DAC and TCG functions operate
based on a set of user-recorded data points. These
points are recorded from the TCG menu as described
below.
The TCG function displays reflectors of equal size at
equal A-Scan amplitudes, regardless of the reflectors
depth in the test material. The USN 58 accomplishes
this by adjusting the gain at different locations in the
A-scan display, corresponding to different material
depths, to compensate for signal loss (or variation) due
to attenuation, beam spread, or other factors. When
recorded curve is displayed in bold. Each curve, like

the one shown in Figure 8-1, represents constant
reflector size at varying material depth.
8.1 Using TCG

When the TCG function is in use, echoes from equally
sized reflectors appear as the same height on the
will
A-Scan display. When operating in TCG mode,
appear on the display screen. Before using the TCG
function do the following:
TCG is activated,
Step 1: The instrument/probe combination has been

calibrated and all instrument settings (PULSER,
RECEIVER, MATERIAL, etc.) have been made.
Changing these settings after the TCG reference points
are input will affect the accuracy of measurement.
The DAC function displays all echoes at their true

amplitude (without depth compensation). However,
when operating in DAC mode, either one or five
Distance Amplitude Correction curves are
superimposed on the A-Scan display. The original
Step 2: TCG reference points (up to 16) must be

recorded. This process allows the USN 58 to calculate
and compensate for the effect on material depth on
reflector-echo height. The dynamic range of the
TCG function is 40 dB. Maximum curve slope is
12 dB per microsecond. Successive data points do not
appears in the status bar near

the top right-hand corner of the display.
8-2
Issue 04, 05/04
DAC/TCG Option
Using TCG
have to decrease in amplitude. That is, the DAC/TCG

curve does not have to have a constantly descending
slope.

Points
TCG reference points are recorded in exactly the same
manner as those points used to create the DAC curve.
Points are typically taken from a standard with equally
sized reflectors (holes) located at various material
depths. The primary echo from each of these points
(for up to a total of 16 echoes) are recorded. When
TCG is active, the instrument compensates for
different material thickness by applying a varying gain
level to echoes at material depths other than the
baseline depth. Either one set of TCG reference points
or one DAC curve can be stored at a time. To program
TCG reference points:
Step 2: Couple the probe to the first reference point

and, using v next to GATE START and GATE
THRESHOLD, adjust the A-Gate so that it is broken by
the primary echo. If necessary, use the Gain Knob to
adjust the gain so that the echo crosses the A-Gate
and the highest peak in gate A is at approximately
80% of full-screen height. The highest peak must not
be higher than 100% full-screen height.
H Note:
Detection mode is automatically set to peak.
Step 3: While the Gate is lined up over the first

reference echo, press v next to the RECORD function.
When the value of the RECORD function changes from
0 to 1, you have recorded the first TCG reference point.
Note that the largest echo to cross the A-Gate will be
treated as the reference echo. The gain value at which
this point is recorded becomes the baseline gain
value.
Step 1: Access the TCG menu by pressing u below

the NEXT selection (on the HOME Menu bar) then
activating the TCG Menu by pressing u below it. The
RECORD submenu will be selected.
Issue 04, 05/04
8-3
DAC/TCG Option
Using TCG
have to decrease in amplitude. That is, the DAC/TCG

curve does not have to have a constantly descending
slope.

Points
TCG reference points are recorded in exactly the same
manner as those points used to create the DAC curve.
Points are typically taken from a standard with equally
sized reflectors (holes) located at various material
depths. The primary echo from each of these points
(for up to a total of 16 echoes) are recorded. When
TCG is active, the instrument compensates for
different material thickness by applying a varying gain
level to echoes at material depths other than the
baseline depth. Either one set of TCG reference points
or one DAC curve can be stored at a time. To program
TCG reference points:

H Note:
Detection mode is automatically set to peak.

0 to 1, you have recorded the first TCG reference point.
this point is recorded becomes the baseline gain
value.

Issue 04, 05/04
8-3
DAC/TCG Option
Using TCG
H Note:
8.1.2 Working with TCG
When a TCG reference point is stored, two

measurement results boxes will be automatically set (if
These result selections will remain locked until TCG
reference recording is completed (Step 5 below).
In TCG mode the instrument uses the recorded

reference points to calculate an amount of gain
correction required to display each echo from samesize reflectors at the same amplitude (Figure 8-1). The
recorded reference point data is stored until replaced or
edited. To use the stored reference points and operate
in TCG mode:
Step 4: Continue to take additional reference points,

following steps 2 and 3, up to a maximum of 16 points
(note that at least two reference points are required).
Step 5: When complete press v next to FINISH.
Step 1: With the TCG Menu accessed, select the

SETUP 1 submenu.
Step 2: Press v next to the TCG MODE function until
Step 6: Note that stored TCG reference points can be

edited as described in section 8.3
ON appears. (
H Note:
Step 3: Press v next to the TCG DISPLAY function to

turn this feature ON or OFF.
TCG reference points, curve, and status (OFF, TCG,

OR DAC) will be stored with data set. When recalled,
curve status will be the same as when it was stored.
For example, if TCG is active when a data set is
stored, it will be active when that data set is recalled.
8-4
will appear)
H Note:
The TCG CURVE graphically represents the level of
gain applied at each of the user-input reference points.
This compensating gain is represented by the height of
the TCG curve while the material depth of each
reference point is represented by its horizontal position
on the display screen.
Issue 04, 05/04
DAC/TCG Option
Using TCG
H Note:
8.1.2 Working with TCG
When a TCG reference point is stored, two

These result selections will remain locked until TCG
reference recording is completed (Step 5 below).
In TCG mode the instrument uses the recorded

reference points to calculate an amount of gain
correction required to display each echo from samesize reflectors at the same amplitude (Figure 8-1). The
edited. To use the stored reference points and operate
in TCG mode:
Step 4: Continue to take additional reference points,

(note that at least two reference points are required).
Step 6: Note that stored TCG reference points can be
edited as described in section 8.3
H Note:
TCG reference points, curve, and status (OFF, TCG,
OR DAC) will be stored with data set. When recalled,
curve status will be the same as when it was stored.
For example, if TCG is active when a data set is
stored, it will be active when that data set is recalled.
8-4

SETUP 1 submenu.
ON appears. (
will appear)
Step 3: Press v next to the TCG DISPLAY function to

turn this feature ON or OFF.
H Note:
The TCG CURVE graphically represents the level of
gain applied at each of the user-input reference points.
This compensating gain is represented by the height of
the TCG curve while the material depth of each
reference point is represented by its horizontal position
on the display screen.
Issue 04, 05/04
DAC/TCG Option
Using TCG
FIGURE 8-1TCG Curve

Issue 04, 05/04
8-5
DAC/TCG Option
Using TCG
FIGURE 8-1TCG Curve

Issue 04, 05/04
8-5
DAC/TCG Option
Using DAC
Using TCG ATTENUATION

When TCG reference points are measured from a
standard of material different from the test material, a
dB adjustment can be applied to each reference point
by using the TCG ATTENUATION function. Note that
this adjustment is automatically applied to the dB level
of all reference points.

SETUP 2 submenu by pressing u.
Step 2: Press v next to the TCG ATTEN function, then
adjust its value from -4.00 dB per inch to +4.00 dB per
inch.
Step 3: Note that this adjustment is applied to all TCG
reference points.
8.2 Using DAC

When displayed, the DAC curve visually represents a
line of constant reflector peaks over a range of
material depths. A new feature of the USN 58 is a
multiple-curve option that displays the recorded DAC
curve plus four dB offset DAC curves simultaneously
8-6
(see 8.2.2). Remember that in DAC mode, the only

deviation from traditional display and operation is the
appearance of the DAC curve. All A-Scan echoes are
displayed at their non-compensated height. A DAC
curve can be based on up to 16 data points (material
depths).
A DAC curve is programmed using a series of samereflector echoes at various depths covering the range
of depths to be inspected in the test material. Because
near field and beam spread vary according to
transducer size and frequency, and materials vary in
attenuation and velocity, DAC must be programmed
differently for different applications.
The dynamic range of the DAC function is 40 dB.
Maximum curve slope is 12 dB per microsecond.
Successive data points do not have to decrease in
amplitude. That is, the DAC/TCG curve does not have
to have a constantly descending slope.
8.2.1 Recording the DAC Curve

DAC Curve points are recorded in exactly the same
manner as those points used to create the TCG
reference. Points are typically taken from a standard
Issue 04, 05/04
DAC/TCG Option
Using DAC
Using TCG ATTENUATION

When TCG reference points are measured from a
standard of material different from the test material, a
dB adjustment can be applied to each reference point
by using the TCG ATTENUATION function. Note that
this adjustment is automatically applied to the dB level
of all reference points.

SETUP 2 submenu by pressing u.
Step 2: Press v next to the TCG ATTEN function, then
adjust its value from -4.00 dB per inch to +4.00 dB per
inch.
Step 3: Note that this adjustment is applied to all TCG
reference points.
8.2 Using DAC

When displayed, the DAC curve visually represents a
line of constant reflector peaks over a range of
material depths. A new feature of the USN 58 is a
multiple-curve option that displays the recorded DAC
curve plus four dB offset DAC curves simultaneously
8-6
(see 8.2.2). Remember that in DAC mode, the only

deviation from traditional display and operation is the
appearance of the DAC curve. All A-Scan echoes are
displayed at their non-compensated height. A DAC
curve can be based on up to 16 data points (material
depths).
A DAC curve is programmed using a series of samereflector echoes at various depths covering the range
of depths to be inspected in the test material. Because
near field and beam spread vary according to
transducer size and frequency, and materials vary in
attenuation and velocity, DAC must be programmed
differently for different applications.
The dynamic range of the DAC function is 40 dB.
Maximum curve slope is 12 dB per microsecond.
Successive data points do not have to decrease in
amplitude. That is, the DAC/TCG curve does not have
to have a constantly descending slope.
8.2.1 Recording the DAC Curve

DAC Curve points are recorded in exactly the same
manner as those points used to create the TCG
reference. Points are typically taken from a standard
Issue 04, 05/04
DAC/TCG Option
Using DAC
with equally sized reflectors (holes) located at various

material depths. The primary echo from each of these
points (for up to a total of 16 echoes) are recorded.
When DAC is active, the instrument displays a curve
that represents echo peaks for constant reflectors at
varying material depth. Either one DAC curve or one
set of TCG reference points can be stored at a time. To
program the DAC Curve:

0 to 1, you have recorded the first DAC Curve point.

this point is recorded becomes the baseline gain.
Step 4: Continue to record additional Curve points,

(note that at least two DAC Curve points are required).
Step 6: Note that stored DAC Curve points can be
edited as described in Section 8.3
H Note:
DAC curve and status (OFF, TCG, OR DAC) will be
stored with data set. When recalled, curve status will
be the same as when it was stored. For example, if
TCG is active when a data set is stored, it will be
active when that data set is recalled.
8.2.2 Working with DAC

In DAC mode the instrument uses the user-input
reference points to create a curve representing the
amplitudes of echoes representing same-size
reflectors at varying material depth (Figure 8-2). The
Issue 04, 05/04
DAC/TCG Option
Using DAC
with equally sized reflectors (holes) located at various

material depths. The primary echo from each of these
points (for up to a total of 16 echoes) are recorded.
When DAC is active, the instrument displays a curve
that represents echo peaks for constant reflectors at
varying material depth. Either one DAC curve or one
set of TCG reference points can be stored at a time. To
program the DAC Curve:

8-7
0 to 1, you have recorded the first DAC Curve point.

this point is recorded becomes the baseline gain.
Step 4: Continue to record additional Curve points,

(note that at least two DAC Curve points are required).
Step 6: Note that stored DAC Curve points can be
edited as described in Section 8.3
H Note:
DAC curve and status (OFF, TCG, OR DAC) will be
stored with data set. When recalled, curve status will
be the same as when it was stored. For example, if
TCG is active when a data set is stored, it will be
active when that data set is recalled.
8.2.2 Working with DAC

In DAC mode the instrument uses the user-input
reference points to create a curve representing the
amplitudes of echoes representing same-size
reflectors at varying material depth (Figure 8-2). The
Issue 04, 05/04
8-7
DAC/TCG Option
Using DAC
FIGURE 8-2DAC Curve
8-8
Issue 04, 05/04
DAC/TCG Option
Using DAC
FIGURE 8-2DAC Curve
8-8
Issue 04, 05/04
DAC/TCG Option
Using DAC

edited. To create a DAC curve and operate in DAC
mode:
Two times the DAC OFFSET value.

SETUP 1 submenu.

SETUP 2 submenu. (Figure 8-2)

DAC appears. The DAC Curve will appear whenever
operating in DAC mode.
Step 2: Press v next to the DAC OFFSET function.

Adjust the value as required. Setting the value to zero
eliminates the offset curves.
Creating DAC Offset Curves

TRANSFER CORRECTION
When operating with DAC turned on, the DAC curve is

typically displayed. Additional curves can also be
offset from the original DAC curve by a user-inputted
amount. The DAC offset amount can range from 0 dB
(no offset curves displayed) to 12 dB. When DAC
OFFSET is set to any value other than zero, four
offset curves will appear in addition to the original DAC
curve. Their spacing from the DAC curve will represent
the
To turn the DAC OFFSET feature on
When DAC is active, adjusting the instrument gain

setting will result in an equal adjustment of the DAC
curve position. To increase the instrument gain without
changing the DAC curve position, use the TRANSFER
CORR function to compensate for varying coupling/
surface conditions.

SETUP 2 submenu.
dB OFFSET value
The negative of the DAC OFFSET value
Issue 04, 05/04
8-9
DAC/TCG Option
Using DAC

edited. To create a DAC curve and operate in DAC
mode:
Two times the DAC OFFSET value.

SETUP 1 submenu.

SETUP 2 submenu. (Figure 8-2)

DAC appears. The DAC Curve will appear whenever
operating in DAC mode.
Step 2: Press v next to the DAC OFFSET function.

Adjust the value as required. Setting the value to zero
eliminates the offset curves.
Creating DAC Offset Curves

TRANSFER CORRECTION
When operating with DAC turned on, the DAC curve is

typically displayed. Additional curves can also be
offset from the original DAC curve by a user-inputted
amount. The DAC offset amount can range from 0 dB
(no offset curves displayed) to 12 dB. When DAC
OFFSET is set to any value other than zero, four
offset curves will appear in addition to the original DAC
curve. Their spacing from the DAC curve will represent
the
To turn the DAC OFFSET feature on
When DAC is active, adjusting the instrument gain

setting will result in an equal adjustment of the DAC
curve position. To increase the instrument gain without
changing the DAC curve position, use the TRANSFER
CORR function to compensate for varying coupling/
surface conditions.

SETUP 2 submenu.
dB OFFSET value
The negative of the DAC OFFSET value
Issue 04, 05/04
8-9
DAC/TCG Option
Editing DAC Curve and TCG Reference Points
Step 2: Press v next to the TRANSFER CORR

function. Adjust the gain value as required. This gain
adjustment will only apply to the echo height, not the
DAC curve position.
8.3 Editing DAC Curve and TCG

Reference Points
After reference points are recorded, their values may
be manually adjusted, or new points may be manually
input (as long as the total number does not exceed 16
points). To edit points or input additional points:
Step 1: With the TCG Menu accessed, select the EDIT

submenu.
Step 2: Press v next to the POINT function until the
desired point number (or NEW if adding an new point)
appears.
Step 3: Press v next to the TIME function to adjust
(input for NEW points) the points horizontal position
8-10
Step 4: Press v next to the TCG GAIN function to

adjust (input for NEW points) the points applied gain
(vertical position). Note that this adjustment applies
regardless of whether the point is used for TCG
reference or a DAC Curve.
Step 5: Press v next to the ENTER function to input
the adjusted point values (or new points position). The
DAC Curve or TCG reference function will be adjusted
to match this edited input.
8.4 Deleting a DAC Curve or TCG

Reference Points
To delete a stored DAC curve or TCG reference points
Step 1: With the TCG Menu activated, select the

SETUP1 submenu.
Step 2: Press v next to the DELETE CURVE! function
(see Figure 8-1).
Issue 04, 05/04
DAC/TCG Option
Editing DAC Curve and TCG Reference Points
Step 2: Press v next to the TRANSFER CORR

function. Adjust the gain value as required. This gain
adjustment will only apply to the echo height, not the
DAC curve position.
8.3 Editing DAC Curve and TCG

Reference Points
After reference points are recorded, their values may
be manually adjusted, or new points may be manually
input (as long as the total number does not exceed 16
points). To edit points or input additional points:
Step 1: With the TCG Menu accessed, select the EDIT

submenu.
desired point number (or NEW if adding an new point)
appears.
Step 3: Press v next to the TIME function to adjust
(input for NEW points) the points horizontal position
8-10
Step 4: Press v next to the TCG GAIN function to

adjust (input for NEW points) the points applied gain
(vertical position). Note that this adjustment applies
regardless of whether the point is used for TCG
reference or a DAC Curve.
Step 5: Press v next to the ENTER function to input
the adjusted point values (or new points position). The
DAC Curve or TCG reference function will be adjusted
to match this edited input.
8.4 Deleting a DAC Curve or TCG

Reference Points
To delete a stored DAC curve or TCG reference points
Step 1: With the TCG Menu activated, select the

SETUP1 submenu.
(see Figure 8-1).
Issue 04, 05/04
DAC/TCG Option
Deleting a DAC Curve or TCG Reference Points

a second time. Then press h to confirm your
selection.
Step 4: The statement in the function box will change
to NO VALID CURVE.
To delete an individual point (without deleting the entire
curve):
Step 1: Press u to activate the EDIT submenu.

desired point number appears.
Step 3: Set the values of both TCG GAIN and TIME
functions to 0.
Step 4: Press v next to ENTER to delete the selected
point.
Issue 04, 05/04
8-11
DAC/TCG Option
Deleting a DAC Curve or TCG Reference Points

a second time. Then press h to confirm your
selection.
Step 4: The statement in the function box will change
to NO VALID CURVE.
To delete an individual point (without deleting the entire
curve):
Step 1: Press u to activate the EDIT submenu.

desired point number appears.
Step 3: Set the values of both TCG GAIN and TIME
functions to 0.
Step 4: Press v next to ENTER to delete the selected
point.
Issue 04, 05/04
8-11
8-12
Issue 04, 05/04
8-12
Issue 04, 05/04
Interface (IF) Gate Option
Issue 04, 05/04
Issue 04, 05/04
9-1
9-1
IF Gate Setup
The USN 58 is available with an optional Interface

Gate. The IF Gate is typically used in immersion
testing applications. It allows measurements to be
referenced from the interface between the immersion
liquid (usually water) and the material being inspected.
The IF Gate monitors the time window from the initial
pulse to this interface surface.
The IF Gate is defined and positioned in the same way
as the A and B Gates. In addition, the IF Gate
crossing can be used as a starting point from which all
time-based measurements are taken. This crossing
can also define the display starting point. If the DAC/
TCG option is installed, the DAC curve or TCG
reference points can be input using either IP (initial
pulse) or the IF Gate crossing as a reference.
Adjust and configure the IF Gate (9.1.3)

Position Gates A and B relative to the IF Gate flankcrossing using the START MODE function (9.1.4)
Display measurements based on IF Gate crossing
echoes (9.2.1)
Use the IF OFFSET feature to adjust the value of
time-based measurements referenced from the IF
Gate crossing (9.2.2)
9.1 IF Gate Setup

To confirm that the IF Gate option is installed in your
instrument:
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Step 1: Select the BASIC Menu.
Determine if the IF Gate option is installed
Step 2: From the BASIC Menu, select the OPTIONS

Submenu.
Specify Immersion-type testing and input a waterpath velocity (9.1.1)

Set the A-Scan display to begin with the first IF
Gate flank crossing (9.1.2)
9-2
Step 3: Select the INSTALLED OPT. function, then

press v or turn the Function Knob to list each option
installed in your instrument. If IF GATE is listed, this
Issue 04, 05/04
IF Gate Setup
The USN 58 is available with an optional Interface

Gate. The IF Gate is typically used in immersion
testing applications. It allows measurements to be
referenced from the interface between the immersion
liquid (usually water) and the material being inspected.
The IF Gate monitors the time window from the initial
pulse to this interface surface.
Adjust and configure the IF Gate (9.1.3)

Position Gates A and B relative to the IF Gate flankcrossing using the START MODE function (9.1.4)
Display measurements based on IF Gate crossing
echoes (9.2.1)
Use the IF OFFSET feature to adjust the value of
time-based measurements referenced from the IF
Gate crossing (9.2.2)
The IF Gate is defined and positioned in the same way

as the A and B Gates. In addition, the IF Gate
crossing can be used as a starting point from which all
time-based measurements are taken. This crossing
can also define the display starting point. If the DAC/
TCG option is installed, the DAC curve or TCG
reference points can be input using either IP (initial
pulse) or the IF Gate crossing as a reference.
9.1 IF Gate Setup
In this chapter you will learn how to:
Determine if the IF Gate option is installed
Step 2: From the BASIC Menu, select the OPTIONS

Submenu.
Specify Immersion-type testing and input a waterpath velocity (9.1.1)

Set the A-Scan display to begin with the first IF
Gate flank crossing (9.1.2)
9-2
To confirm that the IF Gate option is installed in your

instrument:
Step 3: Select the INSTALLED OPT. function, then

press v or turn the Function Knob to list each option
installed in your instrument. If IF GATE is listed, this
Issue 04, 05/04
IF Gate Setup
option is installed in your instrument. If not, contact

Agfa NDT to install the option at our facility.
9.1.1 Immersion Testing Method

The IF Gate option allows you to specify two types of
measurement methods:
CONTACT-the probe is in physical contact with the test
piece IMMERSION-sound energy is transmitted from
the probe, through the immersion fluid (usually water),
and to the material being tested.
When the measurement method is set to IMMERSION,
a WATER PATH VELOCITY can be input. The
instruments default value is set to the acoustic
velocity of water (0.0583 inch/microsecond). To select
the IMMERSION measurement method and adjust the
water path velocity:
Step 1: Select the GATES Menu.

Step 2: Select the IF ADVanced Submenu.
With this function setting, measurement of the

immersion fluid thickness, the position of the IF Gate,
and the IF Gate width are calculated using the fluid
velocity.
Step 4: With the IMMERSION measuring method

selected, the WATER PATH VELocity function is
enabled. You may manually adjust the acoustic velocity
for the immersion fluid (usually water). The default
value (0.0583 inch/microsecond) is set to the acoustic
velocity of water.
H Note:
When DELAY MODE is set to IMMERSION, all
calculations that consider the elapsed time from the
initial pulse to the IF Gate crossings are based on the
WATER PATH VELocity. When the IF Gate is used in
other than immersion applications (such as with a
contact probe) be sure to set the DELAY MODE to
CONTACT. This ensures that the inputted acoustic
velocity of the material being tested is used in calculations based on the IF Gate crossing.
Step 3: Select the DELAY MODE function, then press

v or turn the Function Knob to select IMMERSION.
Issue 04, 05/04
9-3
IF Gate Setup
option is installed in your instrument. If not, contact

Agfa NDT to install the option at our facility.
9.1.1 Immersion Testing Method

The IF Gate option allows you to specify two types of
measurement methods:
CONTACT-the probe is in physical contact with the test
piece IMMERSION-sound energy is transmitted from
the probe, through the immersion fluid (usually water),
and to the material being tested.
When the measurement method is set to IMMERSION,
a WATER PATH VELOCITY can be input. The
instruments default value is set to the acoustic
velocity of water (0.0583 inch/microsecond). To select
the IMMERSION measurement method and adjust the
water path velocity:

With this function setting, measurement of the

immersion fluid thickness, the position of the IF Gate,
and the IF Gate width are calculated using the fluid
velocity.
Step 4: With the IMMERSION measuring method

selected, the WATER PATH VELocity function is
enabled. You may manually adjust the acoustic velocity
for the immersion fluid (usually water). The default
value (0.0583 inch/microsecond) is set to the acoustic
velocity of water.
H Note:
When DELAY MODE is set to IMMERSION, all
calculations that consider the elapsed time from the
initial pulse to the IF Gate crossings are based on the
WATER PATH VELocity. When the IF Gate is used in
other than immersion applications (such as with a
contact probe) be sure to set the DELAY MODE to
CONTACT. This ensures that the inputted acoustic
velocity of the material being tested is used in calculations based on the IF Gate crossing.
Step 3: Select the DELAY MODE function, then press

v or turn the Function Knob to select IMMERSION.
Issue 04, 05/04
9-3
IF Gate Setup

Starting Point
to the display starting point, moving it left or right. To

adjust the display delay:
When not operating with the IF Gate enabled, the

A-Scan display starting point is automatically set to IP
(Initial Pulse). With the IF Gate option enabled, the
display starting point can be set to either IP or IF.
When set to IF, the left-hand side of the A-Scan is
aligned with the first IF-Gate flank crossing. To set the
A-Scan display starting point:

Step 2: Select the CONFIG Submenu.
Step 3: Select the DISPLAY START function, and then
press v until the value is set to IF. The left-hand side
of the A-Scan display will align with the first IF Gate
flank crossing. When no IF Gate crossing occurs, the
displays starting point aligns with the IF Gates
starting point.
Note that when operating in either the IF or IP display
start configuration, the displays exact starting point
can be adjusted using the DISPLAY DELAY function.
This function applies a positive or negative time delay
9-4
Step 1: Press h.
Step 2: Select the DISPLAY DELAY function, then
press v or turn the function knob to move the display
starting point to the left (positive delay) or right
(negative delay).
9.1.3 Configuring the IF Gate

The IF Gate is positioned and configured in the same
manner as the A and B Gates, with the exception of
the START MODE function (described in the next
section). All gate positioning functions are described in
Chapter 3. Following is a list of the functions that apply
to the IF Gate:
Gate Start (3.1.1)
Gate Width (3.1.1)
Gate Threshold (3.1.1)
Gate Detection (Peak or Flank - 3.1.2)
Issue 04, 05/04
IF Gate Setup

Starting Point
to the display starting point, moving it left or right. To

adjust the display delay:

A-Scan display starting point is automatically set to IP
(Initial Pulse). With the IF Gate option enabled, the
display starting point can be set to either IP or IF.
When set to IF, the left-hand side of the A-Scan is
aligned with the first IF-Gate flank crossing. To set the
A-Scan display starting point:

Step 2: Select the CONFIG Submenu.
Step 3: Select the DISPLAY START function, and then
press v until the value is set to IF. The left-hand side
of the A-Scan display will align with the first IF Gate
flank crossing. When no IF Gate crossing occurs, the
displays starting point aligns with the IF Gates
starting point.
Note that when operating in either the IF or IP display
start configuration, the displays exact starting point
can be adjusted using the DISPLAY DELAY function.
This function applies a positive or negative time delay
9-4
Step 1: Press h.
Step 2: Select the DISPLAY DELAY function, then
press v or turn the function knob to move the display
starting point to the left (positive delay) or right
(negative delay).
9.1.3 Configuring the IF Gate

The IF Gate is positioned and configured in the same
manner as the A and B Gates, with the exception of
the START MODE function (described in the next
section). All gate positioning functions are described in
Chapter 3. Following is a list of the functions that apply
to the IF Gate:
Gate Start (3.1.1)
Gate Width (3.1.1)
Gate Threshold (3.1.1)
Gate Detection (Peak or Flank - 3.1.2)
Issue 04, 05/04
Measurements Based on IF Gate Crossings
Magnify Gate (3.1.3)
Step 2: Select the GATEMODE Submenu.
Gate Alarm Logic (also allows the gate to be Turned

Off - 3.1.4)
Step 3: Select the gate you wish to position using the

9.1.4 Setting Gates A and B Relative to IF

Gate Using START MODE
Step 4: Select the START MODE function, and then

press v to set the starting point reference to IP, IF
GATE, or A GATE.

starting points for Gates A and B are positioned a
specified distance from the initial pulse (IP) or Gate B
is positioned a specified distance from the start of
Gate A. With the IF Gate option enabled, the starting
point for each gate can be measured from the first
flank crossing point in the IF Gate. Further, when the
IF Gate option is enabled, and Gate Bs starting point
is positioned a specified distance from the first flank
crossing in Gate A, any change in Gate As first flank
crossing point will cause an equal change in the
starting point of Gate B. (see Figure 9-1)
To position a gates starting point a specified distance
from another Gates first flank crossing (using START
MODE function):

H Note:
When A Gates or B Gates START MODE function is
set to IF GATE, any change in the IF-Gates first flank
crossing point will automatically produce an equal
change in the starting point of the linked gate. This
feature, known as Automatic Gate Tracking, exists
between Gates A and B when B-Gates START MODE
is set to A-GATE.
9.2 Measurements Based on IF

Gate Crossings
The IF Gate is typically used in immersion testing
applications. It allows measurements to be referenced
from the interface between the immersion liquid
Issue 04, 05/04
9-5
Magnify Gate (3.1.3)
Step 2: Select the GATEMODE Submenu.
Gate Alarm Logic (also allows the gate to be Turned

Off - 3.1.4)
Step 3: Select the gate you wish to position using the

9.1.4 Setting Gates A and B Relative to IF

Gate Using START MODE
Step 4: Select the START MODE function, and then

press v to set the starting point reference to IP, IF
GATE, or A GATE.

starting points for Gates A and B are positioned a
specified distance from the initial pulse (IP) or Gate B
is positioned a specified distance from the start of
Gate A. With the IF Gate option enabled, the starting
point for each gate can be measured from the first
flank crossing point in the IF Gate. Further, when the
IF Gate option is enabled, and Gate Bs starting point
is positioned a specified distance from the first flank
crossing in Gate A, any change in Gate As first flank
crossing point will cause an equal change in the
starting point of Gate B. (see Figure 9-1)
To position a gates starting point a specified distance
from another Gates first flank crossing (using START
MODE function):

H Note:
When A Gates or B Gates START MODE function is
set to IF GATE, any change in the IF-Gates first flank
crossing point will automatically produce an equal
change in the starting point of the linked gate. This
feature, known as Automatic Gate Tracking, exists
between Gates A and B when B-Gates START MODE
is set to A-GATE.
9.2 Measurements Based on IF

Gate Crossings
The IF Gate is typically used in immersion testing
applications. It allows measurements to be referenced
from the interface between the immersion liquid
Issue 04, 05/04
9-5
FIGURE 9-1The START MODE function allows you to link the starting point of Gates A and B to the IF Gates first
flank crossing point. The flank crossing is always used as a reference, whether the IF Gates detection setting is set to
flank or peak. It also allows you to link the starting point of Gate B to Gate A.
9-6
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 9-1The START MODE function allows you to link the starting point of Gates A and B to the IF Gates first
flank crossing point. The flank crossing is always used as a reference, whether the IF Gates detection setting is set to
flank or peak. It also allows you to link the starting point of Gate B to Gate A.
9-6
Issue 04, 05/04
(usually water) and the material being inspected. In

immersion applications, the IF Gate is usually
positioned so that the first echo that returns from the
immersion fluid-to-test material interface triggers it. The
starting positions of Gates A and B are then usually
tied to the IF Gates first flank crossing point (using the
START MODE function located in the GATEMODE
Submenu).
Gate-to-gate multi-echo measurements (such as SAI)

are only available for display when the trailing gates
(in this case, A-Gate) START MODE is set to the
leading gate (in this case, IF Gate). See 9.1.4 to set
START MODE. This also applies to the other multiecho measurements, SBI and SBA.
9.2.1 IF-Gate Measurements
9.2.2 Using IF OFFSET
When the IF Gate is enabled, the measured values

shown in Figure 9-2 can be displayed (see section 3.5
to select measured readings for display using the
RESULTS Menu). Its important to note that the
relative distance measurements (such as SBI, the
thickness between the IF Gate trigger and the B Gate
trigger) can only be displayed if the later gates START
MODE (located in the GATEMODE Submenu) is set to
IF GATE.
When the IF Gate option is enabled, time based

measurements taken from the IF Gate detection point
(flank or peak crossing depending on the IF Gate
DETECTION MODE setting) can be adjusted using the
IF OFFSET function. Setting IF OFFSET equal to any
value other than zero modifies the calculated Time-ofFlight (TOF) to the IF Gate detection point. The
OFFSET function also modifies all time based
measurements that are referenced to this IF Gate
detection point. To adjust the IF OFFSET:
H Note:

Issue 04, 05/04
9-7
H Note:
(usually water) and the material being inspected. In

immersion applications, the IF Gate is usually
positioned so that the first echo that returns from the
immersion fluid-to-test material interface triggers it. The
starting positions of Gates A and B are then usually
tied to the IF Gates first flank crossing point (using the
START MODE function located in the GATEMODE
Submenu).
Gate-to-gate multi-echo measurements (such as SAI)

are only available for display when the trailing gates
(in this case, A-Gate) START MODE is set to the
leading gate (in this case, IF Gate). See 9.1.4 to set
START MODE. This also applies to the other multiecho measurements, SBI and SBA.
9.2.1 IF-Gate Measurements
9.2.2 Using IF OFFSET
When the IF Gate is enabled, the measured values

shown in Figure 9-2 can be displayed (see section 3.5
to select measured readings for display using the
RESULTS Menu). Its important to note that the
relative distance measurements (such as SBI, the
thickness between the IF Gate trigger and the B Gate
trigger) can only be displayed if the later gates START
MODE (located in the GATEMODE Submenu) is set to
IF GATE.
When the IF Gate option is enabled, time based

measurements taken from the IF Gate detection point
(flank or peak crossing depending on the IF Gate
DETECTION MODE setting) can be adjusted using the
IF OFFSET function. Setting IF OFFSET equal to any
value other than zero modifies the calculated Time-ofFlight (TOF) to the IF Gate detection point. The
OFFSET function also modifies all time based
measurements that are referenced to this IF Gate
detection point. To adjust the IF OFFSET:

Issue 04, 05/04
9-7
Step 3: Select the IF OFFSET function, then press v

or turn the Function Knob to adjust the level of offset.
This will modify all time based measurements that
depend on an IF Gate crossing.
H Note:
The IF OFFSET function directly changes the TOF
calculated for the IF Gate detection point. This has the
effect of adjusting measured values whenever time
based measurements depend on an IF Gate crossing.
Do not set the offset value to any number other than
zero unless you are familiar with the effects of this
offset on the measured data.
9-8
Issue 04, 05/04
Step 3: Select the IF OFFSET function, then press v

or turn the Function Knob to adjust the level of offset.
This will modify all time based measurements that
depend on an IF Gate crossing.
H Note:
The IF OFFSET function directly changes the TOF
calculated for the IF Gate detection point. This has the
effect of adjusting measured values whenever time
based measurements depend on an IF Gate crossing.
Do not set the offset value to any number other than
zero unless you are familiar with the effects of this
offset on the measured data.
9-8
Issue 04, 05/04
FIGURE 9-2These readings can be displayed only when the IF Gate option is enabled.
Issue 04, 05/04
9-9
FIGURE 9-2These readings can be displayed only when the IF Gate option is enabled.
Issue 04, 05/04
9-9
9-10
Issue 04, 05/04
9-10
Issue 04, 05/04
DGS Option
Issue 04, 05/04
10-1
DGS Option
Issue 04, 05/04
10
10
10-1
DGS Option
Using DGS
The USN 58 is available with an optional Distance Gain

Sizing (DGS) feature. This feature is accessed through
the DGS menu, which is located by pressing u below
the NEXT selection on the HOME menu bar. The DGS
feature allows the user to use a particular probe to
compare a reflector in a test piece with a known
standard reflector.
The DGS feature relies on a reference curve based on
a recorded reference point. The procedure for recording
a reference point using the DGS Menu is described
below.
10.1 Using DGS

When the DGS function is in use, echoes from equally
sized reflectors located at varying depths appear to lie
along the DGS Reference Curve. When operating in
DGS mode, the DGS Reference Curve appears on the
display screen. Before using the DGS function, do the
following:
Calibrate the instrument/probe combination
Make all required instrument settings related to the
pulser, receiver, and material-velocity settings.
10-2
Calibrating or changing certain settings after the DGS

Reference Echo has been recorded will cause the
stored reference to be deleted.

Record the Reference Echo
Before using the DGS feature to evaluate reflectors in
test pieces, the characteristics of the attached probe
must be specified, certain characteristics of the
reference standard must be input, and a reference
echo must be stored. To specify the probe
characteristics:
Step 1: Press u below the NEXT selection on the

HOME menu bar, then press the correct u key to
access the DGS menu.
Step 2: Select the SETUP submenu, then the PROBE
# function. Once activated, this function allows you to
choose from the list of probe types in Table 10-1.
These are probes for which probe characteristics are
already input in the USN 58, with the exception of the
user-defined probe (PROBE # 1):
Issue 04, 05/04
DGS Option
Using DGS
The USN 58 is available with an optional Distance Gain

Sizing (DGS) feature. This feature is accessed through
the DGS menu, which is located by pressing u below
the NEXT selection on the HOME menu bar. The DGS
feature allows the user to use a particular probe to
compare a reflector in a test piece with a known
standard reflector.
The DGS feature relies on a reference curve based on
a recorded reference point. The procedure for recording
a reference point using the DGS Menu is described
below.
10.1 Using DGS

When the DGS function is in use, echoes from equally
sized reflectors located at varying depths appear to lie
along the DGS Reference Curve. When operating in
DGS mode, the DGS Reference Curve appears on the
display screen. Before using the DGS function, do the
following:
Calibrate the instrument/probe combination
Make all required instrument settings related to the
pulser, receiver, and material-velocity settings.
10-2
Calibrating or changing certain settings after the DGS

Reference Echo has been recorded will cause the
stored reference to be deleted.

Record the Reference Echo
Before using the DGS feature to evaluate reflectors in
test pieces, the characteristics of the attached probe
must be specified, certain characteristics of the
reference standard must be input, and a reference
echo must be stored. To specify the probe
characteristics:
Step 1: Press u below the NEXT selection on the

HOME menu bar, then press the correct u key to
access the DGS menu.
Step 2: Select the SETUP submenu, then the PROBE
# function. Once activated, this function allows you to
choose from the list of probe types in Table 10-1.
These are probes for which probe characteristics are
already input in the USN 58, with the exception of the
user-defined probe (PROBE # 1):
Issue 04, 05/04
DGS Option
Using DGS
Table 10-1
DGS PROBE-NUMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Instrument
Setting
Probe
Type
Instrument
Setting
Probe
Type
PROBE #1
User defined
PROBE #14
SWB45-2
PROBE #2
B1S
PROBE #15
SWB60-2
PROBE #3
B2S
PROBE #16
SWB70-2
PROBE #4
B4S
PROBE #17
SWB45-5
PROBE #5
MB2S
PROBE #18
SWB60-5
PROBE #6
MB4S
PROBE #19
SWB70-5
PROBE #7
MB5S
PROBE #20
WB45-1
PROBE #8
MWB45-2
PROBE #21
WB60-1
PROBE #9
MWB60-2
PROBE #22
WB70-1
PROBE #10
MWB70-2
PROBE #23
WB45-2
PROBE #11
MWB45-4
PROBE #24
WB60-2
PROBE #12
MWB60-4
PROBE #25
WB70-2
PROBE #13
MWB70-4
Step 3: If the user-defined probe type (PROBE #1) is

selected, you can then select the PROBE NAME
function. Then use the Gain and Function knobs (the
Gain knob changes location within the name, the
Function knob changes the character value) to input a
new name. Note that selecting any PROBE # value
other than 1 will prevent you from modifying the
PROBE NAME or any of the other settings described
in Step 4.
selected, you must then select the DGS PROBE
submenu and input the characteristics for the probe
youve connected including:
XTAL FREQUENCYThe probes frequency rating
EFF. DIAMETERThe probe elements effective
diameter rating
DELAY VELOCITYUser determined delay-line
velocity
Note that these characteristics cant be changed for
any probes other than PROBE #1.
Issue 04, 05/04
10-3
DGS Option
Using DGS
Table 10-1
DGS PROBE-NUMBER ASSIGNMENTS
Instrument
Setting
Probe
Type
Instrument
Setting
Probe
Type
PROBE #1
User defined
PROBE #14
SWB45-2
PROBE #2
B1S
PROBE #15
SWB60-2
PROBE #3
B2S
PROBE #16
SWB70-2
PROBE #4
B4S
PROBE #17
SWB45-5
PROBE #5
MB2S
PROBE #18
SWB60-5
PROBE #6
MB4S
PROBE #19
SWB70-5
PROBE #7
MB5S
PROBE #20
WB45-1
PROBE #8
MWB45-2
PROBE #21
WB60-1
PROBE #9
MWB60-2
PROBE #22
WB70-1
PROBE #10
MWB70-2
PROBE #23
WB45-2
PROBE #11
MWB45-4
PROBE #24
WB60-2
PROBE #12
MWB60-4
PROBE #25
WB70-2
PROBE #13
MWB70-4

selected, you can then select the PROBE NAME
function. Then use the Gain and Function knobs (the
Gain knob changes location within the name, the
Function knob changes the character value) to input a
new name. Note that selecting any PROBE # value
other than 1 will prevent you from modifying the
PROBE NAME or any of the other settings described
in Step 4.
selected, you must then select the DGS PROBE
submenu and input the characteristics for the probe
youve connected including:
XTAL FREQUENCYThe probes frequency rating
EFF. DIAMETERThe probe elements effective
diameter rating
DELAY VELOCITYUser determined delay-line
velocity
Note that these characteristics cant be changed for
any probes other than PROBE #1.
Issue 04, 05/04
10-3
DGS Option
Using DGS

Defines the DGS Curve
Prior to generating the DGS curve, a test standard with
a known reflector must be used to define a reference
point. Acceptable test standards include these reference types:
BWBackwall echo with reference defect size
defined as infinity
SDHSide Drilled Hole with a reference defect size
defined as the holes diameter
FBHFlat Bottom Hole with a reference defect size
equal to the holes facial diameter
Follow these steps and Figure 10-1 to record a reference echo:
Step 1: Select the REF ECHO submenu, then the

REFERENCE TYPE function. Once activated, this
function allows you to select one of the three reference
types described above, and specify the size of the
known standards reference flaw.
10-4
Step 2: Couple the probe to the known standard,

capture the reference flaw so that its reflected echo is
displayed on the instruments A-Scan, and adjust the
A-Gates starting point to ensure that the resulting
echo triggers the gate.
Step 3: Adjust the gain knob until the reference flaws
A-Scan peak measures 80% of FSH (A%A = 80%).
Step 4: With the probe coupled to the standard, and
the reference flaws echo captured by the A-Gate,
press v next to the RECORD REF function to store a
DGS reference echo.
H Note:
will
When a DGS reference echo is stored, the
appear in the displays status bar (upper right corner).
Note that only one DGS reference echo can be stored
at a time. To delete the currently stored reference,
access the REF CORR submenu, select DELETE
REF, and follow the on-screen prompts.
H Note:
When a DGS reference echo is stored, two
Issue 04, 05/04
DGS Option
Using DGS

Defines the DGS Curve
Prior to generating the DGS curve, a test standard with
a known reflector must be used to define a reference
point. Acceptable test standards include these reference types:
BWBackwall echo with reference defect size
defined as infinity
SDHSide Drilled Hole with a reference defect size
defined as the holes diameter
FBHFlat Bottom Hole with a reference defect size
equal to the holes facial diameter
Follow these steps and Figure 10-1 to record a reference echo:
Step 1: Select the REF ECHO submenu, then the

REFERENCE TYPE function. Once activated, this
function allows you to select one of the three reference
types described above, and specify the size of the
known standards reference flaw.
Step 2: Couple the probe to the known standard,

capture the reference flaw so that its reflected echo is
displayed on the instruments A-Scan, and adjust the
A-Gates starting point to ensure that the resulting
echo triggers the gate.
Step 3: Adjust the gain knob until the reference flaws
A-Scan peak measures 80% of FSH (A%A = 80%).
Step 4: With the probe coupled to the standard, and
the reference flaws echo captured by the A-Gate,
press v next to the RECORD REF function to store a
DGS reference echo.
H Note:
When a DGS reference echo is stored, the
will
appear in the displays status bar (upper right corner).
Note that only one DGS reference echo can be stored
at a time. To delete the currently stored reference,
access the REF CORR submenu, select DELETE
REF, and follow the on-screen prompts.
H Note:
When a DGS reference echo is stored, two
10-4
Issue 04, 05/04
DGS Option
Using DGS
FIGURE 10-1Recording a DGS reference point from which a DGS Curve will be generated.
Issue 04, 05/04
10-5
DGS Option
Using DGS
FIGURE 10-1Recording a DGS reference point from which a DGS Curve will be generated.
Issue 04, 05/04
10-5
DGS Option
Using DGS

DGS reference is deleted.
The following two adjustments should be made prior to
recording a reference echo. Changing these values
after the DGS curve is generated will cause the curve
to be deleted.
REF ATTEN (found in the REF CORR submenu)
Specify a sound attenuation value (in dB per inch or
mm of material thickness) for the material from which
the known standard is made.
AMPL CORRECT (found in the REF CORR
submenu)Correction required when using an anglebeam type probe. This value is specified on the probes
data sheet.
10.1.3 Display and Adjust the DGS Curve
curve it simply removes the curve from the display

and disables the DGS mode. Once the DGS Curve is
displayed, it can be adjusted using one of these three
functions:
TEST ATTEN (found in the MAT ATTN submenu)
the test piece is made.
TRANSFER CORR. (found in the MAT ATTN submenu)
dB compensation for difference in coupling conditions between the known standard and the test piece.
DGS CURVE (found in the SETUP and EVALUATE
submenus)Positions the probes DGS Curve based
on the size of the reflector (flaw) being tested. The
setting will usually depend on the largest acceptable
flaw size.
Once a reference echo has been recorded, the DGS

curve is displayed simply by selecting the SETUP
submenu in the DGS menu, then setting the DGS
MODE function to ON (Figure 10-2). Note that
switching this value to OFF does not delete the
10-6
Issue 04, 05/04
DGS Option
Using DGS

DGS reference is deleted.
The following two adjustments should be made prior to
recording a reference echo. Changing these values
after the DGS curve is generated will cause the curve
to be deleted.
REF ATTEN (found in the REF CORR submenu)
the known standard is made.
AMPL CORRECT (found in the REF CORR
submenu)Correction required when using an anglebeam type probe. This value is specified on the probes
data sheet.
10.1.3 Display and Adjust the DGS Curve
curve it simply removes the curve from the display

and disables the DGS mode. Once the DGS Curve is
displayed, it can be adjusted using one of these three
functions:
TEST ATTEN (found in the MAT ATTN submenu)
the test piece is made.
TRANSFER CORR. (found in the MAT ATTN submenu)
dB compensation for difference in coupling conditions between the known standard and the test piece.
DGS CURVE (found in the SETUP and EVALUATE
submenus)Positions the probes DGS Curve based
on the size of the reflector (flaw) being tested. The
setting will usually depend on the largest acceptable
flaw size.
Once a reference echo has been recorded, the DGS

curve is displayed simply by selecting the SETUP
submenu in the DGS menu, then setting the DGS
MODE function to ON (Figure 10-2). Note that
switching this value to OFF does not delete the
10-6
Issue 04, 05/04
DGS Option
Using DGS
FIGURE 10-2DGS Curve
Issue 04, 05/04
10-7
DGS Option
Using DGS
FIGURE 10-2DGS Curve
Issue 04, 05/04
10-7
DGS Option
Evaluating Test Samples in DGS Mode
10.2 Evaluating Test Samples in

DGS Mode
Once the curve is recorded and displayed (by turning
DGS MODE on), echoes are automatically compared
to the DGS curve and evaluated based on the recorded
reference. There are two ways in which this comparison
can be made:
A%cAAmplitude of the signal crossing the A-Gate
as a percentage of the corresponding DGS Curve
amplitude. This is shown in Figure 10-2. Note that this
comparison method will change to dBcA (the dB
equivalent height of the signal above or below the
corresponding DGS Curve amplitude) when the AMP
MODE function is set to dB THRESHOLD.
ERSEquivalent Reflector Size evaluates the
reflected echo and calculates the equivalent reflector
size.
These two options are selected using the EVAL.
RESULT function located in the EVALUATE submenu.
10-8
Issue 04, 05/04
DGS Option
Evaluating Test Samples in DGS Mode
10.2 Evaluating Test Samples in

DGS Mode
Once the curve is recorded and displayed (by turning
DGS MODE on), echoes are automatically compared
to the DGS curve and evaluated based on the recorded
reference. There are two ways in which this comparison
can be made:
A%cAAmplitude of the signal crossing the A-Gate as
a percentage of the corresponding DGS Curve amplitude. This is shown in Figure 10-2. Note that this
comparison method will change to dBcA (the dB
equivalent height of the signal above or below the
corresponding DGS Curve amplitude) when the AMP
MODE function is set to dB THRESHOLD.
ERSEquivalent Reflector Size evaluates the
reflected echo and calculates the equivalent reflector
size.
These two options are selected using the EVAL.
RESULT function located in the EVALUATE submenu.
10-8
Issue 04, 05/04
BEA (Backwall Echo Attenuator) Option
Issue 04, 05/04
Issue 04, 05/04
11
11-1
11
11-1
Using Backwall Echo Attenuator Mode
The USN 58 is available with an optional Backwall

Echo Attenuator (BEA) feature. This feature is
accessed through the PLSRVR menu by pressing u
below the BCK ATTN submenu. The BEA feature
allows the user to position the B-Gate to correspond
with a specific test-material depth (typically to match
the test parts backwall), and then adjust the gain
setting for only those echoes falling within the B-Gates
region.
When BEA is activated, the gain applied to the
backwall echo is set lower than the system gain
applied to all other echoes. This allows backwall
echoes that peak higher than full-screen height to be
brought into view on-screen and monitored. All gaterelated functions, including gate-logic control, timebase measurements, amplitude measurements, and
TTL alarm assignments operate as they do when not in
BEA mode. See section 11.2 for additional notes on
BEA operation.
11.1 Using Backwall Echo

Attenuator Mode
H Note:
B-Gate must be activated to use BEA.
When the BEA function is in use, a different gain level
is applied to backwall and other echoes that fall within
the region of the B-Gate. To operate in BEA mode do
the following:
Step 1: Activate Gate B.

Step 2: Press u below the PLSRVR menu on the
Home Menu Bar.
Step 3: Press u below the BCK ATTN submenu. The
function bar will appear as shown in Figure 11-1.
Step 4: Press v next to the MODE function until the
BEA Mode is turned ON. The BEA icon will appear. The
value of BW GAIN is now the level of gain applied to
all A-Scan echoes falling within B-Gates region.
Step 5: Press v next to the B-START or GATE B
WIDTH functions to adjust the position and width of
Gate B.
11-2
Issue 04, 05/04
Using Backwall Echo Attenuator Mode
The USN 58 is available with an optional Backwall

Echo Attenuator (BEA) feature. This feature is
accessed through the PLSRVR menu by pressing u
below the BCK ATTN submenu. The BEA feature
allows the user to position the B-Gate to correspond
with a specific test-material depth (typically to match
the test parts backwall), and then adjust the gain
setting for only those echoes falling within the B-Gates
region.
When BEA is activated, the gain applied to the
backwall echo is set lower than the system gain
applied to all other echoes. This allows backwall
echoes that peak higher than full-screen height to be
brought into view on-screen and monitored. All gaterelated functions, including gate-logic control, timebase measurements, amplitude measurements, and
TTL alarm assignments operate as they do when not in
BEA mode. See section 11.2 for additional notes on
BEA operation.
11.1 Using Backwall Echo

Attenuator Mode
H Note:
B-Gate must be activated to use BEA.
When the BEA function is in use, a different gain level
is applied to backwall and other echoes that fall within
the region of the B-Gate. To operate in BEA mode do
the following:
Step 1: Activate Gate B.
Step 2: Press u below the PLSRVR menu on the

Home Menu Bar.
Step 3: Press u below the BCK ATTN submenu. The
function bar will appear as shown in Figure 11-1.
Step 4: Press v next to the MODE function until the
BEA Mode is turned ON. The BEA icon will appear. The
value of BW GAIN is now the level of gain applied to
all A-Scan echoes falling within B-Gates region.
Step 5: Press v next to the B-START or GATE B
WIDTH functions to adjust the position and width of
Gate B.
11-2
Issue 04, 05/04
Notes on Operating in BEA Mode
Step 6: Press v next to the BW GAIN function, then

adjust the amount of gain to be applied to all signals
within B-Gates region.
11.2 Notes on Operating in BEA

Mode
The following notes identify other instrument features
that are affected when operating in BEA mode.
The B-Gate Start Mode (Gates Gate Mode Start
Mode) cannot be set to A-Gate (but can be set to IP
or IF-Gate)
FIGURE 11-1Turning on the BEA function allows the
gain level applied to all echoes in Gate B (the right-hand
gate in this figure) to be adjusted independent of the
level of gain applied to all other echoes. In this case 28
dB is applied to all echoes within the region of Gate B,
while 52 dB is applied to all other echoes.
When A-Gate and B-Gate overlap, the gain setting

for BEA/B-Gate supersedes the general instrumentgain setting and is applied to all echoes under BGates region.
Time-base and amplitude measurements involving
Gate B are made based on the attenuated echos
position in Gate B and the user-defined trigger point
(Flank or Peak).
All gate logic and TTL alarm assignment functions
operate as they do when not in BEA mode
Issue 04, 05/04
11-3
Notes on Operating in BEA Mode
Step 6: Press v next to the BW GAIN function, then

adjust the amount of gain to be applied to all signals
within B-Gates region.
11.2 Notes on Operating in BEA

Mode
The following notes identify other instrument features
that are affected when operating in BEA mode.
The B-Gate Start Mode (Gates Gate Mode Start
Mode) cannot be set to A-Gate (but can be set to IP
or IF-Gate)
FIGURE 11-1Turning on the BEA function allows the
gain level applied to all echoes in Gate B (the right-hand
gate in this figure) to be adjusted independent of the
level of gain applied to all other echoes. In this case 28
dB is applied to all echoes within the region of Gate B,
while 52 dB is applied to all other echoes.
When A-Gate and B-Gate overlap, the gain setting

for BEA/B-Gate supersedes the general instrumentgain setting and is applied to all echoes under BGates region.
Time-base and amplitude measurements involving
Gate B are made based on the attenuated echos
position in Gate B and the user-defined trigger point
(Flank or Peak).
All gate logic and TTL alarm assignment functions
operate as they do when not in BEA mode
Issue 04, 05/04
11-3
11-4
Issue 04, 05/04
11-4
Issue 04, 05/04
VGA Connector Option
Issue 04, 05/04
Issue 04, 05/04
12
12-1
12
12-1

The instrument can be equipped with an additional
DB15 style connector to which a monitor or PC
projector can connect. The VGA output is provided
through this direct plug-in connector, which is located
on the instruments back panel, beneath the hand grip.
12-2
Issue 04, 05/04

The instrument can be equipped with an additional
DB15 style connector to which a monitor or PC
projector can connect. The VGA output is provided
through this direct plug-in connector, which is located
on the instruments back panel, beneath the hand grip.
12-2
Issue 04, 05/04
Appendix
Issue 04, 05/04
13-1
Appendix
Issue 04, 05/04
13
13
13-1
Appendix
Charging the Standard Lithium Battery Pack
13.1 Charging the Standard

Lithium Battery Pack
The Lithium battery packs charger contains several

indicating LEDs:
USN 58 Series instruments are supplied with a

standard Lithium battery pack. This pack is specially
designed for the USN 58 and approximately doubles
the operating time when compared to optional NiMH
D-cells.
Only the standard Lithium battery pack can be

charged in the instrument by connecting the
Krautkramer Lithium battery charger to the Lithium
battery charging port identified in Figure 1-1 (4-pin
connector on the side of the Lithium battery pack).
Green CHARGE LED illuminates to indicate that the

Lithium battery pack is being charged.
Yellow DONE LED illuminates to indicate that the
battery charging cycle is complete.
H Note:
When both the Green CHARGE LED and the Yellow
DONE LED are on at the same time a trickle charge is
going into the batteries to top them off.
H Note:
A spare Lithium battery pack can be recharged by
simply connecting it to the Lithium Battery Pack
Charger.
The Lithium battery packs charging cycle takes
approximately seven hours to complete. The
instrument can be used while the Lithium charger is
connected and the battery pack is being charged but
the charging time will be somewhat longer.
13-2
Green POWER LED illuminates anytime the charger

is connected to either the battery pack or an AC
power source.
Red ERROR LED has two functions. It can indicate

that the pack voltage has fallen too low to be
recharged. In this case the pack is either worn out or
contains a faulty cell. The pack must be replaced.
The LED can also indicate that an over/under
temperature condition exists in the pack. The
temperature of the pack must remain within a range
of 0 to 60 degree C in order for the charger to
Issue 04, 05/04
Appendix
Charging the Standard Lithium Battery Pack
13.1 Charging the Standard

Lithium Battery Pack
The Lithium battery packs charger contains several

indicating LEDs:
USN 58 Series instruments are supplied with a

standard Lithium battery pack. This pack is specially
designed for the USN 58 and approximately doubles
the operating time when compared to optional NiMH
D-cells.
Only the standard Lithium battery pack can be

charged in the instrument by connecting the
Krautkramer Lithium battery charger to the Lithium
battery charging port identified in Figure 1-1 (4-pin
connector on the side of the Lithium battery pack).
H Note:
A spare Lithium battery pack can be recharged by
simply connecting it to the Lithium Battery Pack
Charger.
The Lithium battery packs charging cycle takes
approximately seven hours to complete. The
instrument can be used while the Lithium charger is
connected and the battery pack is being charged but
the charging time will be somewhat longer.
13-2
Green POWER LED illuminates anytime the charger

is connected to either the battery pack or an AC
power source.
Green CHARGE LED illuminates to indicate that the
Lithium battery pack is being charged.
Yellow DONE LED illuminates to indicate that the
battery charging cycle is complete.
H Note:
When both the Green CHARGE LED and the Yellow
DONE LED are on at the same time a trickle charge is
going into the batteries to top them off.
Red ERROR LED has two functions. It can indicate
that the pack voltage has fallen too low to be
recharged. In this case the pack is either worn out or
contains a faulty cell. The pack must be replaced.
The LED can also indicate that an over/under
temperature condition exists in the pack. The
temperature of the pack must remain within a range
of 0 to 60 degree C in order for the charger to
Issue 04, 05/04
Appendix
Charging the Optional D-Cell Batteries
operate. If the temperature of the pack falls outside

of these limits, the RED LED will illuminate and
charging will stop. When the pack temperature
returns to a safe operating level, charging will
resume.

Batteries
Step 1: To charge the six optional rechargeable
batteries (9.0 Ahr NiMH), you must first remove the
optional battery tray. To remove the tray simply place
the instrument screen-side down and loosen the four
knurl-headed screws on the rear of the instrument.
When all four screws are loosened (they will not
separate completely from the tray), lift the battery tray
off of the back of the instrument.
Step 2: A separate battery charger is required to
charge the 9.0 Ahr NiMH batteries when removed from
the instrument. Plug the chargers power cord into a
100-240 VAC power source. Its GREEN indication
lamp will illuminate when the charger is supplied with
power.
Step 3: The charger adapter and battery pack are

designed to work together. Only use the charger to
charge batteries that are installed in the pack. Mate the
battery pack to the charger adapter as shown above.
Note that the charging terminals from the pack and
charger adapter must be properly aligned for charging
to proceed.
Step 4: When charging the battery pack, the chargers
YELLOW indication lamp will light steadily.
Step 5: When charging is complete (typically after six
to seven hours) the YELLOW indication lamp will blink.
You may remove the battery pack from the charger and
re-install the pack to the back of the instrument.
H Note:
The optional external charger may only be used to
charge 9.0 Ahr NiMH batteries.
Issue 04, 05/04
Appendix
Charging the Optional D-Cell Batteries
operate. If the temperature of the pack falls outside

of these limits, the RED LED will illuminate and
charging will stop. When the pack temperature
returns to a safe operating level, charging will
resume.

Batteries
Step 1: To charge the six optional rechargeable
batteries (9.0 Ahr NiMH), you must first remove the
optional battery tray. To remove the tray simply place
the instrument screen-side down and loosen the four
knurl-headed screws on the rear of the instrument.
When all four screws are loosened (they will not
separate completely from the tray), lift the battery tray
off of the back of the instrument.
Step 2: A separate battery charger is required to
charge the 9.0 Ahr NiMH batteries when removed from
the instrument. Plug the chargers power cord into a
100-240 VAC power source. Its GREEN indication
lamp will illuminate when the charger is supplied with
power.
13-3
Step 3: The charger adapter and battery pack are

designed to work together. Only use the charger to
charge batteries that are installed in the pack. Mate the
battery pack to the charger adapter as shown above.
Note that the charging terminals from the pack and
charger adapter must be properly aligned for charging
to proceed.
Step 4: When charging the battery pack, the chargers
YELLOW indication lamp will light steadily.
Step 5: When charging is complete (typically after six
to seven hours) the YELLOW indication lamp will blink.
You may remove the battery pack from the charger and
re-install the pack to the back of the instrument.
H Note:
The optional external charger may only be used to
charge 9.0 Ahr NiMH batteries.
Issue 04, 05/04
13-3
13-4
Issue 04, 05/04
13-4
Issue 04, 05/04
Index
Issue 04, 05/04
14-1
Index
Issue 04, 05/04
14
14
14-1
Index
ASCAN COLOR ...................................................... 2-8
Symbols
ASCAN MODE ........................................................ 2-8

% Screen Height .................................................... 3-11
Attaching Notes .....................................................4-10
Attachment, Probe ................................................. 2-11
A%A ...................................................................... 3-16
ATTENUATION ........................................................ 6-7
A%B ...................................................................... 3-16
Audible Alarm ......................................................... 3-9
A%cA ....................................................................10-6
AUTOCAL ..............................................................2-20
A-SCAN ENHANCE ................................................ 6-4
AWS D1.1 ............................................................... 6-7
A-Scan Range ........................................................2-11
A-Scan REJECT Level ........................................... 2-19

ALARMS ................................................................. 3-9
ALRM RST ............................................................ 4-13
AMPL CORRECT ................................................... 10-6
AMPLITUDE .......................................................... 3-11
Amplitude Measurement ........................................ 3-11
analog outputs ........................................................ 7-3
angle beam probe ................................................... 3-15
14-2
Backwall Echo Attenuator ............................. 1-24, 11-2

BASELINE BREAK ................................................. 6-4
BATTERY TYPE ..................................................... 2-2
Baud Rate ..............................................................5-20
BCK ATTN ............................................................. 11-2
BEA .......................................................................11-2
Beam Index Point (BIP) ......................................... 3-15
Behind the Freeze Mode ........................................ 4-15
Issue 04, 05/04
Index
ASCAN COLOR ...................................................... 2-8
Symbols
ASCAN MODE ........................................................ 2-8

% Screen Height .................................................... 3-11
Attaching Notes .....................................................4-10
Attachment, Probe ................................................. 2-11
A%A ...................................................................... 3-16
ATTENUATION ........................................................ 6-7
A%B ...................................................................... 3-16
Audible Alarm ......................................................... 3-9
A%cA ....................................................................10-6
AUTOCAL ..............................................................2-20
A-SCAN ENHANCE ................................................ 6-4
AWS D1.1 ............................................................... 6-7
A-Scan Range ........................................................2-11
A-Scan REJECT Level ........................................... 2-19

ALARMS ................................................................. 3-9
ALRM RST ............................................................ 4-13
AMPL CORRECT ................................................... 10-6
AMPLITUDE .......................................................... 3-11
Amplitude Measurement ........................................ 3-11
analog outputs ........................................................ 7-3
angle beam probe ................................................... 3-15
14-2
Backwall Echo Attenuator ............................. 1-24, 11-2

BASELINE BREAK ................................................. 6-4
BATTERY TYPE ..................................................... 2-2
Baud Rate ..............................................................5-20
BCK ATTN ............................................................. 11-2
BEA .......................................................................11-2
Beam Index Point (BIP) ......................................... 3-15
Behind the Freeze Mode ........................................ 4-15
Issue 04, 05/04
Index
BRIGHTNESS ........................................................ 2-6
DAC ........................................................................ 8-2
BW .........................................................................10-4
DAC curves ............................................................. 8-6
DAC Offset Curves ................................................. 8-9

DAMPING. ............................................................. 2-11
COLOR ................................................................... 2-7

COLORING ............................................................3-16
COLOR LEG .......................................................... 3-16
COMPARE ............................................................. 3-14
CONFIG Submenu ................................................. 1-12
CONTACT ............................................................... 9-3
COPY MODE .........................................................5-18
COUNT ................................................................... 6-3
CREATE NEW ........................................................ 5-6
CUSTOM LINEAR ................................................... 5-8
Data Out Inhibit ....................................................... 7-3

data-set file ............................................................. 5-6
Date ........................................................................ 2-4
Date Valid ................................................................ 7-3
DB ......................................................................... 3-17
dB Reference .......................................................... 4-6
dB STEP ................................................................ 4-4
dB Threshold .......................................................... 3-11
dBcA ...................................................................... 10-6
dBrA ...................................................................... 3-16
dBrB ...................................................................... 3-16
D1.1 RATING .......................................................... 6-7
dBtA ...................................................................... 3-16
DA .......................................................................... 3-17
dBtB ...................................................................... 3-16
Issue 04, 05/04
14-3
Index
BRIGHTNESS ........................................................ 2-6
DAC ........................................................................ 8-2
BW .........................................................................10-4
DAC curves ............................................................. 8-6

DAC Offset Curves ................................................. 8-9
DAMPING. ............................................................. 2-11

COLOR ................................................................... 2-7
Data Out Inhibit ....................................................... 7-3
COLORING ............................................................3-16
data-set file ............................................................. 5-6
COLOR LEG .......................................................... 3-16
Date ........................................................................ 2-4
COMPARE ............................................................. 3-14
Date Valid ................................................................ 7-3
CONFIG Submenu ................................................. 1-12
DB ......................................................................... 3-17
CONTACT ............................................................... 9-3
dB Reference .......................................................... 4-6
COPY MODE .........................................................5-18
dB STEP ................................................................ 4-4
COUNT ................................................................... 6-3
dB Threshold .......................................................... 3-11
CREATE NEW ........................................................ 5-6
dBcA ...................................................................... 10-6
CUSTOM LINEAR ................................................... 5-8
dBrA ...................................................................... 3-16
dBrB ...................................................................... 3-16
D1.1 RATING .......................................................... 6-7

DA .......................................................................... 3-17
dBtA ...................................................................... 3-16

dBtB ...................................................................... 3-16
Issue 04, 05/04
14-3
Index
DELAY MODE ........................................................ 9-3
ERS .......................................................................10-8
DELAY VELOCITY ................................................. 10-3
EVAL. RESULT ...................................................... 10-8
Deleting (CLEARING) Existing Data Files ..............5-11
External Descriptions .............................................. 7-3
DGS .......................................................................10-2
DGS Reference Curve ............................................10-2

Display Delay ......................................................... 2-14
Display Grid ............................................................ 2-6
Display Screen Features ........................................ 1-16
DISPLAY START ................................................... 2-15
DISPLAY-COLOR .................................................... 2-7
FBH .......................................................................10-4
Features of the USN 58 .........................................1-19
FILENAME ............................................................. 5-6
FILENAME Submenu ............................................. 1-14
FREEZE MODE ........................................... 3-12, 4-15
Distance Amplitude Correction ................................ 8-2
Distance Gain Size ................................................ 1-23
gain ......................................................................... 4-4
DUAL. ..................................................................... 2-9
GAIN Submenu ......................................................1-13
Gate Detection Method ........................................... 3-6
EFF. DIAMETER .................................................... 10-3

Equivalent Reflector Size ....................................... 10-8
GATE START .......................................................... 3-4

GATE THRESHOLD ................................................ 3-6
GATE WIDTH .......................................................... 3-6
14-4
Issue 04, 05/04
Index
DELAY MODE ........................................................ 9-3
ERS .......................................................................10-8
DELAY VELOCITY ................................................. 10-3
EVAL. RESULT ...................................................... 10-8
Deleting (CLEARING) Existing Data Files ..............5-11
External Descriptions .............................................. 7-3
DGS .......................................................................10-2
DGS Reference Curve ............................................10-2

Display Delay ......................................................... 2-14
Display Grid ............................................................ 2-6
Display Screen Features ........................................ 1-16
DISPLAY START ................................................... 2-15
DISPLAY-COLOR .................................................... 2-7
FBH .......................................................................10-4
Features of the USN 58 .........................................1-19
FILENAME ............................................................. 5-6
FILENAME Submenu ............................................. 1-14
FREEZE MODE ........................................... 3-12, 4-15
Distance Amplitude Correction ................................ 8-2
Distance Gain Size ................................................ 1-23
gain ......................................................................... 4-4
DUAL. ..................................................................... 2-9
GAIN Submenu ......................................................1-13
Gate Detection Method ........................................... 3-6
EFF. DIAMETER .................................................... 10-3

Equivalent Reflector Size .......................................10-8
GATE START .......................................................... 3-4

GATE THRESHOLD ................................................ 3-6
GATE WIDTH .......................................................... 3-6
14-4
Issue 04, 05/04
Index
GATEMODE Submenu ........................................... 1-13
GATES menu .......................................................... 3-2

GATES-ALARMS-LOGIC ........................................ 3-9
GRID. ...................................................................... 2-6
LA ..........................................................................3-19
Language ................................................................ 2-4
LATCHED ...............................................................3-11
LB ..........................................................................3-19
HELP SCREENS ................................................... 4-17
LINEAR ................................................................... 5-8
HORN ..................................................................... 3-9
LOCK .....................................................................3-21
LOG TO FILE ......................................................... 5-19

LOG TO PORT ....................................................... 5-19
icons ...................................................................... 1-19
Logger Files ............................................................ 5-6
IF ADV .................................................................... 9-3
LOGIC .................................................................... 3-9
IF Gate ................................................................... 9-2
LOS .......................................................................5-20
IF OFFSET ............................................................. 9-7
Loss of Signal ........................................................ 5-20
Immersion Testing ................................................... 9-3
LRG DISP .............................................................. 4-13
INDICATION ............................................................ 6-7

INSTANTANIOUS ...................................................3-11
M
MAGNIFY ..............................................................4-10
Issue 04, 05/04
14-5
Index
GATEMODE Submenu ...........................................1-13
GATES menu .......................................................... 3-2

GATES-ALARMS-LOGIC ........................................ 3-9
GRID. ...................................................................... 2-6
LA ..........................................................................3-19
Language ................................................................ 2-4
LATCHED ...............................................................3-11
LB ..........................................................................3-19
HELP SCREENS ................................................... 4-17
LINEAR ................................................................... 5-8
HORN ..................................................................... 3-9
LOCK .....................................................................3-21
LOG TO FILE ......................................................... 5-19

LOG TO PORT ....................................................... 5-19
icons ......................................................................1-19
Logger Files ............................................................ 5-6
IF ADV .................................................................... 9-3
LOGIC .................................................................... 3-9
IF Gate ................................................................... 9-2
LOS .......................................................................5-20
IF OFFSET ............................................................. 9-7
Loss of Signal ........................................................5-20
Immersion Testing ................................................... 9-3
LRG DISP ..............................................................4-13
INDICATION ............................................................ 6-7

INSTANTANIOUS ...................................................3-11
M
MAGNIFY ..............................................................4-10
Issue 04, 05/04
14-5
Index
MAGNIFY GATE .................................................... 4-13
OFFSET ................................................................. 8-9
MASTER LOCK ..................................................... 3-20
Optional Features ...................................................1-23
MAT ATTN ..............................................................10-6
OPTIONS Submenu ...............................................1-12
material-thickness limits ........................................ 3-11
Output Delay ........................................................... 7-3
memo ....................................................................5-12
Outputting to a Computer ....................................... 5-20
MULTISTORE ......................................................... 5-8
MUXD Ascan Enable .............................................. 7-5

PA ..........................................................................3-17
PARADUMP ...........................................................5-19
navigate through the file contents .......................... 4-10
PB ......................................................................... 3-17
NEG HALFWAVE ................................................... 2-17
PEAK STD ............................................................ 3-14
NOISE IMMN .......................................................... 6-2
POS HALFWAVE ................................................... 2-17
Noise Immunization ................................................ 6-2
POSITION .............................................................. 3-4
Notes for Attachment to Thickness

Measurements ................................................ 5-14
Positioning Gates .................................................... 3-4
Previewing Existing Data Files ............................... 5-11
O-DIAMETER ........................................................3-16
Pre-calibration Check List ...................................... 2-18
PRF .......................................................................2-15
PRF VALUE ........................................................... 2-15
14-6
Issue 04, 05/04
Index
MAGNIFY GATE .................................................... 4-13
OFFSET ................................................................. 8-9
MASTER LOCK ..................................................... 3-20
Optional Features ...................................................1-23
MAT ATTN ..............................................................10-6
OPTIONS Submenu ...............................................1-12
material-thickness limits ........................................ 3-11
Output Delay ........................................................... 7-3
memo ....................................................................5-12
Outputting to a Computer ....................................... 5-20
MULTISTORE ......................................................... 5-8
MUXD Ascan Enable .............................................. 7-5

PA ..........................................................................3-17
PARADUMP ...........................................................5-19
navigate through the file contents .......................... 4-10
PB .........................................................................3-17
NEG HALFWAVE ...................................................2-17
PEAK STD ............................................................ 3-14
NOISE IMMN .......................................................... 6-2
POS HALFWAVE ................................................... 2-17
Noise Immunization ................................................ 6-2
POSITION .............................................................. 3-4
Notes for Attachment to Thickness

Measurements ................................................5-14
Positioning Gates .................................................... 3-4
Previewing Existing Data Files ............................... 5-11
O-DIAMETER ........................................................3-16
Pre-calibration Check List ...................................... 2-18
PRF .......................................................................2-15
PRF VALUE ........................................................... 2-15
14-6
Issue 04, 05/04
Index
PRINTER ...............................................................5-16
RANGE Submenu ..................................................1-12
Printing a Report .................................................... 5-16
RB ......................................................................... 3-17
PROBE # ............................................................... 10-2
RECEIVER Submenu ............................................1-13
PROBE ANGLE ..................................................... 3-15
RECEIVER-FREQUENCY ...................................... 2-9
Probe Attachment .................................................. 2-11
RECORD ................................................................ 8-3
PROBE DELAY ..................................................... 2-22
RECTIFY ...............................................................2-17
PROBE NAME ....................................................... 10-3
REF ATTEN ........................................................... 10-6
Probe Type .............................................................. 2-9
REF CORR ............................................................10-6
Pulser VOLTAGE Level........................................... 2-18
REF ECHO ............................................................10-4
Pulser Repetition Frequency .................................. 2-15
REFERENCE .......................................................... 6-7
PULSER Submenu ................................................1-12
Reference Echo .....................................................10-2
Pulser Type ............................................................ 2-17
REFERENCE TYPE ............................................... 10-4
Pulser Width ...........................................................2-18
REJECT ................................................................ 2-19
PULSER-DAMPING ...............................................2-11
remote control ......................................................... 7-6
REPORT ................................................................ 5-18

Report Headers ......................................................5-12
RA ......................................................................... 3-17
Reports ..................................................................5-16
RANGE ..................................................................2-14
Issue 04, 05/04
14-7
Index
PRINTER ...............................................................5-16
RANGE Submenu ..................................................1-12
Printing a Report .................................................... 5-16
RB .........................................................................3-17
PROBE # ............................................................... 10-2
RECEIVER Submenu ............................................1-13
PROBE ANGLE ..................................................... 3-15
RECEIVER-FREQUENCY ...................................... 2-9
Probe Attachment .................................................. 2-11
RECORD ................................................................ 8-3
PROBE DELAY ..................................................... 2-22
RECTIFY ...............................................................2-17
PROBE NAME .......................................................10-3
REF ATTEN ...........................................................10-6
Probe Type .............................................................. 2-9
REF CORR ............................................................10-6
Pulser VOLTAGE Level ...........................................2-18
REF ECHO ............................................................10-4
Pulser Repetition Frequency .................................. 2-15
REFERENCE .......................................................... 6-7
PULSER Submenu ................................................1-12
Reference Echo .....................................................10-2
Pulser Type ............................................................ 2-17
REFERENCE TYPE............................................... 10-4
Pulser Width ...........................................................2-18
REJECT ................................................................2-19
PULSER-DAMPING ...............................................2-11
remote control ......................................................... 7-6
REPORT ................................................................5-18
Report Headers ......................................................5-12
RA .........................................................................3-17
Reports ..................................................................5-16
RANGE ..................................................................2-14
Issue 04, 05/04
14-7
Index
Resetting Latched Alarms ......................................4-13
SPARKLE ............................................................... 6-4
Resetting the Instrument ......................................... 6-9
SPIKE ................................................................... 2-17
RESULTS ..............................................................3-19
SQUARE ................................................................ 2-17
REVERSE VIDEO .................................................. 2-7
START MODE ......................................................... 9-5
RF ..........................................................................2-17
TCG ........................................................................ 8-2
S-REF1 .................................................................. 2-20
TCG ATTENUATION ................................................ 8-4
S-REF2 .................................................................. 2-20
TCG CURVE ........................................................... 8-4
SA ......................................................................... 3-17
TCG reference points .............................................. 8-4
SAP Out ................................................................. 7-5
TEST ATTEN ......................................................... 10-6
SAVE EDITS .......................................................... 5-8
Text-Entry feature ................................................... 5-12
SB ......................................................................... 3-17
thickness limits ...................................................... 3-12
SBA .......................................................................3-17
Thickness Measurements ...................................... 5-10
SDH .......................................................................10-4
Time ....................................................................... 2-5
Service .................................................................. 0-13
Time Corrected Gain ............................................... 8-2
SMART VIEW ......................................................... 6-3
TIMED ................................................................... 3-11
14-8
Issue 04, 05/04
Index
Resetting Latched Alarms ......................................4-13
SPARKLE ............................................................... 6-4
Resetting the Instrument ......................................... 6-9
SPIKE ...................................................................2-17
RESULTS ..............................................................3-19
SQUARE ................................................................2-17
REVERSE VIDEO .................................................. 2-7
START MODE ......................................................... 9-5
RF ..........................................................................2-17
TCG ........................................................................ 8-2
S-REF1 ..................................................................2-20
TCG ATTENUATION ................................................ 8-4
S-REF2 ..................................................................2-20
TCG CURVE ........................................................... 8-4
SA ......................................................................... 3-17
TCG reference points .............................................. 8-4
SAP Out ................................................................. 7-5
TEST ATTEN ......................................................... 10-6
SAVE EDITS .......................................................... 5-8
Text-Entry feature ................................................... 5-12
SB ......................................................................... 3-17
thickness limits ...................................................... 3-12
SBA .......................................................................3-17
Thickness Measurements ...................................... 5-10
SDH .......................................................................10-4
Time ....................................................................... 2-5
Service .................................................................. 0-13
Time Corrected Gain ............................................... 8-2
SMART VIEW ......................................................... 6-3
TIMED ...................................................................3-11
14-8
Issue 04, 05/04
Index
TRANSFER CORRECTION .................................... 8-9
TRIG Menu ............................................................3-14
TTL OUT ................................................................ 3-10
X
X value .................................................................. 3-15
XTAL FREQUENCY ...............................................10-3
TTL Outputs ............................................................ 3-8
U
Units of Measurement ............................................. 2-5
USER GAIN ............................................................ 4-4
V
VELOCITY ............................................................. 2-22
VIEW ...................................................................... 4-8
W
Warranty ................................................................ 0-13
WATER PATH VELOCITY ........................................ 9-3
weld rating ............................................................... 6-7
WINDOW ................................................................ 6-2
Issue 04, 05/04
14-9
Index
TRANSFER CORRECTION .................................... 8-9
TRIG Menu ............................................................3-14
TTL OUT ................................................................3-10
TTL Outputs ............................................................ 3-8
X
X value .................................................................. 3-15
XTAL FREQUENCY ...............................................10-3
U
Units of Measurement ............................................. 2-5
USER GAIN ............................................................ 4-4
V
VELOCITY .............................................................2-22
VIEW ...................................................................... 4-8
W
Warranty ................................................................0-13
WATER PATH VELOCITY ........................................ 9-3
weld rating ............................................................... 6-7
WINDOW ................................................................ 6-2
Issue 04, 05/04
14-9

USN58 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

USN58 Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Inspection Technologies

1 Understanding the Keypad,

Battery installation ................................. 1-2

Powering On and Off the Instrument .... 1-5

Keypad and Knob Features ................... 1-5

USN 58 Menus and Functions ............... 1-8

Display Screen Features .......................1-16

Features of the USN 58 ......................... 1-19

Whats in this Manual ...........................1-21

Overview of Optional Features ............. 1-23

Krautkramer USN 58 Series

2 Setup and Calibration of the USN 58 . 2-1

Initial Instrument Setup .........................

Installing a Probe .................................. 2-8

Issue 04, 05/04

1 Understanding the Keypad,

Battery installation ................................. 1-2

Powering On and Off the Instrument .... 1-5

Keypad and Knob Features ................... 1-5

USN 58 Menus and Functions ............... 1-8

Display Screen Features .......................1-16

Features of the USN 58 ......................... 1-19

Whats in this Manual ...........................1-21

Overview of Optional Features ............. 1-23

Krautkramer USN 58 Series

2 Setup and Calibration of the USN 58 . 2-1

Issue 04, 05/04

Initial Instrument Setup .........................

Installing a Probe .................................. 2-8

Adjusting the A-Scan ............................ 2-11

Calibrating the Instrument .................... 2-19

3 Configuring Your Instrument

Issue 04, 05/04

Configuring the A and B-Gates .............

Krautkramer USN 58 Series

Adjusting the A-Scan ............................ 2-11

Calibrating the Instrument .................... 2-19

3 Configuring Your Instrument

Issue 04, 05/04

Configuring the A and B-Gates .............

Krautkramer USN 58 Series

Setting the Minimum and Maximum

Assigning Measured Readings to the

Saving the Instrument Configuration in a

Using the Master Lock (all models)

4 Using the Test Menu .......................... 4-1

Accessing the TEST Menu ..................... 4-2

Setting the Freeze-Mode Action ...........3-12

Using Angle Beam Probes and the TRIG

Setting the Gain ..................................... 4-4

Using the dB Reference Feature ............ 4-6

Displaying Measured Readings ............3-16

Changing the Displayed VIEW .............. 4-8

Krautkramer USN 58 Series

Issue 04, 05/04

Setting the Minimum and Maximum

Assigning Measured Readings to the

Saving the Instrument Configuration in a

Using the Master Lock (all models)

4 Using the Test Menu .......................... 4-1

Accessing the TEST Menu ..................... 4-2

Setting the Freeze-Mode Action ...........3-12

Using Angle Beam Probes and the TRIG